Energy SB-SD-SCW600

Compact controller with Hot Water

management for domestic heat pumps

<IMG INFO>
425,15
349,55
0
2
46,85
14,15
-1
CONTENTS
1 How to use this manual........................................................................................................................................ 7
2 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................................. 8
2.1 General Description......................................................................................................................................................................... 8
2.1.1 Typical applications: .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8
2.1.2 Technical data: .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8
2.1.3 Main functions: ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8
2.2 Models and Features ....................................................................................................................................................................... 8
3 User Interface (folder PAr/UI) ............................................................................................................................ 9
3.1 Keys...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9
3.1.1 Description of keys and associated functions............................................................................................................................................................................ 9
3.1.2 Stand-by.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 11
3.1.2.1 Device ‘On’ --> ‘Standby’.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11
3.1.2.2 Device ‘Standby’ --> ‘On’.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11
3.1.3 Description of keys - combined action...................................................................................................................................................................................... 12
3.1.3.3 Manual alarm acknowledgment and reset .................................................................................................................................................................... 12
3.2 LEDs and Display ............................................................................................................................................................................ 13
3.2.1 Display ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 13
3.2.2 LEDs: decimal point ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 13
3.2.3 LEDs: States and Operating Modes ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 14
3.2.4 LEDs: Values and Units of Measure ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 14
3.2.5 LEDs: utilities...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
3.3 First switch on ................................................................................................................................................................................. 15
3.4 Access to folders - menu structure ........................................................................................................................................... 16
3.4.1 Main Display Menu.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 16
3.4.2 Operating Mode Menu................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 17
3.4.3 States Menu....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 18
3.4.3.1 Display Inputs/Outputs (AiL, diL, tCL1/AOL, dOL)....................................................................................................................................................... 18
3.4.3.2 Setting the clock (CL) .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 19
3.4.3.3 Alarm Display (AL)................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 22
3.4.3.4 Example of how to set the setpoint (SP) ....................................................................................................................................................................... 23
3.4.3.5 Display and reset compressor/pump hours .................................................................................................................................................................. 26
3.4.4 Programming menu......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 27
3.4.4.6 Parameters (folder PAr) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 27
3.4.5 Functions (Par/FnC folder) ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 28
3.4.6 Entering a password (Par/PASS folder)...................................................................................................................................................................................... 28
3.4.7 Alarm events (Par/EU folder) ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 29
4 System configuration (folder PAr/CF) ............................................................................................................ 32
4.1 Configuration of analogue inputs.............................................................................................................................................. 32
4.1.1 Configuration of SE600 expansion analogue inputs .............................................................................................................................................................. 32
4.1.2 Configuring SKW remote terminal analogue inputs .............................................................................................................................................................. 32
4.2 Configuration of digital inputs ................................................................................................................................................... 35
4.3 Configuration of digital outputs................................................................................................................................................. 37
4.4 Configuration of analogue outputs........................................................................................................................................... 38
4.5 Serial configurations - Protocol parameters ........................................................................................................................... 40
4.6 SKP 10 32x74 terminal.................................................................................................................................................................. 41
4.7 SKW22 - SKW22L remote LCD terminal................................................................................................................................... 41
5 Operating Modes – Temperature Control (folder PAr/tr)........................................................................ 42
5.1 Temperature controller setpoint and hysteresis.................................................................................................................... 42
5.1.1 Setpoint and hysteresis from parameter value ....................................................................................................................................................................... 42
5.1.2 Real setpoint and hysteresis.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 42
5.1.2.1 Setpoint differential: dynamic differential..................................................................................................................................................................... 42
5.1.2.2 Setpoint differential: Economy differential ................................................................................................................................................................... 43
5.1.2.3 Setpoint and hysteresis differentials Adaptive function............................................................................................................................................ 43
5.1.2.4 Setpoint and hysteresis differentials Remote differentials (from serial) .............................................................................................................. 43
5.2 Temperature controller................................................................................................................................................................ 44
5.2.1 Temperature control probes ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 44
5.2.2 Proportional temperature control .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 45
5.2.3 Proportional power step temperature control in Cool/Heat mode.................................................................................................................................. 45
5.2.4 Temperature control at INVERTER in Cool / Heat mode ..................................................................................................................................................... 46
5.2.5 Differential temperature control................................................................................................................................................................................................. 47
5.2.5.1 Differential temperature control in Cool / Heat mode ............................................................................................................................................. 47
5.2.6 Digital temperature control .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 48

EN
6 Operating States (folder PAr/St) ...................................................................................................................... 49
6.1 Automatic changeover.................................................................................................................................................................. 50
6.1.1 Example of automatic changeover based on water temperature...................................................................................................................................... 50
6.1.2 Example of automatic changeover based on external air temperature........................................................................................................................... 50
6.2 Operating states table................................................................................................................................................................... 51
6.3 Reversal valve management ........................................................................................................................................................ 52
6.3.1 Mode Change.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 52
7 Compressors (folder PAr/CP)............................................................................................................................ 54
7.1 Types of compressor ..................................................................................................................................................................... 54
7.1.1 Non-power stage compressors (CP00 = 0)............................................................................................................................................................................... 54
7.1.2 Power stage compressors (CP00 = 1,2) ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 55
7.2 Compressor configuration ........................................................................................................................................................... 55
7.3 Compressor timing ........................................................................................................................................................................ 56
7.3.1 Minimum time between switching off/on for a given compressor................................................................................................................................... 56
7.3.2 Minimum time between switching on/on for a given compressor ................................................................................................................................... 56
7.3.3 Minimum compressor on time .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 56
7.3.4 Minimum time between the switching on of more than one compressor ..................................................................................................................... 57
7.3.5 Minimum time between the switching off of more than one compressor..................................................................................................................... 57
7.3.6 Minimum compressor on time for power stage increase .................................................................................................................................................... 57
7.3.7 Minimum compressor switch on time for decrease in power stages ............................................................................................................................... 57
7.3.8 Minimum time between switching on/off in defrost mode ................................................................................................................................................ 58
7.3.9 Other timings .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 58
7.4 Compressor on/off sequence ..................................................................................................................................................... 59
7.4.1 Availability of resources ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 59
7.4.2 Managing resources ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 59
7.4.3 Resource selection criterion ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 60
7.4.4 Selecting the circuit/evaporator .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 60
7.4.5 Selecting the compressor or power stage ................................................................................................................................................................................ 61
8 Internal circuit pump (folder PAr/PI).............................................................................................................. 62
8.1 Configuration of internal circuit water pump ........................................................................................................................ 62
8.1.1 Control of the second pump ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 63
8.2 Continuous operation ................................................................................................................................................................... 63
8.2.1.1 Internal circuit pump digital control in Cool / Heat................................................................................................................................................... 63
8.2.1.2 Internal circuit pump analogue control in Cool / Heat ............................................................................................................................................. 63
8.3 Operation on call ........................................................................................................................................................................... 64
8.3.1.1 Internal circuit pump digital control in Cool / Heat................................................................................................................................................... 64
8.3.1.2 Internal circuit pump analogue control in Cool / Heat ............................................................................................................................................. 65
8.3.1.3 Operation on call: periodic pump activation................................................................................................................................................................ 65
8.4 Pump antilock mode ..................................................................................................................................................................... 66
8.5 Antifreeze operation with pump................................................................................................................................................ 67
9 Recirculation fan (folder PAr/FI)...................................................................................................................... 68
9.1.1 Continuous operation..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 68
9.1.2 Operation on call ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 68
9.1.2.1 Recirculation fan in Heating / Cooling ........................................................................................................................................................................... 69
9.2 Post-ventilation............................................................................................................................................................................... 69
10 External exchanger fan (folder PAr/FE).......................................................................................................... 70
10.1.1 Continuous operation ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 71
10.1.1.1 External exchanger fan digital control in Cool / Heat................................................................................................................................................ 71
10.1.1.2 External exchanger fan analogue control in Cool / Heat .......................................................................................................................................... 72
10.1.2 Operation on call........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 72
10.1.2.3 External exchanger fan digital control in Cool / Heat................................................................................................................................................ 73
10.1.2.4 External exchanger fan analogue control in Cool ....................................................................................................................................................... 74
10.1.2.5 External exchanger fan analogue control in Heat ....................................................................................................................................................... 74
10.2 Fan control in defrost ................................................................................................................................................................... 75
10.3 Fan control with single condensation....................................................................................................................................... 75
11 External circuit pump (folder PAr/PE) ............................................................................................................ 76
12 Internal exchanger electric heaters (folder PAr/HI) ................................................................................... 77
12.1 Internal antifreeze heater ............................................................................................................................................................ 77
12.1.1 Internal circuit antifreeze heater control ............................................................................................................................................................................ 78
12.2 Configuration of integration heaters ........................................................................................................................................ 79
Energy SB-SD-SCW600
3/240
 12.2.1 Integration heater differential ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 79
12.2.2 Integration heater regulation.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 81
12.3 Heaters in defrost mode .............................................................................................................................................................. 82
13 External exchanger electric heater parameters (folder PAr/HE) – electric Heaters.......................... 83
14 Auxiliary output (folder PAr/HA)..................................................................................................................... 85
15 Boiler (folder PAr/br) .......................................................................................................................................... 86
15.1 Boiler configuration....................................................................................................................................................................... 86
15.1.1 Boiler differential........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 87
15.1.2 Boiler regulation ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 88
16 Defrost (folder PAr/dF)....................................................................................................................................... 89
16.1 Defrost .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 90
16.1.1 Start defrost ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 90
16.1.2 Defrosting cycle .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 91
16.1.3 End defrost and coil drainage................................................................................................................................................................................................. 91
16.2 Start defrost setpoint .................................................................................................................................................................... 92
16.3 Management of defrost alarms .................................................................................................................................................. 92
16.4 Manual defrost................................................................................................................................................................................ 92
16.5 Power failure during defrost ....................................................................................................................................................... 92
17 Dynamic setpoint (folder PAr/dS) ................................................................................................................... 93
17.1 Modification (decalibration) of the setpoint as a function of the dynamic setpoint input ....................................... 93
17.1.1 Modification (decalibration) of the setpoint as a function of the dynamic setpoint input with positive offset............................................ 93
17.1.2 Modification (decalibration) of the setpoint as a function of the dynamic setpoint input with negative offset........................................... 94
17.2 Modification (decalibration) of the setpoint based on the external temperature....................................................... 94
17.2.1 Modification (decalibration) of the setpoint based on the external temperature (dS00=1) ............................................................................... 94
17.2.2 Fixed modification (decalibration) of the setpoint (dS00=2)........................................................................................................................................ 95
18 Adaptive (folder PAr/Ad) ................................................................................................................................... 96
18.1 Adaptive function with setpoint modification ....................................................................................................................... 96
18.2 Adaptive function with hysteresis modification..................................................................................................................... 98
18.3 Adaptive function with setpoint and hysteresis modification............................................................................................ 98
18.4 Setpoint regression........................................................................................................................................................................ 98
18.5 Protection......................................................................................................................................................................................... 99
19 Antifreeze parameters with heat pump (folder PAr/AF) - AntiFreeze ................................................100
20 Sanitary water and Anti-legionnaire's disease (folder PAr/AS) .............................................................102
20.1 Sanitary Water in HEAT mode ..................................................................................................................................................103
20.1.1 Sanitary water heater in Heat/Cool mode * .....................................................................................................................................................................105
20.2 Sanitary Water, Cool mode .......................................................................................................................................................105
20.2.1 Dynamic ACS setpoint.............................................................................................................................................................................................................107
20.3 Sanitary water regulation, AS mode........................................................................................................................................108
20.4 Anti-Legionnaire's Disease .........................................................................................................................................................108
20.4.1 ACS Heater for Anti-Legionnaire's Disease .......................................................................................................................................................................110
20.5 Sanitary Water Antifreeze ..........................................................................................................................................................111
21 Block Heat Pump (folder PAr/HP) .................................................................................................................111
21.1.1 Block heat pump 1 - setpoint ...............................................................................................................................................................................................113
21.1.2 Block heat pump from digital input ...................................................................................................................................................................................113
22 Power limitation (folder PAr/PL)....................................................................................................................114
22.1 Operating modes..........................................................................................................................................................................114
22.2 Power limitation - by external temperature (Cool and Heat) ..........................................................................................115
22.3 Power limitation - by temperature (Cool and Heat)...........................................................................................................116
22.4 Power limitation - by high pressure probe (Cool and Heat) ............................................................................................117
22.5 Power limitation - by low pressure probe (Cool and Heat)..............................................................................................118
22.6 Power limitation to 50%..............................................................................................................................................................119
23 Time Bands (folder PAr/tE)..............................................................................................................................120
24 Alarms and Diagnostics (folder PAr/AL) ......................................................................................................122
24.1.1 Digital alarms .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................123
24.1.1.1 Flow switch alarm ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................124
24.1.2 Analogue alarms .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................126
Energy SB-SD-SCW600
4/240
 24.1.3 Table of Alarms.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................127
25 Parameters (PAr).................................................................................................................................................134
25.1.1 Local I/O configuration parameters (CL) - Configuration Local .................................................................................................................................135
25.1.2 I/O configuration parameters expanded on expansion (CE) - Configuration Expansion.....................................................................................138
25.1.3 Remote I/O configuration parameters (Cr) - Configuration remote.........................................................................................................................143
25.1.4 Configuration parameters (CF) - Configuration ..............................................................................................................................................................144
25.1.5 User interface parameters (UI) - User Interface..............................................................................................................................................................145
25.1.6 Temperature control parameters (tr) - temperature controller.................................................................................................................................148
25.1.7 Mode selection parameters (St) - Operating modes .....................................................................................................................................................149
25.1.8 Compressor Parameters (CP) - Compressor .....................................................................................................................................................................150
25.1.9 Internal circuit pump parameters (PI) - Internal pump.................................................................................................................................................151
25.1.10 Recirculation fan parameters (FI) - Internal Fan .............................................................................................................................................................152
25.1.11 Secondary (external) exchanger fan parameters (FE) - External Fan ........................................................................................................................152
25.1.12 External circuit pump parameters (PE) - External Pump...............................................................................................................................................153
25.1.13 Electric heater parameters (HI) - Electric Heaters ..........................................................................................................................................................154
25.1.14 External exchanger electric heater parameters (HE) - Electric Heaters....................................................................................................................155
25.1.15 Auxiliary output parameters (HA) - Auxiliary Output....................................................................................................................................................155
25.1.16 Boiler parameters (br) -boiler...............................................................................................................................................................................................155
25.1.17 Defrost parameters (dF) - deFrost.......................................................................................................................................................................................156
25.1.18 Dynamic setpoint parameters (dS) - dynamic Setpoint ................................................................................................................................................156
25.1.19 Adaptive parameters (Ad) - Adaptive.................................................................................................................................................................................157
25.1.20 Antifreeze parameters with heat pump (AF) - AntiFreeze ...........................................................................................................................................157
25.1.21 Sanitary Water Parameters (AS) ...........................................................................................................................................................................................157
25.1.22 Heat pump block parameters (HP) - Heat Pump ............................................................................................................................................................159
25.1.23 Power limitation parameters (PL) - Power Limitation....................................................................................................................................................160
25.1.24 Time Band Parameters (tE) ....................................................................................................................................................................................................160
25.1.25 Alarm parameters (AL) - ALarm ...........................................................................................................................................................................................164
25.2 Parameters / visibility table, folder visibility table and client table................................................................................166
25.2.1 Parameters / visibility table ...................................................................................................................................................................................................167
25.2.2 Folder visibility table ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................188
25.2.3 Client Table ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................190
26 Functions (folder FnC) ......................................................................................................................................196
26.1 Manual defrost activation (dEF folder) ..................................................................................................................................197
26.2 Manual Reset (tA folder)............................................................................................................................................................197
26.3 Change On/OFF state (folder St) .............................................................................................................................................198
26.4 Multi Function key.......................................................................................................................................................................199
26.4.1 Download from reset ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................201
26.5 Reset alarm log (folder EUr) .....................................................................................................................................................202
27 Electrical Connections.......................................................................................................................................203
27.1 General warnings..........................................................................................................................................................................203
27.1.1 Power supply - High voltage inputs (relay) .......................................................................................................................................................................203
27.1.2 TRIAC ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................203
27.1.3 Analogue inputs-Probes .........................................................................................................................................................................................................203
27.1.4 Serial connections TTL connection......................................................................................................................................................................................203
27.2 Wiring diagrams............................................................................................................................................................................203
27.2.1 Wiring Diagrams........................................................................................................................................................................................................................204
27.2.2 Example of low voltage input/output connection..........................................................................................................................................................208
27.2.2.1 Example of AO1 / AO2 connection ...............................................................................................................................................................................208
27.2.2.2 Example of AO3 - AO4 connection ...............................................................................................................................................................................209
27.2.2.3 Example of AO5 connection............................................................................................................................................................................................209
27.2.2.4 Example of DO5 connection............................................................................................................................................................................................210
27.2.3 Example of connection of high voltage outputs .............................................................................................................................................................210
27.3 Examples of network connections...........................................................................................................................................210
27.3.1 Example of connection SBW600 – SE600 ..........................................................................................................................................................................210
27.3.2 Esempio collegamento SDW600/SCW600 – SE600 .........................................................................................................................................................210
27.4 SKP 10 Remote Terminal 32x74 ...............................................................................................................................................211
27.4.1 Example of connection SCW600 – SKP 10 ........................................................................................................................................................................211
27.5 SKW22 - SKW22L remote LCD terminal.................................................................................................................................212
27.5.1 Example of connection SCW600 – SE600 – SKP10 – SK22/22L...................................................................................................................................212
28 Mechanical Assembly ........................................................................................................................................213
29 Technical Data.....................................................................................................................................................215
29.1 General specifications .................................................................................................................................................................215
29.1.1 SB600 General specifications ................................................................................................................................................................................................215
Energy SB-SD-SCW600
5/240
 29.2 I/O features....................................................................................................................................................................................216
29.3 Mechanical specifications ..........................................................................................................................................................217
29.4 Display and LEDS ..........................................................................................................................................................................217
29.5 Serial................................................................................................................................................................................................217
29.6 Transformer...................................................................................................................................................................................217
29.7 Mechanical dimensions ..............................................................................................................................................................218
29.8 Permitted use ................................................................................................................................................................................219
29.8.1 Unintended Use ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................219
29.9 Responsibility and Residual Risks.............................................................................................................................................219
29.10 Disclaimer ..................................................................................................................................................................................219
30 DeviceManager....................................................................................................................................................220
30.1.1 Device Manager software component ...............................................................................................................................................................................220
30.1.2 Device Manager interface component...............................................................................................................................................................................220
30.1.3 Multi Function Key Component...........................................................................................................................................................................................220
31 Supervision ...........................................................................................................................................................222
31.1 Configuration with Modbus RTU .............................................................................................................................................222
31.1.1 Data format (RTU)....................................................................................................................................................................................................................222
31.1.2 Modbus commands available and data areas ..................................................................................................................................................................223
31.2 Configuration of device address ..............................................................................................................................................226
31.2.1 Configuration of parameter addresses...............................................................................................................................................................................226
31.2.2 Configuration of variable / state addresses ......................................................................................................................................................................226
32 Annexe A – Models and Accessories ............................................................................................................227
32.1 Models ............................................................................................................................................................................................227
32.1.1 Models SBW SDW SCW600 SE600 .......................................................................................................................................................................................227
32.1.2 SBW ● SDW636 models 2 TRIAC .........................................................................................................................................................................................228
32.1.3 Remote terminals .....................................................................................................................................................................................................................228
32.2 Accessories.....................................................................................................................................................................................229

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
6/240
 1 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
This manual is designed to permit quick, easy reference with the following features:

References References column:

A column to the left of the text contains references to subjects discussed in the text to help you locate the information you
need quickly and easily.

Cross references Cross references:

All words written in italics are referenced in the subject index to help you find the page containing details on this subject;
supposing you read the following text:
” If there are 2 compressors in the installation, the minimum time between the switching on and the switching off) of the
two compressors is observed. ”
The italics mean that you will find a reference to the page on the topic of compressors listed under the item compressors
in the index.
If you are consulting the manual “on-line” (using a computer), words which appear in italics are hyperlinks: just click on a
word in italics with the mouse to go directly to the part of the manual that discusses this topic.

Icons for emphasis Some segments of text are marked by icons appearing in the references column with the meanings specified below:

Warning! : information which is essential for preventing negative consequences for the system
or a hazard to personnel, instruments, data, etc., and which users MUST read with
care.

Take note: information on the topic under discussion which the user ought to keep in mind

Tip: a recommendation which may help the user to understand and make use of the information
supplied on the topic under discussion.

EN
 2 INTRODUCTION

2.1 General Description

Eliwell, the leading manufacturer of controllers for small and medium air conditioning plants, presents SBW600 in the
Energy Flex product family, a compact heat pump controller with advanced functions (sanitary hot water and anti-
legionnaire's disease in a dedicated accumulator) for domestic applications.

Control of centralized air-conditioning systems with up to 2 circuits and a maximum of 4 compressors (steps)
such as:

 Chillers:

o air-air;
o air-water;
o water-water;

 Heat pumps:
o air-air;
o air-water;
o water-water with gas reversal;
o water-water with water reversal;

 Motorised condensers;
o Air chillers;
o Air heat pumps;
o Water chillers;
o Water heat pumps.

2.1.1 Typical applications:

 Mini-markets,
 Industrial installations,
 Offices,
 Hotels,
 Residential buildings.

2.1.2 Technical data:

The Energy SBW600 is available in 2 models offering 6 digital inputs, 5 relay outputs, up to TRIAC outputs, 2 PWM
analogue outputs, up to 3 configurable 0…10V/0…20mA/4…20mA analogue outputs and up to 2 open collector digital
outputs for external relay.
The standard Eliwell 32x74mm format ensures ease and versatility of installation.

Energy SDW - SCW - SE 600 is available in several models offering 6 digital inputs, 5 relay outputs, up to 2 TRIAC outputs,
2 PWM analogue outputs, up to 3 configurable analogue outputs 0…10V/0…20mA/4…20mA and up to 2 open collector
digital outputs for external relay.
The 4DIN format guarantees maximum flexibility and easy installation.
---
Power supply is 12-24V~ or 12-24V~/24Vc
All inputs and outputs are independent and configurable, meaning they can be adapted to fit any system.

2.1.3 Main functions:

 Sanitary hot water with auto-adaptative setpoint
 Sanitary Water and Anti-legionnaire's Disease with weekly programming
 INVERTER compressor management
 User interface with configurable keys
 Menus with configurable displays
 Parameter settings via keyboard or PC
 Alarm log registration
 Multi Function Key (MFK) for up/downloading parameter maps
 Remote keyboard (up to 100m cable) with direct connection without serial interface
 NTC, 4...20mA, 0...1V, 0...5V, 0...10V or Digital Input parameter-configurable inputs
 Temperature control via input or output probe depending on configuration and installation
 Automatic change-over
 Dynamic setpoint
 Digital/analogue condensation control without external devices up to 2A
 Boiler control or supplementary electrical heater control for heating mode
 Electrical heater for hot sanitary water
 Internal ventilation control
 Control of semi-hermetically sealed, scroll and screw compressors with one or two power steps
 Control of a single circuit with up to 4 compressors or 1 compressor with 4 power stages
 Control of double circuits up to a maximum of two compressors/power stages per circuit.

2.2 Models and Features

-->See Annex A - Models and Accessories and the Specifications chapter
<IMG INFO>
42,7
29,75
1
2
51
28 35

NOTE: unless expressly indicated otherwise, references to SBW600 also apply to SDW600 SCW600 and SE600

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
8/240
3 USER INTERFACE (FOLDER PAR/UI)
The front panel of the device functions as the user interface and is used to perform all operations relating to the device.

SBW600 SDW600

SKP 10

<IMG INFO>

NOTE:
 the SCW600 module is not provided with a display. To operate the instrument, use remote terminal SKP 10 or
SKW22/22L
 the expansion module SE600 is not provided with a display.

3.1 Keys
Refer to models SBW600 SDW600 and SKP 10.
There are 4 keys on the front panel. Each key has (see the two tables below)
o A "direct" action (indicated on the key)
o An "associated" function (indicated on the front panel of the device beside the key). In the manual, this is
shown in square brackets (e.g. [UP])
o a "combined" action involving two keys. In the manual, this is shown in square brackets (e.g.[UP+DOWN])

3.1.1 Description of keys and associated functions

Prolonged press
Description of Single press (press Key [associated [press and hold Menu /
Key
key and release) function] for about 3 Comments
seconds]
Sanitary Water /
Manual defrost
 Increases a value depending on
 Goes to the next model
UP [Activate Sanitary
label
<IMG INFO>
56,7
39,65

Water function)
1
2
51
-19,8

 Modify Set Point Functions menu

-1

(if UI25=1) see Functions

chapter (folder
FnC)
 decreases a
value Standby / Local
DOWN  Goes to the ON/OFF
(Standby)
previous label <IMG INFO>
56,7
38,5
1
according to
 Modify Set Point model
2
51
-19,25
-1

(if UI25=1)

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
9/240
 Prolonged press
Description of Single press (press Key [associated [press and hold Menu /
Key
key and release) function] for about 3 Comments
seconds]
 Quit without [Change-over]
Esc(ape) Quit saving new ---
(Without saving
new settings) 
settings
go back to
mode See section on
Changing operating
Operating mode
menu
previous level mode
 Confirms value /
quit and save
new settings
 Move to next [Main display]
Set Confirm
(and save new
settings)
level (open
folder, subfolder, disp ---
See Main Display
[Main Display
Menu]
parameter, section
value)
 Open States
Menu
Activate Time
UP+DOWN
Bands
By parameter (see parameters chapter, parameters UI20-21-
22-23-24) the function [associated] can be enabled or
disabled:
 0 = Key not enabled for the function
 1 = Key enabled for the function

The following indications refer to the SBW600 user interface. Navigation for SDW600 and SKP 10 is identical

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
10/240
3.1.2 Stand-by

3.1.2.1 Device ‘On’ --> ‘Standby’

Press the [DOWN] key for about 3 seconds from the

main display

The Standby icon will appear on the display.

All other LEDs will be off

3.1.2.2 Device ‘Standby’ --> ‘On’

The Standby icon will appear on the display

Press the [DOWN] key for about 3 seconds

Energy SBW600 will return to the "normal" screen

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
11/240
3.1.3 Description of keys - combined action
Symbol
[function Combined
associated to Key press Single
combined combination press (press [associated function] [Menu] / Comments
operation of and release
the keys]

See paragraph on
Time Bands
[UP
+ [Activate/Deactivate] Time Bands / Reset
<IMG INFO>
56,7
54,2
1
2
51

DOWN] depending on model

-27,1
-1

[Open Programming
menu]

[Esc
+ [Programming menu]
Set]

IMG INFO

3.1.3.3 Manual alarm acknowledgment and reset

Alarm messages blink. How to acknowledge an alarm is explained below.

All error messages are shown in the AL folder (see States Menu)

An error message will be shown, alternating with

the error alert...

...and the main display.

The ALARM LED will be permanently on.

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
12/240
 ALARM ACKNOWLEDGMENT
An error can be acknowledged by pressing any
key once.

After pressing any key, the alarm LED will start to

blink.

MANUAL RESET
See Functions chapter
Manual Reset paragraph

3.2 LEDs and Display

The display has 18 icons (LEDs) split into 3 categories:
 States and Operating Modes
 Values and Units of Measure
 Utilities

3.2.1 Display
Values of up to 4 digits or 3 digits plus a sign can be displayed.

3.2.2 LEDs: decimal point

Values are always shown in tenths of a degree/bar

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
13/240
3.2.3 LEDs: States and Operating Modes

LED states and Operating Modes Permanently

description Colour Blinking
icon on

IMG INFO
Alarm red Active alarm Alarm acknowledged

Antifreeze with heat

pump active
Heating* Heating mode
<IMG INFO>
122,45
70,45
0
2
141,9
0
Remote heating mode
-1

The display shows the Cooling*

Cooling mode Remote cooling mode
value/resource set for the "main
display". Local standby
In the event of an alarm, it will Standby* mode (from Remote standby
alternate with the alarm code Exx. keyboard)
(when more than one alarm occurs green
at the same time, the one with the Manual defrost
Defrost Defrost active
lowest number will be shown - see activated
Alarms and Diagnostics chapter)
Configurable
---- Configurable
See Parameters ----
chapter See Parameters chapter
Economy
---- ----
Ui /dS folder Ui /dS folder
Parameters UI07 Parameters UI07 /dS00
/dS00
*In AS (sanitary water) mode the Mode LED is OFF

3.2.4 LEDs: Values and Units of Measure

LED Unit of measure icon description Colour Permanently on Blinking

Clock (RTC) red Shows current time Set time

(24hr format)

--- --- ---

Time Bands Time Bands enabled Program Time
<IMG INFO>
122,45
67,9
Bands
0
2

Degrees
0,35
6,3
-1

Values can be displayed with a decimal / /

centigrade
point by setting parameter Ui08 (see
parameters chapter, Ui folder)
Pressure (Bar) / /

Relative
humidity Not used Not used
(% RH)
IMG INFO

IMG INFO
Menu (ABC) Menu navigation /

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
14/240
 3.2.5 LEDs: utilities

LED utilities description Colour Permanently on Blinking

Configurable (°) Configurable
---- (°°)
See Parameters ----
chapter See Parameters
utility amber ---- chapter
Ui folder ----
Parameters Ui folder
<IMG INFO>
122,45
72,95
0
2
UI00..UI06 Parameters
UI00..UI06
-2
5,75
-1

<IMG INFO>
42,85
(°) permanently on: utility active
(°°) blinking: UI00..UI06= 50…53 (power steps 1…4) indicates safety timing
29,75
1
2
48,4
21 5

Note: In the case of LED configured as sanitary water valve, the LED blinks when AS mode is enabled but not active.
Permanently on when serving a sanitary water request

Default configuration
LEDs for utilities are all configurable (see parameters chapter, folder Ui). The factory settings are listed in the table below:

<IMG INFO>
42,85
29,75

Default default icon on front panel

1
2
48,4
23 5

LEDs
SBW600 SBW600
LED symbol
on display

LED 1 Power step 1

(first from left)
LED 2
Power step 2

LED 3 Internal circuit water pump 1

LED 4 External circuit water pump
Internal exchanger electric heater
LED 5
LED 6 Sanitary water valve / pump
LED 7 Boiler

3.3 First switch on

When Energy SBW600 is powered on for the first
time, a lamp test is carried out to check its state and
operation.
----------
The Lamp Test lasts for a few seconds. During this
short time, all LEDs and digits flash at the same time.

After the lamp test, based on preselected settings,

the following are displayed:
 The time,
 the real setpoint
 the parameter setpoint
 the value of the analogue input selected
(AIL1…AIL5)
----------
In the example, the main display is the real set point

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
15/240
3.4 Access to folders - menu structure
Access to folders is organised into menus.
Access is determined by the keys on the front panel (see relative sections).
Access to each individual menu is explained below (or in the sections indicated).
There are 4 menus:
 Main Display Menu → See Main Display Menu section
 Operating Mode menu → see Operating Mode Menu section
 States Menu → See States Menu section
 Programming Menu → See Programming Menu section

There are 4 folders/submenus in the Programming Menu:

 Parameters Menu (Par folder) → see Parameters chapter;
 Functions Menu (Fnc folder) → see Functions chapter;
 Password PASS
 Alarm codes EU

3.4.1 Main Display Menu

The Main Display refers to the contents of the default display, i.e. when keys are not used.

Ai AIL1 AIL2 AIL3 AIL4 AIL5

AIE1 AIE2 AIE3 AIE4 AIE5
Air1 Air2
Main Display
rtC HH:MM
SetP SetP
Setr Setr

In Energy SBW600, the main display can be customized to suit personal requirements. The various contents can be selected
from the "disp" menu which is opened by pressing and holding the [set] key for more than 3 seconds. The main display
can be selected from:
 analogue inputs AiL1, AiL2, AiL3, AiL4, AiL5, AiE1, AiE2, AiE3, AiE4, AiE5, Air1, Air2
when configured as digital inputs
- 0 or 0.0 = input not active (equivalent to input shortcircuited to ground)
- 1 or 0.1 = input active (equivalent to input open)
 rtC,
 Setpoint
o SetP= set from parameter
o Setr= real with any decalibration;

Step by step instructions are provided below.

To open the [disp] menu to modify the main

display setup, press and hold the set key for at
least 3 seconds.
[set]

This opens the blinking menu for the previous

display (in this case rtC, i.e. current time).

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
16/240
 To modify the display, use the "up" and "down"
keys to scroll through the menu and press the set
key to confirm.

IMG INFO

On selection of your preferred display, press the

set key to confirm. You will be automatically
returned to the main display set.

3.4.2 Operating Mode Menu

HEAt
COOL
Operating mode
StdBY
AS

Instructions are provided below on how to change the operating mode

There are three different operating modes:
 standby mode (StbY)
 Heat mode (HEAT)
 Cool mode (COOL)
 Sanitary Water mode (AS)

For example, let's say you want to change

from StbY to COOL mode

To change operating mode, press and hold the

mode key for at least 2 seconds.

PS The main display is set as rtc (current time)

<IMG INFO>

A blinking menu will open containing the

values StbY (standby), HEAt (heat), COOL (cool)
and AS (Sanitary Water)

Select your required operating mode and press

the set key.

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
17/240
 You will be automatically returned to the main
display and you will see that the Stby LED that
was previously on has gone off and the COOL
LED has come on

IMG INFO IMG INFO

3.4.3 States Menu

From the states menu you can view the values of each resource.
For some resources, a "dynamic" view is possible:
 For example, when declared as not present / probe not configured (see System Configuration chapter (folder
Par/CL), parameter CL01=0), analogue input AIL2 will not be displayed
 For example the hours of functioning of compressor 2 - CP02 - not available on single compressor machines
The resources may be present / not present depending on the model (e.g. dOL6 is only present on the SBW655)

folder Visibility description change

Dynamic LOCAL analogue //
Ai AIL1 AiL2 AIL3 AIL4 AIL5
inputs
Dynamic EXTENDED analogue //
Ai AIE1 AiE2 AIE3 AIE4 AIE5
inputs(§)
REMOTE TERMINAL //
Ai Air1 Air2 Dynamic
analogue inputs
di diL1 diL2 diL3 diL4 diL5 diL6 // Dynamic LOCAL Digital inputs //
EXTENDED analogue
di diE1 diLE2 diE3 diE4 diE5 diE6 // Dynamic //
inputs(§)
AO Dynamic LOCAL Analogue //
tCL1 AOL1 AOL2 AOL3 AOL4 AOL5 //
outputs
EXTENDED analogue
AO tCE1 AOE1 AOE2 AOE3 AOE4 AOE5 // Dynamic //
outputs(§)
dO dOL3 dOL4 dOL5 dOL6 // Dynamic LOCAL Digital //
dOL1 dOL2
outputs
EXTENDED digital
dO dOE1 dOE2 dOE3 dOE4 dOE5 dOE6 // Dynamic //
outputs(§)
CL HOUr dAtE YEAr Clock YES
AL Er00 …. … … … Er97 Er98 Dynamic Alarms //
SP Value // // // // // // setpoint (set) YES
Sr Value // // // // // // real setpoint //
Hr CP01 CP02 CP03 CP04 PU01 PU02 PU03 Dynamic Tens of hours of YES
operation
compressors/pumps

(§) only if SE600 expansion module present

As you will be able to see from the table, the setpoint SP and time can be modified and viewed:

3.4.3.1 Display Inputs/Outputs (AiL, diL, tCL1/AOL, dOL)

Press the set key from the main display

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
18/240
 Example of display of Analogue Inputs. The same
procedure applies for all other I/Os***

The label Ai will appear on the display.

(Use the UP and DOWN keys to scroll through the

other labels until you find the label required)

Press the set key to view the label for the first
analogue input (AiL1 in this case)

<IMG INFO>

Press the set key again to view the value of AiL1.

Note that the °C icon lights up to indicate that the
value shown is in degrees centigrade

***For digital inputs/analogue inputs configured as

digital, the value will be:
- 0 = input not active (for digital inputs this is
equivalent to input open, for analogue
inputs configured as digital to input
shortcircuited to ground)
- 1 = input active (for digital inputs this is
equivalen to input shortcircuited to
ground, for analogue inputs configured as
digital to input open)
-------------------------------------

Press the esc key to go back to the main display.

3.4.3.2 Setting the clock (CL)

The Energy SBW600 has a clock (RTC) to run the alarm log and time bands, just like a programmable timer thermostat.
Instructions are provided below on how to set the time: the same procedure applies to change the date and year.

To change the clock on your machine, press the

set key from the main display.

<IMG INFO>

Pressing the set key once will open a list of the

various folders.
Use the “UP” and “DOWN” keys to find the CL
folder.

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
19/240
 Press the set key to open the CL menu.

On entering this menu, you will see HOUr. Use

the “UP” and “DOWN” keys to select the time,
date or year.

Once you have decided what you want to set,

press the [set]** key to open the modification
menu for the variable selected.
**press and hold for about 3 seconds

To set the time, date and year, use the "UP"

and "DOWN" keys to enter the required value,
then...

IMG INFO

... press set.

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
20/240
 Press the Esc key repeatedly to exit the set
clock menu and go back to the main display.

IMG INFO

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
21/240
3.4.3.3 Alarm Display (AL)

<IMG INFO>;226,55;90,95;0;2;99,15;0;-1;212,25;84

Press the set key from the main display

The label Ai will appear on the display. Use the UP

and DOWN keys to browse the other labels until you
find the AL label

Press the set key to view the label of the first active
alarm (if it exists)

In this case, the first alarm is Er01. Use the UP and

DOWN keys to scroll any other alarms.
-------------------------------------
NOTE: the menu is not cyclical.
For example, if the active alarms are Er01, Er02 and
Er03, the display will show
Er01 ->Er02->Er03 <-Er02<-Er01

NOTE: -> UP, <-DOWN

Press the esc key repeatedly to go back to the main

display.

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
22/240
3.4.3.4 Example of how to set the setpoint (SP)

By way of example, we will change the setpoint value in COOL mode from 12.0 degrees centigrade to12.6 degrees
centigrade.

To change the setpoint on your

machine, press the set key from the
main display.

Pressing the set key once will open a

list of the various folders. Use the
“UP” and “DOWN” keys to scroll
through the menu and find the SP
folder.

Press the set key to open the SP

folder.

The first screen you see will be the

COOL mode then, using the "up"
and "down" keys, the HEAT and ACS
mode (shown beside each view).

IMG INFO

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
23/240
 Let's say you want to change the
COOL mode setpoint.
Select COOL from the menu, then
press the set key.

The device will show the current

machine setpoint, which in this case
is 12.0 degrees centigrade. Use the
“up” and “down” keys to increase or
decrease it. For example, if you want
to change the setpoint to 12.6
degrees, press the "up arrow" key
until you reach the required value.

Once you have reached the required

setpoint, press the set key. The
device will save the value 12.6

IMG INFO

To get back to the main display,

press the esc key repeatedly or allow
a 15 second timeout to elapse for
each menu.

IMG INFO

Setpoint edit function enable from main screen

Parameter Ui25 allows you to enable Set Point modification on the main display with the UP and DOWN keys.
By way of example, we will change the setpoint value in COOL mode from 12.0 degrees centigrade to12.6 degrees
centigrade.

First set parameter UI25=1 (folder Par/Ui/UI25)

See Parameters section (folder PAr)

Let's say you want to change the COOL mode

setpoint.

The device must be in COOL mode

(or in StdBy from COOL)

To change the set point of the HEAT mode,

proceed in the same way by first changing the
device’s mode from COOL to HEAT
see Operating Mode Menu section

To change the setpoint on your machine, press

the UP or DOWN key in the main display.

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
24/240
 The device will show the current machine
setpoint, which in this case is 12.0 degrees
centigrade.

IMG INFO

Use the “up” and “down” keys to increase or

decrease it

For example, if you want to change the setpoint

to 12.6 degrees, press the "up arrow" key until
you reach the required value.
IMG INFO

Once you have reached the required setpoint,

press the set key. The device will save the value
12.6

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
25/240
3.4.3.5 Display and reset compressor/pump hours

Example display and reset (tens of) hours for

Pump 2

Press the set key from the main display

The label Ai will appear on the display. Use the UP

and DOWN keys to scroll through the other labels
until you find the Hr label

Press the set key to view the first label - which in this
case is the running time for compressor 1 (CP01)

Scroll with the UP and DOWN keys to view (if the

relative resources are present) the running time for
compressor 2 (CP02) and the pump running time
(PU01, PU02, PU03)

Press the set key to view the pump running time

PU02

The tens of hours of functioning are 2.

(Hours expressed in tens:
2 means 20 hours of operation)

To reset the hours of functioning of pump PU02,

press and hold [set]

Note: repeat the above procedure to reset the hours

of functioning of the other resources

-------------------------------------

Press the esc key repeatedly to go back to the main

display.

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
26/240
3.4.4 Programming menu

Menu folder description comments

Parameters PAr CL Cr CF Ui St … Al parameters
See Functions
Functions FnC dEF tA tA tA St CC EUr functions chapter (folder
FnC)
Passwords PASS password
EU EU Eu00 … … … … … …

3.4.4.6 Parameters (folder PAr)

Modifying a parameter
Instructions are provided below on how to change a machine parameter. By way of example, let's look at the CL
configuration parameters folder, parameter CL01 (folder PAr/CL/CL01).

Press the esc and set keys together to open the

parameters menu. This will open the PAr menu.

<IMG INFO>

The PAr parameters menu contains all device

parameter folders. Press the set key to view all
folders.

The first folder the controller shows is the CL

configuration folder. Simply press the set key again to
modify individual CL parameters.

The CL00 parameter will be shown on the device

(factory default settings).

Press the "up" key to scroll through the various

parameters or move to the next parameter (CL01 in
this case) or the “down” key to go back to the
previous parameter (CL97 in this case)

CF00->CF01->CF02->…->CL97->CL00
CL97<-CL00<-CL01->…<-CL96<-CL97

NOTE: -> UP, <-DOWN

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
27/240
 Press the set key to view the value of the parameter
(CL01 in this case).

For parameter CL01, the value shown will be 2. Press

the “up” and “down” keys to modify this value.

IMG INFO

Press the set key once you have entered the required
value. **

Press the esc key to exit this display and go back to

the previous level.

**N.B. pressing the set key will confirm the value

entered; pressing the esc key will take you back to the
previous level without saving the value entered

3.4.5 Functions (Par/FnC folder)

See Functions chapter (folder FnC)

3.4.6 Entering a password (Par/PASS folder)

Levels of visibility
Four levels of visibility can be set by assigning suitable values to each parameter and folder, by serial, software
(DeviceManager or other communication softwares) or by programming key
The visibility levels are:
 Value 3 = parameter or folder always visible;
 Value 2 = manufacturer level; these parameters can only be seen by entering the manufacturer's password
(see parameter Ui28) (all parameters specified as always visible, parameters that are visible at the installation
level, and manufacturer level parameters will be visible)
 Value 1 = installation level; these parameters can only be viewed by entering the installation password (see
parameter Ui27) (all parameters specified as always visible and parameters that are visible at the installation
level will be visible)
 Value 0 = parameter or folder NOT visible

1. Parameters and/or folders with visibility level <>3 (i.e. password protected) will only be visible if the correct
password is entered (installer or manufacturer) following the procedure outlined below:
2. Parameters and/or folders with visibility level =3 are always visible and no password is required; in this case, the
procedure below is not required.

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
28/240
To view parameters visible for the given password, open folder PASS (press esc and set together [esc+set] from the main
display and search the folder using the up/down keys) and set the PASS value

Press the esc and set keys together from the main
display to enter the PASS folder. [esc+set]

IMG INFO

Pressing the two keys will open the menu containing

the list of folders. Use the “up” and “down” keys to
scroll through the list until you find the PASS folder.

Press the set key to open the PASS folder.

Enter the password (installation or manufacturer)
from here, press the set key and exit.

Now access the parameters to display and change

their values (see parameters chapter)

3.4.7 Alarm events (Par/EU folder)

To view folder PAr from the main display, press

the Esc and Set keys at the same time. [esc+set]

IMG INFO

Pressing the two keys will open the menu

containing the list of folders. Use the “up” and
“down” keys to find the EU folder

Press set to view the last alarm event - if it

exists - EU00.
NB: EU00 indicates the last alarm recorded,
EU01 the second last, and so on.

Scroll with the UP and DOWN keys to view (if

present) any other alarm events

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
29/240
 Press the set key again to view details of the
selected event (EU00 in this case)

The first label will be shown (alarm code)

With the UP and DOWN keys you can scroll:

Alarm code (as previously indicated)

Alarm start time

Alarm start date

IMG INFO

Alarm stop time

(in this case, the alarm is still active)

Alarm stop date

(in this case, the alarm is still active)

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
30/240
Type of alarm

(automatic)

or alternatively

(manual)

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
31/240
 <IMG INFO>
56,75
43,9
1
2
51
4 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (FOLDER PAR/CF)
-28,35
-1

Before doing anything, make sure the device is connected to a suitable external transformer. The following rules
must be followed when connecting cards to each other and to the application:
 Loads that exceed the maximum limits set forth herein must not be applied to outputs;
 When connecting loads, follow connection diagrams carefully;
 To avoid electric pairings, wire all SELV (*) utilities separately from high voltage ones.
(*) SELV: SAFETY EXTRA LOW VOLTAGE

Instrument configuration is determined by the values of the parameters associated with the inputs and outputs.

4.1 Configuration of analogue inputs

SBW SDW SCW The analogue inputs referred to below as AiL1…AiL5 are 5 in total.
600 Analogue Using the parameters, a physical resource (probe, digital input, voltage/current signal) can be "physically" configured for
each type of input:
inputs
 3 inputs can be configured as temperature probes, an NTC type probe, or as digital inputs
 2 inputs (AiL3 and AiL4) can be configured as temperature probes, an NTC type probe, as digital inputs or
current/voltage input (signal 4-20mA / 0-10V, 0-5V, 0-1V)

4.1.1 Configuration of SE600 expansion analogue inputs

SE600 analogue The analogue inputs referred to below as AiE1…AiE5 are 5 in total.
inputs Using the parameters, - a physical resource (sensor, digital input, voltage/current signal) can be "physically" configured for
each type of input:
 3 inputs can be configured as temperature sensors, an NTC type sensor, or as digital inputs
 2 inputs (AiE3 AiE4) can be configured as temperature sensors, an NTC type sensor, digital inputs or as a
voltage/current input (signal 4-20mA / 0-10V, 0-5V, 0-1V)

4.1.2 Configuring SKW remote terminal analogue inputs

SKW Analogue The analogue inputs referred to below as AIR1…AIR2 are 2 in total.
inputs Using the parameters, a physical resource (probe, digital input, voltage/current signal) can be "physically" configured for
each type of input:
 1 input configurable as NTC type temperature probe
 1 input configurable as NTC type temperature probe, digital input or current input (4-20mA signal)

Using parameters, a logical meaning can be given to each analogue input

Inputs can be "physically" configured as specified in the table below.
Analogue inputs:
Configuration Value
Parameter Description
table 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
AiL1 type Probe not Probe configured as no
CL00 NTC probe // // // //
analogue input configured voltage digital input
AiL2 type Probe not Probe configured as no
CL01 NTC probe // // // //
analogue input configured voltage digital input
AiL3 type Probe not Probe configured as no
CL02 NTC probe 4-20 mA 0-10 V 0-5 V 0-1 V
analogue input configured voltage digital input
AiL4 type Probe not Probe configured as no
CL03 NTC probe 4-20 mA 0-10 V 0-5 V 0-1 V
analogue input configured voltage digital input
AiL5 type Probe not Probe configured as no
CL04 NTC probe // // // //
analogue input configured voltage digital input
AiE2 type Probe not Probe configured as no
CE01 NTC probe // // // //
analogue input configured voltage digital input
AiE3 type Probe not Probe configured as no
CE02 NTC probe 4-20 mA 0-10 V 0-5 V 0-1 V
analogue input configured voltage digital input
AE4 type Probe not Probe configured as no
CE03 NTC probe 4-20 mA 0-10 V 0-5 V 0-1 V
analogue input configured voltage digital input
AiE5 type Probe not Probe configured as no
CE04 NTC probe // // // //
analogue input configured voltage digital input
AiE1 analogue Sensor not Sensor configured as
CE00 NTC sensor // // // //
input type configured no voltage digital input
AiE2 analogue Sensor not Sensor configured as
CE01 NTC sensor // // // //
input type configured no voltage digital input
AiE3 analogue Sensor not Sensor configured as
CE02 NTC sensor 4-20 mA 0-10 V 0-5 V 0-1 V
input type configured no voltage digital input
AiE4 analogue Sensor not Sensor configured as
CE03 NTC sensor 4-20 mA 0-10 V 0-5 V 0-1 V
input type configured no voltage digital input
AiE5 analogue Sensor not Sensor configured as
CE04 NTC sensor // // // //
input type configured no voltage digital input
Parameter Description Value
0 1 2 3

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
32/240
 AIr1 type Probe not
Cr00 // NTC probe //
analogue input configured

Air2 type Probe not Probe configured as no

Cr01 NTC probe 4…20mA
analogue input configured voltage digital input

See
Configuration of
digital inputs

NOTE: // indicates that value is not present

Analogue input AI Parameter range Description

AiL3 CL10 CL11…99.9 Analogue input AiL3 full scale value
AiL3 CL11 -50.0…CL10 Analogue input AiL3 start of scale value
AiL4 CL12 CL13…99.9 Analogue input AiL4 full scale value
AiL4 CL13 -50.0…CL12 Analogue input AiL4 start of scale value
AiE3 CE10 CE11…99.9 Analogue input AiE3 full scale value
AiE3 CE11 -50.0…CE10 Analogue input AiE3 start of scale value
AiE4 CE12 CE13…99.9 Analogue input AiE4 full scale value
AiE4 CE13 -50.0…CE12 Analogue input AiE4 start of scale value

Air1 Cr10 CR11…99.9 Analogue input Air2 full scale value

Air2 Cr11 -50.0…CR10 Analogue input Air2 start of scale value

The values read by analogue inputs can be calibrated using parameters CL20…CL24 / Cr20…Cr21

Parameter Description Measurement Unit range

CL20 Analogue input AiL1 differential °C -12.0..12.0
CL21 Analogue input AiL2 differential °C -12.0..12.0
CL22 Analogue input AiL3 differential °C / Bar -12.0..12.0
CL23 Analogue input AiL4 differential °C / Bar -12.0..12.0
CL24 Analogue input AiL5 differential °C -12.0..12.0
CE20 Analogue input AiE1 differential °C -12.0..12.0
CE21 Analogue input AiE2 differential °C -12.0..12.0
CE22 Analogue input AiE3 differential °C / Bar -12.0..12.0
CE23 Analogue input AiE4 differential °C / Bar -12.0..12.0
CE24 Analogue input AiE5 differential °C -12.0..12.0
Parameter Description Measurement Unit range
Cr20 Analogue input Air1 differential °C -12.0..12.0
Cr21 Analogue input Air2 differential °C / Bar -12.0..12.0

See the following tables:

Table A - parameter association - configuration of analogue inputs

Parameter Description value Description Notes

If CL00=1 (AiL1 configured as DI) set
CL30 Configuration of analogue input AiL1 0…16 See table B
CL30=0
If CL01=1 (AiL2 configured as DI)
CL31 Configuration of analogue input AiL2 0…16 See table B
set CL31=0
If CL02=1 (AiL3 configured as DI)
CL32 Configuration of analogue input AiL3 0…30 See table B
set CL32=0
If CL03=1 (AiL4 configured as DI)
CL33 Configuration of analogue input AiL4 0…30 See table B
set CL33=0
If CL04=1 (AiL5 configured as DI)
CL34 Configuration of analogue input AiL5 0…16 See table B
set CL34=0
If CE00=1 (AiE1 configured as DI) set
CE30 Configuration of analogue input AiE1 0…16 See table B
CE30=0
If CE01=1 (AiE2 configured as DI)
CE31 Configuration of analogue input AiE2 0…16 See table B
set CE31=0
If CE02=1 (AiE3 configured as DI)
CE32 Configuration of analogue input AiE3 0…30 See table B
set CE32=0
If CE03=1 (AiE4 configured as DI)
CE33 Configuration of analogue input AiE4 0…30 See table B
set CE33=0
If CE04=1 (AiE5 configured as DI)
CE34 Configuration of analogue input AiE5 0…16 See table B
set CE34=0
Parameter Description value Description Notes
CR30 Configuration of analogue input Air1 0…15 See table B
If CR01=1 (AIR2 configured as DI),
CR31 Configuration of analogue input Air2 0…29 See table B
set CR31=0

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
33/240
Table B - analogue input logical meaning & parameter values CL30…CL34 / CR30, CR31

Analogue input AiL/AiE Analogue input AiL Value Description

Remote terminal
AiL1 AiL2 AiL3 AiL4 AiL5 AIR1 AIR2 0 input disabled
AiE1 AiE2 AiE3 AiE4 AiE5
AiL1 AiL2 AiL3 AiL4 AiL5 AIR1 AIR2 1 Air/water inlet temperature
AiE1 AiE2 AiE3 AiE4 AiE5 internal exchanger
AiL1 AiL2 AiL3 AiL4 AiL5 AIR1 AIR2 2 Water/air outlet temperature
AiE1 AiE2 AiE3 AiE4 AiE5 internal exchanger
AiL1 AiL2 AiL3 AiL4 AiL5 AIR1 AIR2 3 Outlet water temperature
AiE1 AiE2 AiE3 AiE4 AiE5 internal exchanger circuit 1
AiL1 AiL2 AiL3 AiL4 AiL5 AIR1 AIR2 4 Outlet water temperature
AiE1 AiE2 AiE3 AiE4 AiE5 internal exchanger circuit 2
AiL1 AiL2 AiL3 AiL4 AiL5 AIR1 AIR2 5 External exchanger temperature circuit 1
AiE1 AiE2 AiE3 AiE4 AiE5
AiL1 AiL2 AiL3 AiL4 AiL5 AIR1 AIR2 6 External exchanger temperature circuit 2
AiE1 AiE2 AiE3 AiE4 AiE5
AiL1 AiL2 AiL3 AiL4 AiL5 AIR1 AIR2 7 Inlet water temperature
AiE1 AiE2 AiE3 AiE4 AiE5 recovery (or external) exchanger
AiL1 AiL2 AiL3 AiL4 AiL5 AIR1 AIR2 8 Outlet water temperature
AiE1 AiE2 AiE3 AiE4 AiE5 recovery (or external) exchanger
AiL1 AiL2 AiL3 AiL4 AiL5 AIR1 AIR2 9 External temperature
AiE1 AiE2 AiE3 AiE4 AiE5
AiL1 AiL2 AiL3 AiL4 AiL5 AIR1 AIR2 10 NOT USED
AiE1 AiE2 AiE3 AiE4 AiE5
AiL1 AiL2 AiL3 AiL4 AiL5 AIR1 AIR2 11 Sanitary water temperature
AiE1 AiE2 AiE3 AiE4 AiE5
AiL1 AiL2 AiL3 AiL4 AiL5 AIR1 AIR2 12 NOT USED
AiE1 AiE2 AiE3 AiE4 AiE5
AiL1 AiL2 AiL3 AiL4 AiL5 AIR1 AIR2 13 NOT USED
AiE1 AiE2 AiE3 AiE4 AiE5
AiL1 AiL2 AiL3 AiL4 AiL5 AIR1 AIR2 14 NOT USED
AiE1 AiE2 AiE3 AiE4 AiE5
AiL1 AiL2 AiL3 AiL4 AiL5 AIR1 AIR2 15 NOT USED
AiE1 AiE2 AiE3 AiE4 AiE5
AiL1 AiL2 AiL3 AiL4 AiL5 AIR1 AIR2 16 Temperature display
AiE1 AiE2 AiE3 AiE4 AiE5
AiL3 AiL4 AIR2 17 NOT USED
AiE3 AiE4
AiL3 AiL4 AIR2 18 NOT USED
AiE3 AiE4
AiL3 AiL4 AIR2 19 NOT USED
AiE3 AiE4
AiL3 AiL4 AIR2 20 NOT USED
AiE3 AiE4
AiL3 AiL4 AIR2 21 High pressure input circuit 1
AiE3 AiE4
AiL3 AiL4 AIR2 22 High pressure input circuit 2
AiE3 AiE4
AiL3 AiL4 AIR2 23 Low pressure input circuit 1
AiE3 AiE4
AiL3 AiL4 AIR2 24 Low pressure input circuit 2
AiE3 AiE4
AiL3 AiL4 AIR2 25 Dynamic setpoint input
AiE3 AiE4
AiL3 AiL4 AIR2 26 Internal exchanger pressure circuit 1
AiE3 AiE4
AiL3 AiL4 AIR2 27 Internal exchanger pressure circuit 2
AiE3 AiE4
AiL3 AiL4 AIR2 28 External exchanger pressure circuit 1
AiE3 AiE4
AiL3 AiL4 AIR2 29 External exchanger pressure circuit 2
AiE3 AiE4
AiL3 AiL4 AIR2 30 Pressure display
AiE3 AiE4

NOTE: // indicates that value is not present

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
34/240
 4.2 Configuration of digital inputs
Digital inputs The no voltage digital inputs referred to below as DI1…DI6 are 6 in total
These can be added to by AiL1…AiL5 if the latter are configured as digital inputs (via parameters CL50…5L4+CR50
respectively).

Hence a total of 11+1 digital inputs are available.

See the following tables:

Table A - parameter association - configuration of digital inputs

Parameter Description value Description Notes

CL40 Configuration of digital input DIL1 -58…+58 See table B
CL41 Configuration of digital input DIL2 -58…+58 See table B
CL42 Configuration of digital input DIL3 -58…+58 See table B
CL43 Configuration of digital input DIL4 -58…+58 See table B
CL44 Configuration of digital input DIL5 -58…+58 See table B
CL45 Configuration of digital input DIL6 -58…+58 See table B
Configuration of analogue input AiL1 Set to 0 if AiL1 is NOT
CL50 -58…+58 See table B
if configured as a digital input configured as a DI
Configuration of analogue input AiL2 Set to 0 if AiL2 is NOT
CL51 -58…+58 See table B
if configured as a digital input configured as a DI
Configuration of analogue input AiL3 Set to 0 if AiL3 is NOT
CL52 -58…+58 See table B
if configured as a digital input configured as a DI
Configuration of analogue input AiL4 Set to 0 if AiL4 is NOT
CL53 -58…+58 See table B
if configured as a digital input configured as a DI
Configuration of analogue input AiL5 Set to 0 if AiL5 is NOT
CL54 -58…+58 See table B
if configured as a digital input configured as a DI
CE40 Configuration of digital input DIE1 -58…+58 See table B
CE41 Configuration of digital input DIE2 -58…+58 See table B
CE42 Configuration of digital input DIE3 -58…+58 See table B
CE43 Configuration of digital input DIE4 -58…+58 See table B
CE44 Configuration of digital input DIE5 -58…+58 See table B
CE45 Configuration of digital input DIE6 -58…+58 See table B
Configuration of analogue input AiE1 Set to 0 if AiE1 is NOT
CE50 -58…+58 See table B
if configured as a digital input configured as a DI
Configuration of analogue input AiE2 Set to 0 if AiE2 is NOT
CE51 -58…+58 See table B
if configured as a digital input configured as a DI
Configuration of analogue input AiE3 Set to 0 if AiE3 is NOT
CE52 -58…+58 See table B
if configured as a digital input configured as a DI
Configuration of analogue input AiE4 Set to 0 if AiE4 is NOT
CE53 -58…+58 See table B
if configured as a digital input configured as a DI
Configuration of analogue input AiE5 Set to 0 if AiE5 is NOT
CE54 -58…+58 See table B
if configured as a digital input configured as a DI
Parameter Description value Description Notes
Configuration of analogue input AIR2 Set to 0 if AIR2 is NOT
CR50 -58…+58 See table B**
if configured as a digital input configured as a DI

Digital inputs: Table B - Digital inputs: Configuration table

Configuration Polarity is defined below:
table
Value Description
+ Positive Active when contact closed
- Negative Active when contact open

Value Description Notes

0 Input disabled
±1 Remote STD-BY
±2 Remote OFF Local ON/OFF ineffective
±3 Remote Summer/Winter
±4 Power step 1 request
±5 Power step 2 request
±6 Power step 3 request
±7 Power step 4 request
±8 Digital input heat step 1 request See also digital temperature control
±9 Digital input heat step 2 request See also digital temperature control
±10 Digital input heat step 3 request See also digital temperature control
±11 Digital input heat step 4 request See also digital temperature control
±12 Digital input cool step 1 request See also digital temperature control
±13 Digital input cool step 2 request See also digital temperature control
±14 Digital input cool step 3 request See also digital temperature control
±15 Digital input cool step 4 request See also digital temperature control
±16 Block compressor 1

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
35/240
Value Description Notes
±17 Block compressor 2
±18 Block compressor 3
±19 Block compressor 4
±20 Block heat pump See section
Block heat pump (folder PAr/HP)
±21 Power stage forced to 50% See section
Forced power stage (folder PAr/PL)
±22 Economy input See section
Operating modes - Temperature control (folder
PAr/tr)
±23 NOT USED
±24 General alarm
±25 End of defrost C1
±26 End of defrost C2
±27 NOT USED
±28 NOT USED
±29 NOT USED
±30 High pressure pressure switch C1
±31 High pressure pressure switch C2
±32 Low pressure pressure switch C1
±33 Low pressure pressure switch C2
±34 Compressor 1 oil pressure switch
±35 Compressor 2 oil pressure switch
±36 Compressor 3 oil pressure switch
±37 Compressor 4 oil pressure switch
±38 NOT USED
±39 External exchanger fan thermal switch C1
±40 External exchanger fan thermal switch C2
±41 Internal exchanger fan thermal switch
±42 NOT USED
±43 Compressor 1 thermal switch
±44 Compressor 2 thermal switch
±45 Compressor 3 thermal switch
±46 Compressor 4 thermal switch
±47 Primary circuit pump 1 thermal switch
±48 Primary circuit pump 2 thermal switch
±49 External circuit pump thermal switch
±50 Internal exchanger electric heater 1 thermal switch
±51 Internal exchanger electric heater 2 thermal switch
±52 Auxiliary output alarm
±53 NOT USED
±54 NOT USED
±55 Primary circuit flow switch
±56 External (recovery) circuit flow switch
±57 NOT USED
±58 Display

NOTE: If more than one digital input in the table is configured with the same value, the function is activated when the
input with the highest index is piloted

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
36/240
 4.3 Configuration of digital outputs
Digital outputs See the chapter on Electrical Connections for the number and capacity of relays/open collectors and for information on
the symbols used on labels supplied with the device.
 High voltage outputs (relays) are identified as DO1, DO2, DO3, DO4 and DO6
 The low voltage (SELV), open collector output is called DO5

All digital outputs can be configured as outlined in the table below:

Table A - parameter association - configuration of outputs

Parameter Description value Description Notes
CL90 Configuration of digital output DOL1 -53…+53 See table B Present in all models
CL91 Configuration of digital output DOL2 -53…+53 See table B Present in all models
CL92 Configuration of digital output DOL3 -53…+53 See table B Present in all models
CL93 Configuration of digital output DOL4 -53…+53 See table B Present in all models
Present in all models (Open
CL94 Configuration of digital output DOL5 -53…+53 See table B
collector output)
CL95 Configuration of digital output DOL6 -53…+53 See table B Present in models with 5 relays
See table A -
Analogue outputs and Models
CL96 Configuration of digital output AOL1 -53…+53 See table B
(Applies if CL71=0, set CL80
appropriately)
See table A -
Analogue outputs and Models
CL97 Configuration of digital output AOL2 -53…+53 See table B
(Applies if CL72=0, set CL81
appropriately)
CE90 Configuration of digital output DOE1 -53…+53 See table B Present in all models
CE91 Configuration of digital output DOE2 -53…+53 See table B Present in all models
CE92 Configuration of digital output DOE3 -53…+53 See table B Present in all models
CE93 Configuration of digital output DOE4 -53…+53 See table B Present in all models
Present in all models
CE94 Configuration of digital output DOE5 -53…+53 See table B
(Open Collector Output)
CE95 Configuration of digital output DOE6 -53…+53 See table B present in models with 5 relays
See Table A –
Configuration of digital output Analogue Outputs and Models
CE96 -53…+53 See table B
AOE1 (Applies if CE71=0, configure
CE80 appropriately)
See Table A –
Analogue Outputs and Models
CE97 Configuration of digital output AOE2 -53…+53 See table B
(Applies if CE72=0, configure
CE81 appropriately)

Table B - Outputs: Configuration table

Polarity is defined below:

Value Description
+ Positive Active when contact closed
- Negative Active when contact open

Value Description Type Value Description Type

0 Output disabled Digital ±37 NOT USED Digital
±1 Compressor 1 Digital ±38 NOT USED Digital
±2 Compressor 2 Digital ±39 NOT USED Digital
±3 Compressor 3 Digital ±40 NOT USED Digital
±4 Compressor 4 Digital ±41 NOT USED Digital
±5 Reversal valve circuit 1 Digital ±42 NOT USED Digital
±6 Reversal valve circuit 2 Digital ±43 NOT USED Digital
±7 NOT USED Digital ±44 NOT USED Digital
±8 NOT USED Digital ±45 NOT USED Digital
±9 Sanitary water valve Digital ±46 NOT USED Digital
±10 NOT USED Digital ±47 NOT USED Digital
±11 NOT USED Digital ±48 NOT USED Digital
±12 NOT USED Digital ±49 NOT USED Digital
±13 NOT USED Digital ±50 NOT USED Digital
±14 Internal circuit water pump 1 Digital ±51 NOT USED Digital
±15 Internal circuit water pump 2 Digital ±52 NOT USED Digital
±16 External circuit water pump Digital ±53 NOT USED Digital
±17 NOT USED Digital ±54 NOT USED Digital
±18 Recirculation fan Digital ±55 NOT USED Digital
±19 Fan External exchanger circuit 1 Digital Fan
±56 Analogue
External exchanger circuit 1
±20 Fan External exchanger circuit 2 Digital Fan
±57 Analogue
External exchanger circuit 2
±21 NOT USED Digital ±58 NOT USED //
±22 NOT USED Digital ±59 Internal circuit modulating water Analogue

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
37/240
 pump 1
±23 Electrical heating element 1 Digital Internal circuit modulating water
±60 Analogue
internal exchanger pump 2
±24 Electrical heating element 2 Digital
±61 NOT USED Analogue
internal exchanger
Electrical heating element ±62 Analogue stage 1 for compressor Analogue
±25 Digital
External exchanger 1
Electrical heating element ±63 Analogue stage 2 for Compressor Analogue
±26 Digital
External exchanger 2
±27 Auxiliary output Digital ±64 NOT USED Analogue
±28 Sanitary Water Electric Heater Digital ±65 NOT USED Analogue
±29 NOT USED Digital ±66 NOT USED Analogue
±30 Boiler Digital ±67 NOT USED Analogue
±31 Alarm Digital ±68 NOT USED Analogue
±32 NOT USED Digital ±69 NOT USED Analogue
±33 NOT USED Digital ±70 NOT USED* Digital
±34 NOT USED Digital ±71 NOT USED* Digital
±35 NOT USED Digital ±72 NOT USED* Digital
±36 NOT USED Digital ±73 NOT USED* Digital
±74 NOT USED* Digital
*see LED Configuration
If multiple outputs are configured to run the same resource, the outputs will be activated in parallel.

4.4 Configuration of analogue outputs

Analogue outputs See the chapter on Electric Connections for the number and type of analogue outputs used and for information on the
symbols used on labels supplied with the device.

There are 6 analogue outputs. 1 high voltage one and 5 low (SELV) voltage ones, the exact number depending on the
following models and with the following characteristics:

Table A2 - Analogue outputs and Models

Base models

Expansion
models
High voltage SELV

Label PWM/
Models Models 0…20mA
636

646

655

632

636

646

655
output on Open 0-10V
636 646 4…20mA
display collector

TC1 TCL1 3A 230V 2A 230V ● ●

TC2 TCL2 3A 230V ●
AO1 AOL1 ● ● ● ●
AO2 AOL2 ● ● ●
AO3 AOL3 ● ● ●
AO4 AOL4 ● ● ●
AO5 AOL5 ● ● ● ●

TC1 TCE1 3A 230V 2A 230V ● ● ●

TC2 TCE2 3A 230V ●
AO1 AOE1 ● ● ● ● ● ●
AO2 AOE2 ● ● ● ● ●
AO3 AOE3 ● ● ● ●
AO4 AOE4 ● ● ● ●
AO5 AOE5 ● ● ● ● ●

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
38/240
 Triac analogue outputs (TC1, TC2)

High voltage output generally used to pilot fans or water pumps.

The output can be configured for proportional operation (continuous speed variation) or as ON/OFF.

Remote control switches downstream from the Triac are NOT permitted

The TC1 output can be configured as described in the table "Analogue Output TC1 - AO1 AO2: Configuration table”

Configuration of low voltage (SELV) analogue outputs

 AO1 always available. If configured as digital, see parameter CL96/CE96

 AO2 always available. If configured as digital, see parameter CL97/CE97
They can be configured as:
o PWM (via CFS modules) or
o open collector (On/Off).

 AO3 - AO4 - low voltage (SELV) output to pilot external modules to run fans. Can be used to pilot 0-10V fans
(via parameters CL61/CL62 - CE61/CE62))
 AO5 - low voltage (SELV) output to pilot external modules to run fans.
Can be used to pilot 4-20mA fans or 0-20mA fans (via parameter CL60/CE60)

To configure, see the table below. All analogue outputs can be configured as digital or proportional.
Table B - Analogue Outputs - Configuration parameters

Analogue output output Parameter Description values Notes

TC1 - AO1 AO2 : phase shift values
Configuration to pilot Triac with
CL73 Phase shift analogue output TCL1
0…90 cut-off in the event
table CE73 Phase shift analogue output TCE1
of inductive loads.

Analogue output TCL1 pulse pulse length to

CL76
length 5…40 units pilot Triac
TC1
Analogue output TCE1 pulse (347…2776 μs) (1 unit = 69.4 μs).
(63x 64x CE76
length
models
only) See
Table B
Configuration of analogue output Outputs:
CL79 TCL1 -53…+53 if digital (see polarity) configuration
CE79 Configuration of analogue output 56…61 if proportional table, paragraph
TCE1 Configuration of
Digital Outputs

0= SE65x models See CE95

Configuration of TRIAC output
TCE1 CE70 see CE73 – CE76 –
TCE1 1= SE63x SE64x models
CE79
0= Output configured as digital If =0 see parameter
CL96 / CE96
CL71 Enabling analogue output AOL1 (for pulse piloting)
CE71 Enabling analogue output AOE1 If =1 see
1= Output configured as Triac parameters
CL74 - CL77 - CL80
CE74 - CE77 - CE80
Phase shift analogue output
CL74 AOL1 Active if CL71=1 /
0…90
CE74 Phase shift analogue output CE71=1
AO1
AOE1
Analogue output AOL1 pulse Active if CL71=1 /
CL77 length 5…40 units CE71=1
CE77 Analogue output AOE1 pulse (347…2776 µs) (1 unit = 69.4 µs).
length
See
Configuration of analogue output Table B
CL80 AOL1 -53…+53 if digital (see polarity) Outputs:
CE80 Configuration of analogue output 56…61 if proportional Configuration
AOE1 table

0= Output configured as digital If =0 see parameter

AO2*
CL97 / CE97
CL72 Enabling analogue output AOL2 (for pulse piloting)
CE72 Enabling analogue output AOE2 If =1 see
1= Output configured as Triac parameters
CL75 - CL78 - CL81
CE75 - CE78 - CE81
Phase shift analogue output
CL75 AOL2 Active if CL72=1 /
0…90
CE75 Phase shift analogue output CL72=1
AOE2

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
39/240
 output Parameter Description values Notes
Analogue output AOL2 pulse Active if CL72=1 /
CL78 length 5…40 units CL72=1
CE78 Analogue output AOE2 pulse (347…2776 µs) (1 unit = 69.4 µs).
length
See
Configuration of analogue output Table B
CL81 AOL2 -53…+53 if digital (see polarity) Outputs:
CE81 Configuration of analogue output 56…61 if proportional Configuration
AOE2 table

*in 636 models AO2 is used as TRIAC (TC2)

Low voltage (SELV) Parameter Description values Notes

analogue output Type of output analogue
CL60 0=4-20mA Analogue output - current See table entitled
AO3-4-5: AOL5
CE60 1=0-20mA Analogue output - current Configuration of
Type of output analogue
Configuration analogue output
AOE5
table Configuration
Modulated piloting or
CL61 Analogue output AOL3 -53…+53 if digital (see polarity)
on/off via 10V
CE61 Configuration 56…61 if proportional
external relay
Analogue output AOE3
Configuration
Modulated piloting or
CL62 analogue output AOL4 -53…+53 if digital (see polarity)
on/off via 10V
CE62 Configuration 56…61 if proportional
external relay
analogue output AOE4
Configuration
CL63 analogue output AOL5 -53…+53 if digital (see polarity) Modulated piloting or
CE63 Configuration 56…61 if proportional on/off
analogue output AOE5

The following can be piloted:

 loads with output modulation (values from 56 to 61) or
 loads with on/off type switching using
o the Triac as switch (TC1 AO1 AO2)
o the output as switch 0-10V (AO3-4)
o the output as switch 0/4…20mA (AO5)

4.5 Serial configurations - Protocol parameters

Present on all 2 serial models:
 TTL : channel for
o Multi Function Key connection to up/download parameters
o serial communication with personal computer
 LAN: channel for serial communication with standard Eliwell keyboard / SE600

Serial TTL can be used for

 configuring parameters with the DeviceManager software using the Eliwell protocol
 configuring device parameters, states, and variables with the Modbus via the Modbus protocol
 supervising using DeviceManager software via the Modbus protocol

See the table below:

value
Parameter Description

0 1
Select COM1 (TTL) protocol Eliwell Modbus
CF01
Eliwell protocol controller address
CF20
0…14
Eliwell protocol controller family
CF21

CF31 Modbus protocol controller address 1…255

 0=1200 baud
 1=2400 baud
 2=4800 baud
 3=9600 baud
CF31 Modbus protocol Baudrate  4=19200 baud
 5=38400 baud
 6=58600 baud
 7=115200 baud

 0= STX
CF32 Modbus protocol parity  1= EVEN
 2= NONE
 3= ODD

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
40/240
4.6 SKP 10 32x74 terminal
LAN - the LAN output manages the LED / 4 digit 32x74 terminal

 The SKP 10 terminal exactly replicates the information displayed by SBW600 and SDW600
 The SKP 10 terminal is used with the keyboard for the blank module SCW600

4.7 SKW22 - SKW22L remote LCD terminal

LAN - the LAN output controls the remote LCD terminal with integral ambient temperature control

--> See instruction sheet 9IS24102 remote terminal / terminale remoto LCD GB-I
--> See manual
8MA00218 terminale remoto LCD ITA
8MA10218 remote terminal LCD GB
8MA20218 terminal à distance LCD FR
8MA30218 terminal remoto LCD ES
8MA50218 LCD ferbedienung DE
8MAA0218 remote terminal LCD RUS

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
41/240
5 OPERATING MODES – TEMPERATURE CONTROL (FOLDER PAR/TR)
Temperature control parameters can be viewed and configured in folder tr (see User Interface and Parameters chapter).

The Energy SB600 controls the main temperature control setpoint by dynamically modifying its value using special
algorithms and events to maximise plant efficiency and output.

The action on the setpoint can be:

 Direct: modifies the principal setpoints

 Indirect: modifies by using the sum of the values (positive or negative) called the setpoint differentials with the
principal setpoints for the Cool and Heat modes.

There are several setpoint differentials:

 Dynamic setpoint differential on dedicated input or external temperature

 Economy function setpoint differential
 Adaptive function setpoint differential (see section in question)

In the same way (by means of the same direct and indirect actions) the temperature controller regulator hysteresis can be
dynamically controlled. This only affects the compressor power stages; the other steps, such as boiler and heaters, have
parameter-set hysteresis.
The main hysteresis differentials for the compressors are:

 Adaptive function hysteresis differential (see section in question)

The results of the direct and indirect actions on the principal setpoints and hysteresis are the real setpoint and hysteresis.

In general, we can say that the main temperature control is based on these 4 values:

1. Real Cool setpoint

2. Real Heat setpoint
3. Real Cool hysteresis (compressors only)
4. Real Heat hysteresis (compressors only)

The main temperature controller calculates the thermal power to be delivered, both in Heat and Cool mode.
The thermal power is expressed a number of steps (not or cold) to deliver.

5.1 Temperature controller setpoint and hysteresis

5.1.1 Setpoint and hysteresis from parameter value

We list below the parameters used to set the main working setpoints, one for each operating mode:

Parameter
COOL HEAT Description
tr10 tr20 Temperature controller setpoint in Cool / Heat
tr11 tr21 Temperature controller minimum setpoint in Cool / Heat
tr12 tr22 Temperature controller maximum setpoint in Cool / Heat
tr13 tr23 Temperature control hysteresis in Cool / Heat

There are direct modifications to the setpoint and hysteresis (direct action on the principal values, such as modification via
COM1) and indirect modifications, which sum the differentials to obtain the real setpoint and hysteresis.

5.1.2 Real setpoint and hysteresis

The real setpoints and hysteresis are calculated from the parameters described above and summing the total differentials
calculated in a specific way from the components described above.

 Real setpoint Heat = Main setpoint Heat + setpoint differential Heat

 Real setpoint Cool = Main setpoint Cool + Setpoint differential Cool

Setpoint differential = Dynamic temperature controller differential on dedicated input or external temperature
+ Economy function setpoint differential
+/- Adaptive function setpoint differential
+ Remote setpoint differential (from serial)

 Real hysteresis Heat = Main hysteresis Heat + Hysteresis differential Heat

 Real hysteresis Cool = Main hysteresis Cool + Hysteresis differential Cool

Hysteresis differential = Adaptive function hysteresis differential + Remote hysteresis differential (da seriale)

5.1.2.1 Setpoint differential: dynamic differential

See dynamic setpoint chapter (folder PAr/dS)

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
42/240
5.1.2.2 Setpoint differential: Economy differential
Enabling
The function is enabled only if a digital input has been configured as Economy input (at least one of CL40…CL45,
CL50…CL54=22)

When the digital input is enabled, the setpoint is increased by a differential equal to the value of parameter tr15 or tr25
depending on the current operating mode (Cool or Heat):

tr15: Setpoint differential in Cool from

economy input (typically positive) if
the operating mode is Cool

tr25: Setpoint differential in Heat from

economy input (typically negative) if
the operating mode is Heat.

<IMG INFO>

The activation of Economy mode is indicated by the Economy led (if so configured)

5.1.2.3 Setpoint and hysteresis differentials Adaptive function

See Adaptive chapter (folder PAr/Ad)

5.1.2.4 Setpoint and hysteresis differentials Remote differentials (from serial)

There are differentials, called "remote", on both the setpoints and the hysteresis, normally set to 0, which can be modified
(= activated) only via serial, for further details see the Supervision chapter.

In general, the setpoint can also be modified via COM1.

The modification may affect:
 values in EEPROM (dedicated parameters), non volatile memory
 values in RAM, volatile memory

Modifications via serial to setpoints in non volatile memory (e.g. with Device Manager, DM) have clear effects: they modify
the parameters:

 tr10 Temperature control setpoint in Cool

 tr20 Temperature control setpoint in Heat

Modifications via serial to setpoints in volatile memory (e.g. specific serial command) can only affect the main setpoints in
use at that time, and not the real setpoints.

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
43/240
The effect is temporarily modify the main setpoints, and this automatically cancelled if there is a black out (the setpoints
present in the EEPROM are loaded into RAM on reset), or at the next event in case of timed operation, etc.

Note. In the same way as indicated in the chapter Time band operation, the setpoints visible in the states menu (values Sp)
are those in use and, hence, may differ from the values of the EEPROM parameter tr10 and tr20 if, for example, they have
been modified by serial commands.

The same applies to the hysteresis parameters (and simplified, e.g. time band operation has no effect on hysteresis) as for
the setpoints.

5.2 Temperature controller

The SB600 has five types of temperature control, which are selected with tr00 Type of temperature controller:
 Proportional: Calculates the power the unit must supply in relation to the distance of the air/water
temperature from the setpoint
o tr00=0 Proportional temperature control - see diagrams A and B
 Differential: Calculates the power the unit must supply in relation to difference in temperature between two
analogue inputs
o tr00=1 Differential temperature control - see diagrams C and D
 Digital (motor condensing)
o tr00=2 Digital temperature control
 Proportional at INVERTER Calculates the power the unit must supply in relation to the distance of the
air/water temperature from the setpoint
o tr00=3 Proportional temperature control at INVERTER - see diagrams A’ and B’
 Differential at INVERTER Calculates the power the unit must supply in relation to difference in temperature
between two analogue inputs
o tr00=4 Differential temperature control at INVERTER

Temperature control parameters can be viewed and configured in folder tr (see User Interface and Parameters chapter).

5.2.1 Temperature control probes

Table A Regulation probe selection

Heat regulation COOL HEAT description Probe 1 Probe 2

Probe selection
proportional tr02 tr03 See table B N.A.
for temperature control in Cool/Heat modes
Select probe for differential temperature
differential tr04 tr05 See table B See table B
control in Cool/Heat modes

Table B Control probes

value Probe 1 Probe 2

Internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature
0
(CL30…CL34=0)
Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature
1
(CL30…CL34=1)
Circuit 1 and 2 internal exchanger water outlet average temperature External temperature NTC input
2 (CL30…CL34=8)
Average ((CL30…CL34=2), (CL30…CL34=3))
External exchanger inlet water temperature
3
(CL30…CL34=6)
External exchanger outlet water temperature
4
(CL30…CL34=7)
Circuit 1 and 2 external exchanger average temperature
5
Average ((CL30…CL34=4), (CL30…CL34=5))

* if one of the probes in is error or not configured, the average is a probe error

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
44/240
5.2.2 Proportional temperature control
This is a type of control which activates the power steps as a function of the divergence of the actual temperature from
the real setpoint.

Homogeneous or power stage compressors

The steps (heat or cool) are discrete and there are a limited number of them (max 4 for SB devices).
The number of steps (resources) requested is linked to the difference between the control temperature and the real
setpoint; the greater the difference, the larger the number of steps (resources) used to achieve the setpoint.
The temperature interval between application of one power step and the next depends on the proportional band and the
number of resources available (see Compressors chapter).

Temperature control is usually dependent on the inlet/outlet water/air temperature of the internal exchanger. Installations
with double internal exchanger can control the temperature as a function of the average of the two temperatures
measured at the exchanger outlets.

In some applications (e.g. machines with water reversal in Heat mode) it may be necessary to use the external (recovery)
exchanger inlet/outlet water temperature for temperature control.

Various temperature control probes can be selected for Heat and Cool modes using the parameters given in Table B
Control probes

5.2.3 Proportional power step temperature control in Cool/Heat mode

Temperature control is enabled in Heat mode only if Enable heat pump tr01 = 1
Case tr00=0

Diagram A Diagram B
COOL HEAT

IMG INFO

IMG INFO

Parameter Description
COOL HEAT Description
tr02 tr03 Select temperature control probe in Cool / Heat
tr14 tr24 Steps/compressors insertion differential in Cool / Heat
Setpoint Real setpoint in Cool / Heat
Hysteresis Real control hysteresis in Cool / Heat

Note: The real hysteresis may not be greater than the differential. In this case the hysteresis is considered equal to the
differential.

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
45/240
5.2.4 Temperature control at INVERTER in Cool / Heat mode
The temperature controller in Cool / Heat mode is enabled only if the parameter Enable heat pump tr01 = 1
Case tr00=3

Diagram A’ Diagram B’
COOL HEAT
Speed
Speed

tr33 Max Speed

tr33 Max speed

Step 4 tr32 Min Speed

Step 4 tr32 Min speed
(stage 2)
(stage 2)

Step 3 HEAT setpoint

Step 3 (stage 1)
(stage 1)

Step 2
Step 2
tr41 tr40
tr30 tr31 Step 1
Step 1 OFF
Temp AIn
Temp AIn
OFF
tr44 tr24 HYSTERESIS
HYSTERESIS tr14 tr34 HEAT
COOL ACTUAL
COOL setpoint ACTUAL
<IMG INFO>

Aln Temp Temperature read by the probe selected for Aln Temp Temperature read by the probe
temperature control in Cool selected for temperature control in
(parameter tr02 - Select probe for Cool
temperature control in Cool) (parameter tr03 - Select probe for
Or temperature control in Heat)
for differential temperature control in Cool Or
(parameter tr04 - Select probe for for differential temperature control
temperature control in Cool) in Cool
(parameter tr05 - Select probe for
temperature control
in Heat)

Par. Description

COLD HEAT
tr14 tr24 Steps/compressors insertion differential in Cool / Heat
Temperature controller hysteresis with inverter in Cool /
tr30 tr40
Heat
tr31 tr41 Temperature controller band with inverter in Cool / Heat
Speed tr32 tr42 Minimum speed with inverter in Cool / Heat
Speed tr33 tr43 Maximum speed with inverter in Cool / Heat
tr34 tr44 Inverter/compressors insertion differential in Cool / Heat

Note: The real hysteresis may not be greater than the differential. In this case the hysteresis is considered equal to the
differential.

Cool Case
Note: the sum tr30+tr31 must be less than tr34
Heat Case
Note: the sum tr40+tr41 must be less than tr44
If this is not the case, the hysteresis + band value is considered equal to the differential.

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
46/240
5.2.5 Differential temperature control
Differential temperature control is enabled with parameter tr00 Type of temperature controller.
E.g. tr00=1 (differential) / tr00=4 (differential at INVERTER)
The aim of differential temperature control is to maintain a constant difference between the external temperature and the
temperature of the air/water used for heating/cooling.
The temperature difference in question is defined by

temperature control value = Probe 1 - Probe 2

where Probe 2 is the external temperature.

See Table B Control probes

Installations with double internal exchanger can control the temperature as a function of the average of the two
temperatures measured at the exchanger outlets. The same applies to the external exchangers.

5.2.5.1 Differential temperature control in Cool / Heat mode

Temperature control is enabled in Heat mode only if tr01: Enable heat pump = 1.

Diagram C Diagram D
COOL HEAT

<IMG INFO>

<IMG INFO>
220,5
161,15
0

Parameter Description
COOL HEAT Description
tr04 tr05 Select differential temperature control probe in Cool / Heat
tr14 tr24 Steps/compressors insertion differential in Cool / Heat
Setpoint Real setpoint in Cool / Heat
Hysteresis Real control hysteresis in Cool / Heat

Note: The real hysteresis may not be greater than the differential. In this case the hysteresis is considered equal to the
differential.

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
47/240
5.2.6 Digital temperature control
This function is active if parameter tr00: Type of temperature controller = 2.
In the case of digital temperature control, the power step request depends on the state of specific digital inputs, typically
driven by external thermostats, rather than analogue variables.
The operating mode can also be selected via a digital input.
Note: Safety timings, settings (compressor ON delay, pump ON, ..) and alarms are active as usual.

The digital input configuration depends on the type of thermostat used in the application.
We list below the meanings which can be associated with the digital inputs in question.

Type 1 thermostat

Value DIL1÷DIL5 / AIL1÷AIL5 Description

±8 Digital input heat step 1 request
±9 Digital input heat step 2 request
±10 Digital input heat step 3 request
±11 Digital input heat step 4 request
±12 Digital input cool step 1 request
±13 Digital input cool step 2 request
±14 Digital input cool step 3 request
±15 Digital input cool step 4 request

Type 2 thermostat

Value DIL1÷DIL5 / AIL1÷AIL5 Description

±3 Remote Summer/Winter
±4 Power step 1 request
±5 Power step 2 request
±6 Power step 3 request
±7 Power step 4 request

For further details, see System Configuration (folder PAr/CL-Cr-CF) /

paragraph Configuration of digital inputs (DIL1÷DIL5 and AIL1÷AIL5) /
Table B - Digital inputs: configuration table

Notes:
- If two digital inputs are configured as heat step request and cool step request, activating both at the same time
generates a configuration error; for further details see the alarms table;
- If a digital input has been configured as heat request and the digital input for summer/winter is in the summer position,
this generates a configuration error;
- Temperature control depends directly on the activation of digital inputs which thus must be activated in a logical
sequence. For example, power steps must be activated and deactivated in the fixed sequence 1-2-3-4 and 4-3-2-1.

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
48/240
 6 OPERATING STATES (FOLDER PAR/ST)
Once it has been configured, the Energy SBW600 is ready to control the utilities as a function of the temperature and
pressure measured by the probes and the temperature control functions defined via its parameters.

Operating mode parameters can be viewed and configured in folder St (see User Interface and Parameters sections)

When Energy SBW600 is not OFF or on StdBy, it is in heat or cool mode

Operating states Three operating states can be set in parameter St00- Select operating modes:
 St00=0 Cool only COOL
 St00=1 Heat only HEAT
 St00=2 Heat and cool HEAT + COOL

Operating modes Operating modes can be selected:

 from the keyboard - if keys are enabled in parameters:
o UI 21 - Enable MODE function from key Enables/disables mode selection from a key
o UI 23 - Enable ON/OFF function from key Enables/disables ON/OFF key for switching the device on
or off
 from appropriately configured digital inputs:
o i.e. Remote ON/OFF
o Remote STD-BY

St00
0 1 2
COOL HEAT HEAT+COOL
Cooling x NA x
Heating NA x x
Standby (Stdby) x x x
Remote Standby (Stdby) x x x
Operating mode OFF x x x
Remote OFF x x x
AS X X
NA
(see section on Sanitary Water)
Remote AS
NA X X
(see section on Sanitary Water)

If different states are requested at the same time, the following priorities are assigned (in decreasing order):

Operating state
Current operating State (current mode)
after request
priority COOL HEAT HEAT+COOL
Digital input Digital input
Digital input configured
1 configured as ON/OFF configured as Remote OFF (§)
as ON/OFF (§)
(§) ON/OFF (§)
ON/OFF key
ON/OFF key enabled ON/OFF key enabled
enabled
2 (press and hold DOWN (press and hold DOWN OFF
(press and hold
key) key)
DOWN key)
Digital input
Digital input Digital input configured
3 configured as Standby
configured as Standby as Standby
Standby
action Mode selected by
Mode key enabled Mode key enabled
user
4 (press and hold ESC (press and hold ESC NA
(see mode key, mode
key) key)
changeover function)
Mode key enabled Standby
4 NA NA
(*) (*)
5 NA NA Select mode (**) (**)
Mode selected by
Mode key enabled
user
6 NA NA (press and hold ESC
(see mode key, mode
key)
changeover function)

(§) In this case the key [local ON/OFF] has no effect on the operating mode

(*) it will not be possible to switch from COOL mode to HEAT mode (HEAT label not visible by pressing and holding ESC
key (Mode, change mode function))

(**) it will not be possible to switch from HEAT mode to COOL mode (COOL label not visible by pressing and holding ESC
key (Mode, change mode function))

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
49/240
6.1 Automatic changeover
The automatic changeover function is enabled by parameter St01- Enable changeover from analogue input

The Cool/Heat modes are selected by means of two different differentials set by parameter
(St03 - Differential for automatic mode change in Heat for Heat mode, and St04 - Differential for automatic mode
change in Cool for Cool mode); in the neutral zone (between the two setpoints), the mode can be set from a key as well
(if enabled). See the graph below for more details;

6.1.1 Example of automatic changeover based on water temperature

MODE Set COOL Set HEAT

COOL ON

HEAT

T H20
IMG INFO
St04 St03

6.1.2 Example of automatic changeover based on external air temperature

MODE Set COOL Set HEAT

COOL ON

HEAT

Ext Temp.
St04 St03

MODE Operating mode

T H2O Water temperature (*)
Ext Temp External temperature (*)
SET COOL Real temperature control setpoint in Cool (**)
SET HEAT Real temperature control setpoint in Heat (**)
St03 Differential for automatic mode change in Heat
St04 Differential for automatic mode change in Cool

(*) If St01= 1 see parameters St02

(**) The real setpoints may differ from the values of parameters tr10 and tr20 - see Operating modes -
Temperature control (folder PAr/tr)

Note: St04 is added to COOL setpoint; St03 is added to HEAT setpoint.

Note: St03+St04 < HEAT setpoint - COOL setpoint, or the sum of differentials must never be more than HEAT setpoint -
COOL setpoint

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
50/240
6.2 Operating states table
Operating states and associated functions/algorithms enabled/disabled for each one are listed in the table below.
● Function enabled
Example: The Hot Start function can be enabled ONLY in HEAT mode

Function Cooling Heating Std-By and remote Std- OFF and remote
COOL HEAT By OFF
User interface ● ● ● ● (°)

Temperature controller ● ●

Select operating mode ● ● ●

Compressor ● ● ●

Internal circuit water pump ● ● ●

Recirculation fan ● ●

External exchanger fan ● ● ●

External circuit water pump ● ● ●

Internal circuit heaters ● ● ●

External circuit heaters ● ● ●

Auxiliary output ● ● ●

Boiler ● ●

Defrost ●

Dynamic setpoint ● ●

Economy ● ●

Adaptive function ● ●

Antifreeze with heat pump ● ● ●

Hot Start ●

Power limitation ● ●

Record running time ● ● ● ●

Manual alarm reset ● ● ● ●

Manual defrost ●

MFK ● ● ● ●

Alarms log ● ● ● ●

Diagnostics ● ● ● ●

Serial communication ● ● ● ●

(°) In this case the key [local ON/OFF] has no effect on the operating mode

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
51/240
6.3 Reversal valve management
SB600 allows you to set the valve switching modes (slow/fast switching) based on the type of system by configuring
parameter St05 - Reversal valve switching delay

If the switching time St05 is different from zero, the inversion of the valve happens only with compressors switched off
(“soft inversion”). The compressors are switched off and on according to set rules and times. It is a prudent mode, but
one which ensures the required efficiency and speed.

6.3.1 Mode Change

 The operation is described below – diagrams A…D.
 Operation in defrost or in antifreeze with heat pump is described in the related chapters.
 Note that the mode change with St05=0 also occurs with compressors on and the operation is also identical in
defrost and antifreeze with heat pump

Diagram Parameter Mode Change

A St05 different from COOL - HEAT

B 0 HEAT - COOL
C COOL - HEAT
St05 = 0
D HEAT - COOL

Diagram A
CP20

CP24 CP23

St05 St05
ON
Compressor 2 Compressor 2
OFF

ON
Compressor 1 Compressor 1
OFF

ON
OFF Reversing valve

<IMG INFO>
time
339,95
121,9
0
2
113,2
0
-1

Diagram B
CP20

CP24 CP23

St05 St05
ON
Compressor 2 Compressor 2
OFF

ON
Compressor 1 Compressor 1
OFF

ON
OFF Reversing valve

<IMG INFO>
time
339,8
117,35
0
2
-2,75
2,4
-1

Parameter Description
St05 different from 0 Reversal valve switching delay
CP20 Minimum off/on for same compressor
CP23 Minimum on/on time for same compressor
CP24 Minimum off/off time for different compressors

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
52/240
 Diagram C

ON
Compressor 2
OFF

ON
Compressor 1
OFF

ON
OFF Reversing valve

time
<IMG INFO>
339,95
120,95
0
2
65,25
0
-1

Diagram D

ON
Compressor 2
OFF

ON
Compressor 1
OFF

ON
OFF Reversing Valve

time
<IMG INFO>
339,95
119,05
0
2
42,35
0
-1

Parameter Description
St05 = 0 Reversal valve switching delay

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
53/240
7 COMPRESSORS (FOLDER PAR/CP)

Compressor parameters can be viewed and configured in folder CP (see User Interface and Parameters chapters).
The parameters are:
 CP00, CP01 to define the type and number of compressors in the installation;
 CP03..CP10 to set timings.

The Energy SBW600 is able to control “Alternate”, “Scroll” and “Screw” compressors in a range of configurations.
The Energy SBW600 controls up to two cooling circuits, with one or two evaporators.
The Energy SBW600 can control from one to four power steps, at most two per cooling circuit.
The Energy SBW600 is also able to pilot the inverters for compressors by means of the following analogue outputs
 Analogue stage 1 for Compressor
 Analogue stage 2 for Compressor
The type of compressor control depends on the configuration of the analogue outputs;
The Energy SBW600 has 3 analogue outputs, 2 with voltage output 0-10V and one with current output 0-20mA or 4-20mA.
Of these only a maximum of 2 can be configured as analogue outputs for compressor inverter control; depending on the
number of outputs configured, only the first or both analogue stages are available (equivalent of step).
NOTE: compressor management with converter is only suitable for systems with non-staged compressors.

Safety timings can be set for the actuation of compressors and power stages to prevent damage.
Special on/off sequences can be programmed to optimise the use of the available compressors and power.

General conditions of operation

In Off the compressors are switched off immediately and always (even when the safeties are active).
In Stand-by the compressors are normally switched off; during the transition from On to Stand-by, they are switched off in
accordance with their timings. In Stand-by, the compressors are activated in anti-freeze with heat pump mode.

In On, further to the principal regulation specified in the following paragraphs, the following situations (with priority over
the principal regulation itself) may occur:

the compressors are switched off immediately in case of compressor shut-down alarms (see alarms table)

7.1 Types of compressor

Compressors may be controlled in a variety of ways according to their number, size and construction.
Parameter CP00 indicates the type of compressor:

Value CP00 Description

0 Non-power stage compressors
1 Alternate power stage compressors
2 Screw power stage compressors

Configuring digital outputs as compressor:

The compressor or compressors, or compressor and its power stage is/are connected to one of the available relay outputs
D01…D04, D06 or to the D05 open collector output, by setting the following parameters:
 CL90…CL95= ±1…±4 for compressor1..4
 CL90…CL95= ±50…±53 for power steps 1…4

7.1.1 Non-power stage compressors (CP00 = 0)

This is the most simple case, the individual compressor is switched on/off via a single digital output. If more compressors
are present, they can be of the same or a different power rating and switched on according to the power requirements of
the installation.

Compressor without power stage: CP00 = 0.

Note: Set CP03 = 0

Power Compressor
0 Off
100% On

4 Homogeneous compressors without power stage: CP00 = 0

Power Compressor 1 Compressor 2 Compressor 3 Compressor 4

0 Off Off Off Off
25% On Off Off Off
50% On On* Off Off
75% On On* On* Off
100% On On* On* On*

*In this case, the switching on sequence is fixed. This may not always be the case.

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
54/240
Systems with inverters: since only two analogue outputs are available for compressor piloting, if the system has a greater
number of compressors, management will be mixed between analogue and relays; in these cases the analogue steps are
always the "highest" steps or those which are most distant from the setpoint. Refer to the paragraph Compressor
Configuration / Permitted configurations in the case of non-staged compressors (CP00 = 0)
forthe various combinations and configurations permitted based on the type of system, understood as the number of
compressors and the number of circuits

7.1.2 Power stage compressors (CP00 = 1,2)

The construction of these compressors enable them to modulate their power delivery by means of power stage activation.
Each compressor is switched on or off by a single digital output, but other digital outputs control its power stage
depending on the power requirements of the installation.
The compressor is always switched on or off without power stage.

There are two ways in which the power stage is activated: for alternate multi-cylinder compressors, for screw compressors.
In the first case, the power stage is obtained by short circuiting the suction and discharge valves of the cylinders, in screw
compressors by deviating the discharge flow to various positions along the screw.
The actuation logic for the power stage relays is different in each case, see the following table:

Alternate power stage compressors with 3 power stages: CP00 = 1

There are 3 power stages, i.e. the compressor can supply 0%, 25%, 50%, 75% or 100% of its power

Power Compressor Power stage 1 Power stage 2 Power stage 3

0 Off Off Off Off
25% On On On On
50% On On On Off
75% On On Off Off
100% On Off Off Off

Note: The compressor control timings are different from those of the power stages. See Compressor timings for more
details.

Note: note that, with CP00 = 2, the compressor starts (at 25% power) when two relays are actuated at the same time.

7.2 Compressor configuration

the SBW600 can control from one to a maximum of four steps on a single circuit, or up to two steps per circuit for a total
of two circuits.
The installation is configured with the parameters:
 CP01 - Number of circuits
 CP02 - Number of compressors per circuit
 CP03 - Number of power stages per compressor.

Multicompressor configurations always use compressors of the same type/construction.

Multicircuit installations always employ symmetrical circuits.

Permitted configurations:

 In the case of non-power stage compressors (CP00 = 0)

CP00 = 0 Non-power stage compressors

(set CP03=0)
CP02 = 1 CP02 = 2 CP02 = 3 CP02 = 4
Compressor 1
Compressor 1
Compressor 1 (*) Compressor 2
CP01 = 1 Compressor 1(§) Compressor 2
Compressor 2 (**) (§) Compressor 3
Circuits

Compressor 3
Compressor 4
Compressor 1
Compressor 1(*) Not allowed
Compressor 2
CP01 = 2 Not allowed
Compressor 1
Compressor 2(**)
Compressor 2

NOTE: Set CP03=0

(§) Step replaced by analogue stage 1 if only one analogue output is configured as compressor
(*) Step replaced by analogue stage 1 if 2 analogue outputs are configured as compressor
(**) Step replaced by analogue stage 2 if 2 analogue outputs are configured as compressor
NOTE: asymmetrical or unbalanced distributions of inverter controls for compressors are not permitted

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
55/240
  In the case of power stage compressors (CP00 = 1 and 2) with 1 power stage per compressor (CP03 = 1)

CP00 = 1 and 2 Compressors with 1 power stage

CP03 = 1
CP02 = 1 CP02 = 2 CP02 = 3 CP02 = 4
Compr. 1, Step 0
Compr. 1, Step 0 Compr. 1, Step 1
CP01 = 1 Not allowed Not allowed
Compr. 1, Step 1 Compr. 2, Step 0

Circuits
Compr. 2, Step 1
Compr. 1, Step 0
Compr. 1, Step 1
CP01 = 2 Not allowed Not allowed Not allowed
Compr. 2, Step 0
Compr. 2, Step 1

LEGEND: (Compr. = compressor, Step = Step)

 In the case of power stage compressors (Type of compressor CP00 = 1 and 2) with 2 power stages per
compressor (Number of power stages per compressor CP03 = 2)

CP00 = 1 and 2 Compressors with 2 power stages

CP03 = 2
CP02 = 1 CP02 = 2 CP02 = 3 CP02 = 4
Compr. 1, Step 0
Circuits

CP01 = 1 Compr. 1, Step 1 ( Not allowed Not allowed Not allowed

Compr. 1, Step 2

CP01 = 2 Not allowed Not allowed Not allowed Not allowed

 In the case of power stage compressors (CP00: Type of compressor = 1 and 2) with 3 power stages per
compressor (CP03: Number of power stages per compressor 3 = )

CP00 = 1 and 2 Compressors with 3 power stages

CP03 = 2
CP02 = 1 CP02 = 2 CP02 = 3 CP02 = 4
Compr. 1, Step 0
Compr. 1, Step 1
Circuits

CP01 = 1 Not allowed Not allowed Not allowed

Compr. 1, Step 2
Compr. 1, Step 3

CP01 = 2 Not allowed Not allowed Not allowed Not allowed

7.3 Compressor timing

Compressor and power stage on/off states must be limited in time, to ensure the mechanical and electrical safety of the
equipment.
The SBW600 provides a set of safety parameters for compressors and power stages.
In some cases these parameters are not relevant, as during defrosting, to ensure machine performance. In other cases, the
safety timings may influence or modify the compressor operation logic.

 CP20: Minimum time between switching off/on for a given compressor [Secx10]
 CP21: Minimum time between switching on/on for a given compressor [Secx10]
 CP22: Minimum on time for a compressor [Secx10]
 CP23: Minimum time between switching on/on for different compressors [Sec]
 CP24: Minimum time between switching off/off for different compressors [Sec]
 CP25: Minimum compressor on time for power stage increase [Sec]
 CP26: Minimum compressor on time for power stage decrease [Sec]
 CP27: Minimum time between switching on/off in defrost mode [Sec]

7.3.1 Minimum time between switching off/on for a given compressor

Defined by parameter CP20: Minimum Off-On time for a given compressor . This is the minimum time that must elapse
between one switch-off and the next start-up. This is expressed in seconds x 10 and is active even after a reset.

7.3.2 Minimum time between switching on/on for a given compressor

Defined by parameter CP21: Minimum On-On time for a given compressor. This is the minimum time that must elapse
between one start-up and the next. This is expressed in seconds x 10 and is active even after a reset.

7.3.3 Minimum compressor on time

Parameter CP22: Minimum compressor on time defines the minimum time between a compressor switching on and off
again. It is expressed in seconds x 10.

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
56/240
7.3.4 Minimum time between the switching on of more than one compressor
Parameter CP23: Minimum compressor on/on time for different compressors defines the minimum time between two
compressors switching on. If requested, a compressor can be switched on only after this time has elapsed since the
previous compressor was switched on. This is expressed in seconds and is active even after a reset.

7.3.5 Minimum time between the switching off of more than one compressor
Parameter CP24: Minimum off/off time for different compressors defines the minimum time between two compressors
switching off. If requested, a compressor can be switched off only after this time has elapsed since the previous
compressor was switched off. This is expressed in seconds and is active even after a reset.

IMG INFO

7.3.6 Minimum compressor on time for power stage increase

Parameter CP25: Minimum compressor on time for power stage increase defines the minimum time between power stage
increases (steps). It is expressed in seconds.

7.3.7 Minimum compressor switch on time for decrease in power stages

Parameter CP26: Minimum compressor on time for decrease in power stages defines the minimum time between power
stage (step) decreases. It is expressed in seconds.

Note. CP25 and CP26 have priority over CP23 and CP24

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
57/240
Note. When safety timings overlap, the longest one prevails.

7.3.8 Minimum time between switching on/off in defrost mode

During defrosting and in anti-freeze with heat pump mode, the timings CP23, CP24, CP25 and CP26 are ignored, and
instead parameter CP27: Minimum time between switching on/off in defrost mode is the unique minimum time for
increasing or decreasing a general power stage.
In other words, this safety timing applies to both compressors, power stages and compressors/power stages.
All other safety timings are ignored in this phase. This speeds up the start and end of defrosting, or at least, controls their
duration.

7.3.9 Other timings

Compressors also obey other timings related to the operational status of other services such as water pumps, reversing
valves, etc.
For details, see the chapters dealing with such services.

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
58/240
7.4 Compressor on/off sequence

7.4.1 Availability of resources

A resource is available if it can be used (switched on/off).

A compressor ( or its power stage, if applicable) is available if

• it is not blocked due to an alarm (see alarms section)
• it is not blocked by safety timings (see compressors section)
• it is not blocked by the configuration (see compressors section)
• it is not blocked by regulation (e.g. block heat pump function, power limitation, etc.)

In checking the availability of resources, the sequence Compressors  Circuits is always followed.

When selecting (actuating/deactivating) resources, one follows the opposite sequence: Circuits  Compressors (selecting
an evaporator selects its circuit).

A circuit is said to be saturated when it is delivering all the power stages available from its compressors. A circuit is said to
be active or on if it has at least one active compressor; it is off if none of its compressors is on. The current activation level
of a particular circuit is defined as the total number of power steps that the compressors are supplying at the time (for
example, a circuit that has 2 compressors with 1 power stage can supply up to 4 activation levels/steps)

A compressor is said to be saturated when it is supplying its maximum number of deliverable steps (for example, a
compressor with 3 power stages can supply at most 4 levels/steps of activation). A compressor is said to be active or on if
it has at least one active step. The current activation level of a particular compressor is defined as the total number of
power steps that it is supplying at the time (for example, a compressor that has 2 power stages can supply up to 3
activation levels/steps)

7.4.2 Managing resources

If the number of active steps satisfies the current request, it is not modified.

If the temperature controller requests to activate/deactivate a step, the availability of the compressors and circuits is first
analysed to control the services on the basis of two logics, that of saturation and that of balancing.
The procedure is to first select the best circuit and then the best compressor in that circuit.

Saturation: The saturation policy attempts to distribute resources equally over the smallest possible number of
services compatible with the constraints imposed by other requirements, for example compressor
safety timings.
The resulting allocation is intended to have the largest possible number of compressors switched of
and circuits deactivated at any one time.

Balancing: The balancing policy attempts to distribute resources equally over the largest possible number of
services compatible with the constraints imposed by other requirements, for example compressor
safety timings.
The resulting allocation is intended to have compressor and circuit output levels equalized as much as
possible (in other words, the smallest number of compressors and circuits off).

There are two parameters which establish circuit (and evaporator) activation as well as activation of the compressors for
each circuit:
 CP10: Circuit balancing enable
 CP11: Compressor balancing enable

Value Description CP10 Description CP11

CP10
CP11
0 Saturation (circuits) Saturation (compressors)
1 Balancing (circuits) Balancing (compressors)

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
59/240
7.4.3 Resource selection criterion
When the two control selections are applied (saturation and balancing), it may happen that one has to choose between
resources which are equally available (for example, when switching on the very first service of all). This selection must
therefore also take into account factors like hours of operation and fixed on/off sequences.
the hours of operation of a circuit is the sum of the hours of operation of its compressors.

Hours of operation: One chooses the circuit or compressor which has the least hours of operation when
switching on, and most hours of operation when switching off. This tends to use all
resources equally.

Fixed sequence: On(1-2-3-4), Off(4-3-2-1)

In this case, the selection of the circuit or compressor follows a fixed sequence (given
availability). This option uses the resources in a fixed manner, which can be useful in case of
steps of different power or when managing secondary backup resources in special
circumstances.

Fixed sequence
INVERTER compressor: On(1-2-3-4), Off(4-3-2-1)
Only usable option in the case of single-circuit configuration with at least one
compressor managed by INVERTER

Operating time: This option applies on when there is a single circuit with two compressors (non-power
stage) or two circuits with two compressors each, and uses the compressor resources (in
this case, non-homogeneous) in a manner equalised to the load.
If the effective operating time of the circuit (TE, time between switching the first
compressor on and the last compressor off during the previous cycle) is less than the time
set in the parameter, on the next request from the temperature controller (for that circuit)
the first resource to be activated shall be that with the lowest index (“resource 1”) and then
resource 2; if the effective operating time of the circuit is greater than the time set in the
parameter, on the next request from the temperature controller the first resource to be
activated shall be that with the highest index (“resource 2”) and then resource 1;

There are two parameters which establish circuit and activation as well as activation of the compressors for each circuit:

 CP12: Circuit selection criterion

 CP13: Compressor selection criterion

Value Description CP12 Description CP13

0 Hours balancing Hours balancing
1 Sequence On 1,2; Off 2, 1 Sequence On 1,2,3 and 4; Off 4,3,2
and 1
2 // Operating time

7.4.4 Selecting the circuit/evaporator

Parameter CP10: Enable circuit balancing is only relevant if there are two circuits. If set to 0 (saturation) all the power
steps of a given circuit are first activated, followed by those of the other circuit. If set to 1 (balancing), the power steps are
activated in such a way that both circuits deliver the same power, or the difference is at most one step.
The circuit is selected according to the value of CP12: Circuit selection criterion

CP12 Saturation Balancing

CP10 = 0 CP10 = 1
Hours of operation When switching on, the circuit with least When switching on, the procedure starts
CP12 = 0 hours of operation is selected (with with a step of the circuit with least hours of
compressors available for switching on) up operation (with compressors available for
to saturation, after which the second switching on), this is then balanced with a
circuit is activated. step from the other circuit and so on until
When switching off, teh circuit with least both are saturated.
steps active is selected (with compressors When switching off, the opposite sequence
available for switching off) or (if the same is followed, giving priority to the circuit
number of steps are active on each), that with most hours of operation (with
with the highest number of hours of compressors available for switching off).
operation.
Fixed sequence When switching on, the first circuit is used When switching on, the procedure starts
On(1,2) Off(2,1) up to saturation, after which the second with a step of the first circuit, this is then
CP12 =1 circuit is activated. balanced with a step from the other circuit
When switching off, first all the second and so on until both are saturated.
circuit and then the first circuit is switched When switching off, the opposite sequence
off. is used.

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
60/240
7.4.5 Selecting the compressor or power stage
Parameter CP11: Enable compressor balancing is only relevant if there are 2 power stage compressors in the same circuit
(which for the SBW600 remains single, since it cannot control a second one with the same characteristics).
If set to 0 (saturation) all the power steps of one compressor are first activated, followed by those of the other
compressor. If set to 1 (balancing), the power steps are activated in such a way that both compressors deliver the same
power, or the difference is at most one step. The compressor is selected according to the value of CP13: Compressor
selection criterion.
Parameter CP14: Compressor operation time for on sequence is used if the operation time of the previous cycle is used as
the selection criterion.

CP13 Saturation Balancing

CP11 = 0 CP11 = 1
Hours of operation When switching on, the available When switching on, the procedure starts
CP13 = 0 compressor with the least hours of with the first power stage of the
operation is selected until it is saturated, compressor with least hours of operation,
after which the other compressors are then the first stage of the next compressor
selected. until all compressors are operating, then
When switching off, first the available the second stages, etc..
compressor with least power stages active When switching off, the procedure switches
is selected, or (for an equal number of off the power stages of the available
power stages active) the one with the compressors with the same logic, favouring
greater hours of operation. those with the greater hours of operation.
Fixed sequence When switching on, the first compressor is When switching on, the procedure starts
On(1,2,3,4) used up to saturation, after which the with the first power stage of the first
Off(4,3,2,1) second compressor is activated, and so on. compressor, then the first stage of the
CP13 = 1 When switching off, the first to be selected second compressor until all compressors
is that with the highest index, until it is are operating, then the second stages, etc..
completely switched off, and so on. When switching off, the stages are switched
off with the same logic, starting from the
one with the highest index.
Operating time CP11 is irrelevant inasmuch as selection by operating time is not required if there are two
CP13 = 2 power stage compressors in the same circuit.

If the effective operating time of the circuit is less than the time set in parameter CP14, on
the next temperature controller request the sequences On(1,2) and Off(2,1) are used.
In the case of two circuits with two compressors each, the sequences are On(3,4) and
Off(4,3), independently for the two circuits.
Whereas, if the operating time is greater than CP14 the next sequences will be On(2,1)
and Off(1,2).

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
61/240
8 INTERNAL CIRCUIT PUMP (FOLDER PAR/PI)
The SBW600 controls one or two hydraulic pumps on the internal exchanger water circuit. Control may be digital or
analogue, and depends on a number of system variables such as temperature controller status, external exchanger fan
speed and internal exchanger water temperature.
For systems with two pumps, these are connected in parallel, and at most one is operational at a time.

Internal circuit water pump parameters can be viewed and configured in folder PI (see User Interface and Parameters
chapters).

The following must be configured:

Digital control
 at least one digital output as internal circuit water pump 1, using the parameters CL90…CL97 / CL80-CL81 if
digital / CL61…CL63 if digital = ±14.
 **at least one digital output as internal circuit water pump 2, using the parameters CL90…CL97 / CL80-CL81 if
digital / CL61…CL63 if digital = ±15.

Analogue control
 at least one analogue output as modulating internal circuit water pump 1, using the parameters CL80-CL81 if
analogue / CL61…CL63 if analogue = ±59.
 **at least one analogue output as modulating internal circuit water pump 2, using the parameters CL80-CL81 if
analogue / CL61…CL63 if analogue = ±60.

** in the case of two pumps

The configurable outputs for digital pump control are relays, whereas in modulating operation they are the internal triac
(for direct control) or the pulse outputs (for external triacs) and the analogue outputs.

8.1 Configuration of internal circuit water pump

Enabling
The controller is enabled by setting parameter (Pi00 -Select internal circuit water pump operating mode) not equal to
0.
Control of the second pump is enabled only if parameter (Pi05 - Maximum internal circuit water pump changeover
start time is not equal to 0.

Table 1

Parameter Description value

0 1 2
on
request
Continuous
Select internal circuit water (pump on
I pump P100 Pump disabled operation (Always
pump operating mode when
ON)
compress
or on)
0 Not equal to 0
after this time (in minutes) the
Maximum internal circuit water active pump is switched off and
II pump PI05 Pump disabled
pump changeover start time replaced by the second pump if
available.

Table 2

value
Par Description
0 1 2
Enable internal circuit Internal circuit Internal circuit
antifreeze
PI10 water pump on water pump water pump //
heater
when antifreeze heaters active disabled enabled
Enable
modulating
pump on the
basis of the
difference
between
internal
Enable pump exchanger
Enable internal circuit No
Boiler PI11 when the boiler is water/air inlet
special water pump enabling
on temperature
and Internal
exchanger
water/air outlet
temperature.
See
configuration of
analogue inputs

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
62/240
 General conditions of operation
At any given time, only one of the pumps may be operating, so that we will talk below of "the pump", rather than "the
pumps".

 In Off the internal circuit pump is immediately and always off (even if post-pumping is underway).
 In Standby the internal circuit pump is normally off; during the transition from On to Stand-by, the pump is
switched off in accordance with its timings (e.g. post-pumping). In Standby, the pump is activated in: antilock,
antifreeze with water pump, antifreeze with internal heater, antifreeze with heat pump.
 In On, further to the principal regulation specified in the following paragraphs, the following situations (with
priority over the principal regulation itself) may occur:
 In Defrosting the internal circuit pump is always on (at maximum speed if of the modulating type);
 The pump is forced on (at maximum speed if of the modulating type) if antifreeze with water pump is active,
which is also active in Standby;
 The pump is forced on (at maximum speed if of the modulating type) if antilock is active, which is also active in
Standby;
 The pump is forced on (without delays) if the internal heater is on in integration mode, both to prevent damage
to the exchanger and to ensure that the heat is effectively dispersed/used.
 The pump be forced on (at maximum speed if of the modulating type) if antifreeze with internal circuit heater is
active, depending on parameter Pi10: Enable internal circuit water pump on when antifreeze heaters active (also
active in Standby);
 The pump may be forced on (without delays and at maximum speed if modulating) if the boiler is active,
depending on parameter Pi11: Enable internal circuit special water pump; with Pi11 = 0, if only the boiler is
active and the pump is enabled on request, the pump is normally off;
 The pump is influenced by the Sanitary Water regulator if the value of parameter AS00 is 4 or 6 e.g. with
systems provided with the Sanitary Water pump rather than the Sanitary Water valve. This influence is due to
the fact that the two pumps cannot both be ON at the same time; see the section on Sanitary Water
 The pump is switched off immediately in case of pump block alarm (see alarms table and flow switch
paragraph).

Note: If an automatic reset flow switch alarm occurs, the pump is kept on to allow it to be reset; if the alarm becomes
manual reset, the pump is switched off.

Note: The minimum pump off/on period is fixed at 10 seconds. This applies to both pumps individually.

8.1.1 Control of the second pump

The system's two pumps are connected in parallel, and at most one is operational at a time.
At each activation request the pump with least operating hours is activated, if available, i.e. if there is no thermal switch
alarm.
If it is not available, the other pump is activated.

If the active pump is active for longer than the time given in parameter Pi05 - Maximum internal circuit water pump
changeover start time, it is switched off and the other is turned on (if available, otherwise the timer is set to zero and the
same pump keeps running).

8.2 Continuous operation

Case Pi00= 1.

8.2.1.1 Internal circuit pump digital control in Cool / Heat

One of the two digital outputs is always active.

8.2.1.2 Internal circuit pump analogue control in Cool / Heat

One of the two analogue outputs is always active and controlled in continuous mode.

The modulating operation of the internal circuit water pump is either active or not depending on the external exchanger
fan speed. In the case of two circuits, we take the average speed of the two fans.

Diagram A Diagram B
COOL HEAT

<IMG INFO>
226,3
124,3
0
2

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
63/240
 Parameter
COOL HEAT Description
PI02 Internal circuit water pump pick-up time.
PI30 PI40 Minimum speed internal circuit water pump in Cool / Heat
PI31 PI41 Maximum speed internal circuit water pump in Cool / Heat
PI34 PI44 Fan speed setpoint to modulate internal circuit water pump in Heat
PI35 PI45 Fan speed hysteresis to modulate internal circuit water pump in Heat
Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature or
the difference between
Control sensor
 Internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature and
 Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature

Modulating function in Cool / Heat mode

The internal circuit modulating pumps connected to the analogue outputs are switched on at maximum speed (relative to
the current mode of operation) for a period given in parameter Pi02 - Internal circuit water pump pick-up time.
After this time, the pump is run at the speed requested by the controller.

Diagram C Diagram D
COOL HEAT

<IMG INFO>
<IMG INFO>

Parameter
COOL HEAT Description
PI02 Internal circuit water pump pick-up time.
PI30 PI40 Minimum speed internal circuit water pump in Cool / Heat
PI31 PI41 Maximum speed internal circuit water pump in Cool / Heat
PI32 PI42 Minimum internal circuit water pump speed setpoint in Cool/Heat
PI33 PI43 Internal circuit water pump proportional band in Cool / Heat

Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature or

the difference between
Control sensor
 Internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature and
 Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature

Note The pump runs at minimum speed if the compressors are off.
Note A probe must be configured as Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature and if two probes are so configured,
the average is taken.
Note: If Pi00=2 e.g. if the difference between
 Internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature and
 Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature
is considered, it is not permitted to have two output probes.

8.3 Operation on call

Case Pi00= 2.

8.3.1.1 Internal circuit pump digital control in Cool / Heat

One of the two digital outputs is active in parallel with the compressor. The internal circuit pump is activated when the
main temperature controller calls the first step. The compressor starts after the delay given in parameter Pi20: Delay
internal circuit water pump on and compressor on (Pre-pumping). Once the last power stage of the compressor is off, the
pump is switched off after the delay given in Pi21: Delay compressor off - internal circuit water pump off (Post-pumping).

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
64/240
Note: Post-pumping is also observed in standby mode.

8.3.1.2 Internal circuit pump analogue control in Cool / Heat

The two analogue outputs are activated in the same situations in which the digital outputs are activated (with pre / post-
pumping) but allow for analogue control, with modulating operation according to the diagrams in the previous paragraphs
for continuous operation (modulation as a function of the internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature probe value or
the average of the two).

Note. The pump runs at minimum speed if the compressors are blocked by alarms.

8.3.1.3 Operation on call: periodic pump activation

The function is enabled of Pi22 is not equal to 0, and allows water to be driven round the circuit at regular intervals for
improved temperature control (the real water temperature in the circuit can always be measured periodically), with
consequent energy savings.

Use parameter Pi22: Maximum pump of time in operation on call to establish a maximum time for the pump to stay off
after which it is forced on (so long as there are no block alarms, and at maximum speed if modulating) for the minimum
time defined in Pi03: Minimum pump on time.

Note: This function is disabled in standby.

Note: The activation of the compressor could also be delayed by other safety timings, this means that the pre-pumping
time could be longer (never shorter).

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
65/240
 8.4 Pump antilock mode
This function prevents any mechanical faults due to extended disuse.

<IMG INFO>
51,85
The antilock function is active when:
 enabled by parameter (PI01 - Internal circuit water pump idle time due to antilock > 0). See table 3
 always active, except for OFF (local and remote) unless alarms switch off the pump

If the pump stays off for longer than or equal to Pi01: Internal circuit water pump idle time due to antilock, the controller
forces it on (at maximum speed if modulating) for the time set in parameter Pi03: Minimum pump on time.

Table 3

Antilock Parameter Description Value

0 >0

PI01 Internal circuit water pump idle time due to antilock Function disabled Function enabled

Diagram E PI03 Minimum internal circuit water pump start time Time in seconds x 10

Diagram E Pump antilock

<IMG INFO>

Note: the broken line indicates the second pump, if present

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
66/240
8.5 Antifreeze operation with pump
The antifreeze function runs when:
enabled by parameter Pi50 -Select probe for internal circuit + water pump antifreeze.
 See table 4
 always active, except for OFF (local and remote) and Stdby (local and remote) unless alarms switch off the
pump

Table 4 - Pi50

Value Probe
0 No probe (pump in antifreeze disabled)
1 Internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature
2 Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature
3 Internal exchanger water outlet temperature circuit 1
4 Internal exchanger water outlet temperature circuit 2
5 Circuit 1 and 2 internal exchanger water outlet minimum temperature
6 External temperature

Diagram F Antifreeze operation with pump

<IMG INFO>

Parameter Description
PI51 Internal circuit water pump regulator setpoint for antifreeze
PI52 Internal circuit water pump regulator hysteresis for antifreeze
Control probe
Select probe for internal circuit + water pump antifreeze
Pi50

Note. If the probe selected for antifreeze with the internal circuit pump is in error, the machine is blocked.

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
67/240
9 RECIRCULATION FAN (FOLDER PAR/FI)

The recirculation fan parameters are visible and can be set up in folder FI (see User Interface and Parameters chapters).

The following must be configured:

 at least one digital output as recirculation fan using parameters CL90…CL97 / CL80-CL81 if digital /
CL61…CL63 if digital = ±18.

Enabling
The controller is enabled by setting parameter (Fi00 -Select recirculation fan operation) not equal to 0.

Table 1 - Parameter Fi00

Parameter Description value

0 1 2
Recirculation fan
Select Recirculation fan
Recirculation fan operation on
Enabling Fi00 recirculation fan continuous
disabled temperature
operation operation
controller call

General conditions of operation

 In Off the recirculation fan is immediately off (even when post-ventilation in underway).
 In Standby teh fan is off, in accordance with established timings (e.g. post-ventilation). ote: the fan remains on
until all of the compressors have been switched off
 In On, further to the principal regulation specified in the following paragraphs, the following situations (with
priority over the principal regulation itself) may occur:
 In defrost, the recirculation fan is off (as per parameter Fi03: Post-ventilation time in Heat mode);
 if at least one of the internal exchanger heaters is on, the fan is forced on (absolute priority); after the last
heater has been turned off, parameter Fi03: Post-ventilation time in Heat mode applies;
 if alarm Er30: Internal circuit antifreeze alarm, is active, the fan is forced on;
 the recirculation fan is immediately switched off in case of a blocking alarm (see alarms table)

9.1.1 Continuous operation

Case Fi00 = 1.
The digital output recirculation fan, is always on except in the conditions specified in the general conditions of operation
section.

9.1.2 Operation on call

Case Fi00 = 2.
Activation of the recirculation fan depends on the status of the compressors (not of the compressor temperature
controller), of the temperature measured by the internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature probe, and the real
temperature controller setpoint (Heat or Cool).
The fan is switched on only is at least one compressor is running and the exchanger inlet air temperature is adequate.

Note. if the Internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature is in error (or has not been configured), recirculation fan
activation depends exclusively on the compressor status.

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
68/240
9.1.2.1 Recirculation fan in Heating / Cooling

Control is dependent on the real setpoint as shown

Diagram A Diagram B
COOLING HEATING

<IMG INFO>

Parameter
COOL HEAT Description
Fi01 Fi02 Recirculation fan hysteresis in Cool / Heat
Setpoint Real setpoint in Cool / Heat
Control probe Internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature

9.2 Post-ventilation
In Heat mode, the fan is switched off after a delay set in parameter Fi03: Post-ventilation time in Heat mode after the
internal circuit integration heaters have been switched off.
This post-ventilation time allows for the heat generated by the heaters to disperse, thus preventing damage or fire.

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
69/240
10 EXTERNAL EXCHANGER FAN (FOLDER PAR/FE)
The SBW600 controls (via digital outputs) the ventilation of the air condensation units of the two chiller/heat pump
temperature control circuits.
Alternatively, it can control ventilation in a modulating mode, via analogue outputs .

The configurable outputs for digital pump control are relays, whereas in modulating operation they are the internal triac
(for direct control) or the pulse outputs and the analogue outputs (indirect control).

External exchanger fan parameters can be viewed and configured in folder FE (see User Interface and Parameters
chapters).

The following must be configured:

 at least one digital output as external exchanger fan with parameters CL90…CL97 / CL80-CL81 if digital /
CL61…CL63 if digital = ±19 (circuit 1)/ ±20 (circuit 2).

Enabling
The controller is enabled by setting parameter FE00 - External exchanger fan mode selection not equal to 0.

Table 1 - Parameter FE00

Parameter Description Value

0 1 2
External exchanger Ventilation Continuous operation Operation on call (ON
Enabling FE00
fan mode selection disabled (Always ON) when compressor ON)

General conditions of operation

 InOff the fans are switched off immediately and always (even when the cut-off bypass is active).
 In Standby the fans are normally switched off; during the transition from On to Standby, the fans are switched
off in accordance with their timings (e.g. bypass on current cut-off). If FE11=2 the fans are active at the same
time as the external exchanger heaters in antifreeze mode.
 In On, further to the principal regulation specified in the following paragraphs, the following situations (with
priority over the principal regulation itself) may occur:
 In Defrost the behaviour of the fans depends on parameter FE11: Enable special open system intercooler fan on
(see below for details);
 if the external exchanger heaters are on (or if at least one is on in the case of 2 heaters), the fans are activated
if FE11=2 . In the case of two circuits, the fans of both circuits are activated;
 the external exchanger fans are switched off immediately in case of fan shut-down alarms (see alarms
table)

Parameter
COOL HEAT Description
FE30 FE50 Minimum speed external exchanger fan in Cool / Heat
FE31 FE51 Average speed external exchanger fan in Cool / Heat
FE32 FE52 Maximum speed external exchanger fan in Cool / Heat
Setpoint Real setpoint in Cool / Heat
Control probe External exchanger water/air inlet temperature

External exchanger fan on pick-up

The external circuit modulating pumps connected to the analogue outputs _AO_VenPerC1 and _AO_VenPerC2 are
switched on at maximum speed (relative to the current mode of operation) for a period given in parameter FE01: External
exchanger fan pick-up time. After this time, the pump is run at the speed requested by the controller.

External exchanger fan control input

Control is achieved with the value of the analogue input configured with parameters FE33: Select probe for external
exchanger fan regulation in Cool and FE53: Select probe for external exchanger fan regulation in Heat.

Parameters table FE33 and FE53

Value Description Regulation

0 No probe On or On/Off
1 External exchanger temperature (circuit 1 and 2) Direct
2 High pressure input (circuit 1 and 2) Direct
3 Low pressure input (circuit 1 and 2) Reversal
4 External exchanger pressure (circuit 1 and 2) Direct
5 Internal exchanger pressure (circuit 1 and 2) Reversal
6 Internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature Direct
7 Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature Direct

If the plant has two circuits, the fans on the two external exchangers are controlled independently, on separate probes:
both circuits must have analogue inputs configured for this purpose.
If not, ventilation will always be active.

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
70/240
Analogue inputs for ventilation control

Description U.M.
External exchanger temperature circuit 1 °C
External exchanger temperature circuit 2 °C
High pressure input circuit 1 Bar
High pressure input circuit 2 Bar
Low pressure input circuit 1 Bar
Low pressure input circuit 2 Bar
External exchanger pressure circuit 1 Bar
External exchanger pressure circuit 2 Bar
Internal exchanger pressure circuit 1 Bar
Internal exchanger pressure circuit 2 Bar
Internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature °C
Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature °C

10.1.1 Continuous operation

Example FE00= 1.
Ventilation is activated, independently of the state of the compressors on the basis of the value of the analogue input
configured for control.
The parameter FE21- External exchanger fan preventilation time must be set to 0.
Note: If an analogue input is not configured or if the configured analogue input is in error, ventilation is always active (at
maximum speed if modulating).

10.1.1.1 External exchanger fan digital control in Cool / Heat

Diagram A Diagram B
COOLING HEATING
Analogue input control
External exchanger
External exchanger temperature
temperature Low pressure input High pressure input
Low pressure input
High pressure input Internal exchanger pressure Internal exchanger pressure
External exchanger pressure
External exchanger
pressure

<IMG INFO>
<IMG INFO>

Parameter
COOL HEAT Description
FE33 FE53 Select external exchanger fan control probe in Cool/Heat
FE34 FE54 Minimum external exchanger fan speed setpoint in Cool / Heat
FE38 FE58 External exchanger fan cut-off hysteresis in Cool / Heat
FE39 FE59 External exchanger fan cut-off differential
Control probe External exchanger water/air inlet temperature

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
71/240
10.1.1.2 External exchanger fan analogue control in Cool / Heat
Analogue input control: Analogue input control:
External exchanger temperature Low pressure input
High pressure input Internal exchanger pressure
External exchanger pressure circuit

COOL

<IMG INFO>

Analogue input control: Analogue input control:

External exchanger temperature High pressure input
Low pressure input Internal exchanger pressure
External exchanger pressure circuit

HEAT

<IMG INFO>
425,05
162,25
0
2

Parameter
COOL HEAT Description
Control probe
Select probe for external exchanger fan control in Cool/Heat
FE33 FE53
FE34 FE54 Minimum external exchanger fan speed setpoint in Cool / Heat
FE35 FE55 Maximum external exchanger fan speed differential in Cool / Heat
FE38 FE58 External exchanger fan cut-off hysteresis in Cool / Heat
FE39 FE59 External exchanger fan cut-off differential
Control probe Select external exchanger fan control probe in Cool/Heat

10.1.2 Operation on call

Case FE00 = 2.
Ventilation is activated, on the basis of the value of the analogue input configured for control and depending on the state
of the compressors

Note: If an analogue input is not configured or if the configured analogue input is in error, ventilation is activated
exclusively on the basis of the state of the compressors (at maximum speed if modulating).

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
72/240
10.1.2.3 External exchanger fan digital control in Cool / Heat
External exchanger fan control is activated at the moment in which the main temperature controller calls the first step of
the temperature control circuit (to which the external exchanger belongs).

The compressor starts after the delay given in parameter FE21: External exchanger fan preventilation time.
Note: compressor activation may be delayed by other safety timings.

Furthermore, the digital outputs are controlled by parameter FE34: External exchanger fan minimum speed setpoint in
Cool as for continuous operation, with the following exception: after the compressor is activated (meaning the first
compressor or power stage of the circuit in question), for the delay given in parameter FE20: Bypass time for external
exchanger fan cut-off the fans are forced on even if the controller is requesting cut-off.

Pre-ventilation is used in Cool to prevent high temperatures on the exchanger when the compressor is switched on.
The cut-off bypass prevents extreme temperatures on the exchanger.

Note: if there are alarms blocking the compressors, external exchanger fan control remains active even with the
compressors off.

Note: The activation of the compressor could also be delayed by other safety timings, this means that the pre-ventilation
time could be longer (never shorter).

COOL

<IMG INFO>

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
73/240
 HEAT

<IMG INFO>

Note: if there are alarms blocking the compressors, external exchanger fan control remains active even with the
compressors off.

10.1.2.4 External exchanger fan analogue control in Cool

The analogue outputs are activated exactly as the respective digital outputs (with pre-ventilation and cut-off bypass) and
are modulated, except for the cut-off bypass period (where the fans are activated at minimum speed if the controller
requests cut-off), according to parameter FE34: External exchanger fan minimum speed setpoint in Cool as for continuous
operation.
If there is no request for steps the fan is normally off.

10.1.2.5 External exchanger fan analogue control in Heat

The analogue outputs are activated exactly as the respective digital outputs (with cut-off bypass) and are modulated,
except for the cut-off bypass period (where the fans are activated at minimum speed if the controller requests cut-off),
according to parameter FE54: External exchanger fan minimum speed setpoint in Heat as for continuous operation.
If there is no request for steps the fan is normally off.

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
74/240
10.2 Fan control in defrost
Fan activation in defrost mode is useful because pressure at the external exchanger can reach alarm levels if the exchanger
is not totally de-iced. To prevent a high pressure alarm in this situation, the fans are run (at minimum speed if
modulating).

The behaviour of the external exchanger fan during defrost is determined by FE11: Enable special open system intercooler
fan on, in which the fans run at maximum speed.
If the machine has two temperature control circuits, the status of the fan is dependent on the defrost condition of its
respective circuit.
On completion of defrosting the fan resumes operation as requested by its controller.

 If FE11 = 0, the fan is forced off throughout defrosting.

 If FE11 = 1, the fan is off or on at minimum speed (digital output active) depending on the analogue input
configured for control of the fan in defrost and parameter FE12: External exchanger fan on setpoint in defrost in
the following way:

<IMG INFO>
339,95
188,9

FE12: External exchanger fan on setpoint in defrost

FE13: External exchanger fan on hysteresis in defrost
FE14: Select probe for external exchanger fan regulation in defrost

Parameter table FE14

Value Description
FE14
0 No probe
1 External exchanger temperature (circuit 1 and 2)
2 High pressure input (circuit 1 and 2)
3 External exchanger pressure (circuit 1 and 2)

Note: if there are two temperature control circuits, each must have a probe configured for this purpose. If no analogue
input is configured or if the configured input is in error, ventilation is always at minimum during defrost (maximum in coil
drainage).

Note: At the end of defrost, the fans are switched on (at maximum speed if modulating) for the time set in parameter
dF23: Coil drainage time, before the reversing valve switches.

10.3 Fan control with single condensation

Parameter FE10: Enable single condensation configures 2 circuit machines with single condensation.

if FE10 = 0 the two fans are independent and depend on the condensation pressure/temperature and the state of the
compressors on the individual circuits.
If FE10 = 1 the 2 (in reality 2 digital and 2 analogue) external exchanger fan outputs operate in parallel at the maximum
output value of the two controllers for the two circuits.

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
75/240
11 EXTERNAL CIRCUIT PUMP (FOLDER PAR/PE)
External circuit water pump parameters can be viewed and configured in folder PE (see User Interface and Parameters
chapters).

At least one digital output must be configured as External Circuit Water Pump with parameters CL90…CL97 = ±16.
See chapter System configuration (folder PAr/CL-Cr-CF) / Configuration of digital outputs

Enabling
The external circuit water pump can be enabled by parameter (PE00 - External circuit water pump mode selection=1)

Param
Description value
eter
0 1 2 3
Operation
External circuit Continuous
Pump NOT synchronised with
PE00 water pump mode operation (Always
disabled USED external
selection ON)
exchanger fans

Based on PE00 the external circuit pump can operate in continuous mode or synchronised with the external exchanger
fans.

General conditions of operation

In Off the pump is always off.
In Standby the pump is normally off; it is activated at the same time as the external exchanger heater in antifreeze ( if
PE00=1). If PE00=3 the pump is activated only if the external exchanger fans are activated.
In On the pump is always on if PE00 = 1. If PE00=3 the External Circuit Water Pump is activated “in parallel” to the
external exchanger heaters: e.g. the pump is activated if the external exchanger fan is activated (single-circuit systems), or
if at least one of the two fans is activated (dual-circuit systems).

Notes:
The pump is immediately switched off in the event of boiler lock alarm (see alarms table).
If an automatic reset flow switch alarm occurs, the pump is kept on to allow it to be reset; if the alarm becomes manual
reset, the pump is switched off.
The minimum pump off/on period is fixed at 10 seconds.

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
76/240
12 INTERNAL EXCHANGER ELECTRIC HEATERS (FOLDER PAR/HI)
The SB600 controls internal exchanger heaters 1 and 2, which act both for the antifreeze function (typically in machines
with water-type internal exchanger) and integration for the heat pump/heating function (air and water).

Parameters for internal circuit exchanger heaters can be viewed and configured in folder HI: Internal exchanger electric
heater parameters (see User Interface and Parameters chapters).

Antifreeze/integrated use heaters should be connected to a relay output (°) DO1..D04, D06 (see).
 They are active only when the relative parameter enabling them HI00, HI02=1 (see table)

(°) The heater control outputs are all and exclusively those outputs with ON/OFF control.
The heaters can be used in a variety of ways depending on the type of system. We can have one or two internal
exchangers and one or two circuits.

In the case of a single exchanger with single/double circuit: in antifreeze, defrost and integration the heaters are controlled
in equivalent mode.

In the case of a double exchanger with double circuit: in antifreeze and defrost the two heaters are controlled differently,
depending on the variables of the circuit in question; in integration they are controlled equivalently.

For greatest configurability:

 the number of antifreeze heaters and integration heaters can be set independently;
 the control analogue input can be determined individually.
 The heaters (1 or 2) can be used only for antifreeze, only for integration/heating, or for both functions at the
same time.

value
heaters Parameter Description
0 1
Antifreeze Enable internal exchanger heater regulator in
HI00 Heaters disabled Heaters enabled
(Standby) standby for antifreeze
See Heaters in
HI01 Enable force heaters on during defrost See parameters table Hi01
defrost
paragraph
Select probe for antifreeze internal exchanger +
Antifreeze HI10 heater 1
See Parameters table Hi10 and Hi11
Select probe for antifreeze internal exchanger +
Antifreeze HI11 heater 2

Enable integrated use of internal exchanger heaters See parameters table Hi20
integrated use HI20

12.1 Internal antifreeze heater

Enabling
The internal exchanger antifreeze heaters are enabled with parameters
 HI10 - Select probe for antifreeze internal exchanger + heater 1
 HI11 - Select probe for antifreeze internal exchanger + heater 2

General conditions of operation

 In Off the internal exchanger antifreeze heaters are immediately and always off.
 In Standby the internal exchanger antifreeze heaters are active if so configured with ( Hi00 -Enable internal
exchanger antifreeze heaters in Stand-By).
 In On, further to the principal regulation specified in the following paragraphs, the following situations (with
priority over the principal regulation itself) may occur:
 In Defrost the internal circuit heaters are controlled by parameter Hi01: Enable force heaters on during
defrost. See dedicated paragraph
 The internal circuit heaters are immediately turned off during heater block alarms (see alarms table).

Note: There are no safety times for heater on/off.

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
77/240
12.1.1 Internal circuit antifreeze heater control

<IMG INFO>

Parameter Parameter
Hi10 Select probe for antifreeze internal exchanger + heater 1
Control probe
Hi11 Select probe for antifreeze internal exchanger + heater 2
Hi12 Internal exchanger heater regulator setpoint for antifreeze
Setpoint Hi13 Maximum internal exchanger heater regulator setpoint for antifreeze
Hi14 Minimum internal exchanger heater regulator setpoint for antifreeze
Hysteresis Hi15 Internal exchanger heater regulator hysteresis for antifreeze

Parameters table Hi10 and Hi11

Value H110 / Hi11 Probe

0 No probe (antifreeze heater disabled)
1 Internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature
2 Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature
3 Internal exchanger water outlet temperature circuit 1
4 Internal exchanger water outlet temperature circuit 2
5 Circuit 1 and 2 internal exchanger water outlet minimum temperature

Note: depending on settings, the heaters can be turned on together (using the same probe) or separately (using different
probes).

Note: In case of control probe error, the machine is blocked.

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
78/240
12.2 Configuration of integration heaters
Enabling
Use parameter Hi20 Select heater mode in integration mode to activate the heaters in integration mode controller.
Either 1 or 2 heaters will be controlled, depending on the value of Hi26: Differential setpoint internal exchanger heater 2
on in integrated use: 1 heater if Hi26 = 0, 2 heaters if Hi26  0.

General conditions of operation

 InOff the compressors are switched off immediately and always.
 In Stand-by the integration heaters are switched off immediately and always (note that since there are two
controllers on the same heaters, the same heaters may stay on in Standby if so required by the antifreeze heater
controller).
 In On, further to the principal regulation specified in the following paragraphs, the following situations (with
priority over the principal regulation itself) may occur:
 In Defrost the internal circuit heaters are controlled by parameter Hi01 Enable force heaters on during defrost.
See dedicated paragraph
 Le resistenze del circuito primario sono spente immediatamente in caso di allarmi di blocco resistenze.
 In Sanitary Water mode regulation occurs on the actual ACS setpoint instead of the actual Heat setpoint
 In ACS for Anti-Legionnaire's Disease mode, regulation occurs on the Sanitary Water setpoint for Anti-
Legionnaire's Disease instead of the actual Heat setpoint

The internal circuit heaters are immediately turned off during heater block alarms.

Operating modes
Integration heaters are turned on only in Heat mode; the regulation of the setpoint is obtained by subtracting a differential
from the real Heat setpoint.
This differential can be calculated in a variety of ways by configuring parameter Hi20: Select heater mode for internal
exchanger in integration mode.

Parameter table Hi20

Value Hi20 Description

0 Integration heaters disabled
1 Integration heaters with setpoint differential proportional to external temperature
2 Integration heaters with setpoint differential in steps on external temperature
3 Integration heaters with setpoint differential fixed

12.2.1 Integration heater differential

The integration heater regulation setpoint is calculated by subtracting a differential from the real Heat setpoint.

Integration heater setpoint = real Heat setpoint - integration heater differential

The integration heater differential is calculated in a variety of ways: proportional, step or fixed.

Note: When the heat pump is blocked, the differential for heaters in integrated use will be forced to a fixed value equal to
Hi23: Heater differential in integration mode with heat pump lock. This serves to better control the power steps of the
integration heaters in special circumstances.

Integration heaters with differential setpoint proportional to external temperature

Case H20= 1.

<IMG INFO>
441
163,2
0

Parameter Parameter
External temperature
//
Control probe

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
79/240
Setpoint Hi21 Internal exchanger heater dynamic differential setpoint in integrated use
Hi22 Maximum dynamic differential internal exchanger heaters in integrated use
Internal exchanger heater dynamic differential proportional band in integrated
Hi24 use
Hysteresis //

Integration heaters with differential in steps on external temperature

Case H20= 2.

Integration heater differential fixed, independent of external temperature

Case Hi20= 3.

Note: In case of error or lack of configuration of the external probe, the differential value is set to Hi22 or Hi23 (both
fixed) depending on circumstances.

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
80/240
12.2.2 Integration heater regulation
Regulation uses the integration heater setpoint calculated with the integration heater differential as explained in the
preceding paragraph. By a step is meant the activation of internal exchanger heater 1 or 2.
The analogue input used for regulation is the main temperature controller probe for Heat mode.

Depending on the value of Hi26: Setpoint differential for activation of internal exchanger heater 2 in integration mode you
can determine whether to activate heater 2 in integration or not.

Note: if you want to activate the two heating elements at the same time (using two outputs to keep the thermal switches
separate), simply give Hi26 a small value, but still non-zero and greater than the hysteresis Hi25 (the hysteresis may not be
greater than the value of the differential, otherwise value of the hysteresis used in control will coincide with that of the
differential).

With Hi26 not equal to 0

<IMG INFO>

With Hi26 = 0

<IMG INFO>

Parameter Parameter
Control probe
tr03 Select temperature control probe in Heat
HEAT
Setpoint // Integration heater setpoint
Hysteresis Hi25 Internal exchanger heater regulator hysteresis in integrated use
Setpoint differential for activation of internal exchanger heater 2 in
Hi26 integration mode

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
81/240
12.3 Heaters in defrost mode
Parameter Hi01: Enable force heaters on during defrost determines the operation of the internal exchanger heaters during
defrost.
One or both of the heaters can be forced on, or heater 1 can be linked to defrosting circuit 1 and heater 2 to circuit 2.

Parameter table Hi01

Value Description
0 Free operation (no forcing)
1 Heater 1 forced on
2 Both heaters forced on
3 Heater 1 forced on for defrost circuit 1, heater 2 for defrost circuit 2 (double exchanger)

Note. For cases with value 1 and 2, the heaters are turned on if at least one of the two circuits is defrosting (typically used
in case of single exchanger).

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
82/240
13 EXTERNAL EXCHANGER ELECTRIC HEATER PARAMETERS (FOLDER PAR/HE) – ELECTRIC
HEATERS
The external exchanger heater parameters can be viewed and modified in folder HE (see User Interface and Parameters
chapters).

The following must be configured:

at least one digital output as external exchanger 1 heater with parameters CL90…CL97 / CL80-CL81 if digital /
CL61…CL63 if digital = ±25.
at least one digital output as external exchanger 2 heater with parameters CL90…CL97 / CL80-CL81 if digital /
CL61…CL63 if digital = ±26.
See chapter System configuration (folder PAr/CL-Cr-CF) / Configuration of digital outputs

The SB600 controls external exchanger heaters 1 and 2 with antifreeze function (as heat pumps with water external
exchanger).
The heater control outputs are all and exclusively those outputs with ON/OFF control.
The heaters can be used in a variety of ways depending on the type of system. We can have one or two external
exchangers (one or two circuits).

For greatest configurability:

the number of antifreeze heaters can be set;
the control analogue input can be determined individually.

Enabling
The external exchanger heater 1 antifreeze probe is enabled and selected with parameter HE10 - Select probe for
antifreeze external exchanger + heater 1.
The external exchanger heater 2 antifreeze probe is enabled and selected with parameter HE11 - Select probe for
antifreeze external exchanger + heater 2.

General conditions of operation

In Off the external exchanger antifreeze heaters are immediately and always off.
In Standby the external exchanger antifreeze heaters are active if so configured with (HE00 - Enable external
exchanger antifreeze heaters in Stand-By).
In On, further to the principal regulation specified in the following paragraphs, the following situations (with priority over
the principal regulation itself) may occur:

The external circuit heaters are immediately turned off during heater block alarms.

Note: There are no safety times for heater on/off.

Table A - external exchanger heater parameters

heaters Parameter Description Value

0 1
Enable external exchanger
External
heater regulator in standby for
exchanger
HE00 antifreeze Heaters disabled Heaters enabled
(Standby
mode)

Heaters Parameter Description Value

0 1 2 3 4
External
exchanger Select probe for antifreeze External
HE10
Enable external exchanger + heater 1 No probe exchanger External External
heater 1 (antifreeze average exchanger exchanger External
External heater temperature inlet water outlet water temperature
exchanger Select probe for antifreeze disabled) circuit 1 and temperature temperature
HE11 2
Enable external exchanger + heater 2
heater 2

Heaters Parameter Description Value

External exchanger heater

External Range defined by parameters HE14….HE13
HE12 switch on setpoint for
exchanger Hysteresis defined by parameter HE15
antifreeze

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
83/240
External exchanger heaters
Regulation is performed as shown in the figure:

HE10 Analogue input - see table A

HE11 Analogue input - see table A
HE12 Setpoint - see table A
HE13 Maximum external exchanger heater regulator setpoint for antifreeze
HE14 Minimum external exchanger heater regulator setpoint for antifreeze
HE15 External exchanger heater regulator hysteresis for antifreeze

Note: depending on the settings, the heaters can be turned on together or separately.
Note: In case of control probe error, the machine is blocked.

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
84/240
14 AUXILIARY OUTPUT (FOLDER PAR/HA)
Auxiliary output parameters can be viewed and configured in folderHA (see User Interface and Parameters chapters)

The following must be configured:

at least one digital output as Auxiliary Output with parameters CL90…CL97 / CL80-CL81 if digital / CL61…CL63 if
digital = ±32.

The auxiliary output controller can be used, for example, to control heaters in machines with air condensation to
evaporate the condensation water.

Enabling
The parameter (HA00 - Select probe for auxiliary output regulator) enables the auxiliary output controller.

Table A - meaning of parameter HA00:

Value Probe
HA00
0 No probe (auxiliary output disabled)
1 External temperature
2 External exchanger temperature circuit 1
3 External exchanger temperature circuit 2
4 External exchanger inlet water temperature
5 External exchanger outlet water temperature
6 NOT USED

General conditions of operation

In Off the auxiliary output is immediately and always off.
In Standby the auxiliary output is immediately and always off.
In On, further to the principal regulation specified in the following paragraphs, the following situation (with priority over
the principal regulation itself) may occur: the auxiliary output is immediately turned off in case of a block alarm for the
output itself.

Note: There are no safety times for auxiliary output on/off.

Auxiliary heaters

Regulation is performed as shown in the figure:

Parameter Description
HA00 Control probes - see table A
HA01 Auxiliary output regulator setpoint
HA02 Auxiliary output regulator hysteresis
Auxiliary output Auxiliary output

Note: In case of probe error, the machine is blocked.

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
85/240
15 BOILER (FOLDER PAR/BR)
The SB600 controls, via a digital output, the pump or the permissive signal for a hot water boiler which is used both for
heating and as a supplementary heater (integration mode) for the water heat pump.
The boiler control outputs are all and exclusively those outputs with ON/OFF control.
There are many types of installation and consequently many ways of using the boiler, especially in residential installations.

15.1 Boiler configuration

The boiler is used as a heating power step both for the chiller and the heat pump.
Combined with the integration/heating heaters and the compressors (in heat pump mode) it produces hot water on the
internal circuit.

For maximum configurability, you can set the boiler and other component parameters separately. You can thus determine
when to use the boiler power step for heating and when to inhibit it.

In both modes, heating and integration, the boiler setpoint can be set as a differential (fixed or proportionally variable
depending on the external temperature) with respect to the real setpoint in heat mode.

Note. Normally, when there is no heat pump (heating mode), the differential is set as fixed, and to zero (the regulation
setpoint coincides with the real heat mode setpoint).

Note: if parameter Maximum boiler dynamic differential is set to 0, the setpoint coincides with the real Heat setpoint.

Enabling
Setting parameter br00: Select boiler modenon-zero enables boiler regulation.

General conditions of operation

 In Off the boiler is immediately and always off.
 In Stand-by the boiler is immediately and always off.
 In On, further to the principal regulation specified in the following paragraphs, the following situation (with
priority over the principal regulation itself) may occur: The boiler is immediately off in case of boiler lock alarm
(see alarms table).
 In Sanitary Water mode the boiler regulates on the actual Sanitary Water setpoint instead of the actual Heat
setpoint
 In ACS for Anti-Legionnaire's Disease mode, the boiler regulates on the Sanitary Water setpoint for Anti-
Legionnaire's Disease instead of the actual Heat setpoint

Note: There are no safety times for boiler on/off.

Operating modes
The boiler regulator is only active in Heat mode; the regulation of the setpoint is obtained by subtracting a differential
from the real Heat setpoint.
The boiler differential can be calculated as a variety of ways which can be selected with parameter Select boiler modebr00.

Parameter table br00

Value Description
br00
0 Boiler disabled
Boiler with differential
1 Diagram A
Setpoint proportional to external temperature
Boiler with differential
2 Diagram B
Setpoint in steps dependent on external temperature
Boiler with differential
3 Diagram C
Fixed setpoint

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
86/240
15.1.1 Boiler differential
The boiler regulation setpoint is calculated by subtracting a differential from the real Heat setpoint.

Boiler setpoint = real Heat setpoint - Boiler differential

In case of heat pump block, the Boiler differential takes the fixed value of parameter br03: boiler differential with heat
pump block. This serves to improve the control of the boiler power step in special cases.

Boiler differential setpoint proportional to external temperature

Example br00 = 1.
Diagram A

<IMG INFO>
311,75
125,05
0
2
56,8
0
-1

Parameter Parameter
Regulator
// External temperature
probe
Setpoint br01 Boiler dynamic differential setpoint
br02 Maximum boiler differential
br04 Boiler differential proportional band

Boiler differential in steps as a function of external temperature

Example br00= 2.
Diagram B

Parameter
Regulator
// External temperature
probe
Setpoint br01 Boiler dynamic differential setpoint
br02 Maximum boiler differential br02
br04 Boiler differential proportional band
Hysteresis br05 Boiler regulator hysteresis

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
87/240
Boiler differential fixed, independent of external temperature
Case br00= 3.
Diagram C

<IMG INFO>

Note: In case of error of the external probe, the differential value is set to br02 or br03 (both fixed) depending on
circumstances.

15.1.2 Boiler regulation

The regulation uses the Boiler setpoint calculated with the boiler differential as explained in the previous paragraph.

<IMG INFO>
339,85
188,65
0

Parameter
Boiler
br00 See Boiler differential section
differential
HEAT regulator
tr03 Select temperature control probe in Heat
probe

Setpoint // Boiler setpoint

Hysteresis br05 Boiler regulator hysteresis

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
88/240
16 DEFROST (FOLDER PAR/DF)
Defrost parameters can be viewed and configured in the dF folder (see User Interface and Parameters chapters)

Defrosting is only possible in HEAT mode.

It is used to prevent ice from forming on the surface of the external exchanger.
Ice builds up on the external exchanger more often as a result of cold external air containing a high degree of humidity
This considerably reduces the thermodynamic efficiency of the machine and can also result in damage to the machine
itself.

Enabling
Defrosting is enabled if:
 it is enabled via parameter (dF00 - Enable defrost function = 1,2)

Parameter table dF00

Value Description
0 Defrost disabled
1 Simultaneous defrost (in double-circuit plants only)
2 Independent defrost in single or in double-circuit plants (only with separate condensation)

General conditions of operation

 In Off defrosting is disabled.
 In Stand-by defrosting is disabled.
 In On, further to the principal control specified in the following paragraphs, the following situation may also
arise (with priority to the principal control itself): the defrost request is inhibited/cancelled if antifreeze with
heat pump is active.

Types of defrosting
SBW600 controls bothSingle defrosting for a single or double external exchanger, and Independent defrosting for the
exchangers of two cooling circuits.

In the first case, single defrosting, the two circuits defrost at the same time when at least of them requires it. This mode
applies to machines with single condensation (parameter FE10: Enable single condensation = 1). The circuit which
completes defrosting first, before it resumes normal operation, waits (with compressors off) for the other circuit to
complete defrosting.

Note: In case of single condensation, two start probes must be configured (on for circuit 1 and one for circuit 2) along
with two 2 defrost end probes. The times for starting defrosting are nonetheless independent.

In the case of Independent defrosting each circuit defrosts separately.

The start and end of the defrost cycle depends on the values of the probes and the parameter settings described below;

defrost Parameter Description

dF01 Enable maximum power for non-defrost circuit
dF10 Select probe to enable interval count between defrosts
dF11 Enable interval count between defrosts setpoint
start
dF12 Setpoint to clear cumulative time between defrosts
dF13 Cumulative interval between defrosts
dF14 Minimum interval between defrost cycles
dF20 Select probe to end defrost
dF21 Defrost deactivation setpoint
output
dF22 Maximum defrost time
dF23 Dripping time
dF30 Maximum dynamic defrost differential
Set Point dF31 Defrost dynamic differential setpoint
dF32 Dynamic defrost differential proportional band

Defrosting is done in heat mode, by reversing the cooling cycle, switching the position of the reversal valve and operating
the circuit in chiller mode.

During defrosting, the reversal valves switch in the same way as for change-overs (see chapter Reversal valve
management), with the time given in parameter ST05 - Reversal valve switching delay, and compressor on/off times
which refer only to defrosting (parameter CP27 - defrost compressor step/delay minimum).

In multi-circuit systems, defrosting can be run separately (independently) or at the same time (single) for the various
cooling circuits, depending on the general operational requirements of the plant.

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
89/240
Analogue inputs for defrosting start/end
Defrosting can be started in relation to the pressure or temperature measured by the probe selected in parameter dF10:
Select probe to enable interval count between defrosts.
Defrosting can be ended in relation to the pressure or temperature measured by the probe selected in parameter dF20:
Select probe to end defrost.
In the double circuit case, each circuit must have an analogue input configured for the function in question.

Defrosting function analogue inputs

Description
External exchanger temperature circuit 1
External exchanger temperature circuit 2
High pressure input circuit 1
High pressure input circuit 2
Low pressure input circuit 1
Low pressure input circuit 2
External exchanger pressure circuit 1
External exchanger pressure circuit 2

Parameters table dF10 and dF20

Value Description
0 No probe
1 External exchanger temperature (circuit 1 and 2)
2 High pressure input (circuit 1 and 2)
3 Low pressure input (circuit 1 and 2)
4 External exchanger pressure (circuit 1 and 2)

16.1 Defrost

16.1.1 Start defrost

Defrosting can be started in relation to the pressure or temperature measured by the probes selected in parameter Select
probe to enable interval count between defrosts dF10.
If there is a probe error or no probe is configured, start of defrosting depends solely on the effective operating time of the
compressors and the parameter Cumulative interval between defrosts dF13.
The time between defrosts must be at least equal to the value of parameter Minimum interval between defrost cycles dF14.
Note: If dF00 = 2 in systems with two circuits, the minimum time between two defrosts is applied to both circuits
therefore defrost cannot occur on the two circuits simultaneously

The conditions required for starting defrosting of a circuit are as follows:

 When the pressure or temperature detected by the start defrost probe on the circuit drops below the value of
the start defrost setpoint and the circuit is supplying at least one power step, the cumulative defrost delay
counter is started, the value of which can be set with parameter dF13: Cumulative interval between defrosts.
 The start defrost setpoint is a dynamic value calculated on the basis of parameter dF11: Setpoint to enable
interval count between defrosts (see relative section).

 When the pressure or temperature read by the defrost start probe for the circuit returns above the value of the
defrost start setpoint ot the circuit is no longer delivering any power steps, the cumulative defrost delay count is
stopped.

 The count is reset to zero after a defrost cycle or after a reset (e.g. power down).

 The cumulative defrost delay count is also reset when the temperature or pressure of the probe configured as
defrost start probe rises above the value set in parameter dF12: Setpoint to clear cumulative time between
defrosts

 When the cumulative defrost delay count terminates (when the time set in the parameter elapses), the circuit
runs a defrost cycle.

Given the above, the start time for the defrost cycle corresponds to the time at which the count ends (before valve
reversal).

Note: In case of change-over, the count is suspended but not reset. In this way, at the next change (e.g. from OFF or
Stand-by to Heat), the count resumes from its preceding value.

In the case of independent defrosting or a single circuit, defrosting starts only when the compressor safety times are reset,
and the conditions for starting defrosting are satisfied (the circuit is delivering at least one power step, etc.).

In the case of single defrosting, defrosting starts only when the compressor safety times of both circuits are reset and the
conditions for starting defrosting on the requesting circuit are satisfied. The two circuits defrost in a fully harmonised
manner.

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
90/240
Defrosting starts with the reversal valve switching sequence for the circuits in question in the same way as for change-
overs (see paragraph Reversal valve management).

16.1.2 Defrosting cycle

After cycle reversal, the compressors are all on (max. available power). If there is an alarm which inhibits operation of one
or more compressors, defrosting proceeds anyway (as in the case of defrosting during a simple stop).
In the case of independent defrosting of two circuits, parameter dF01: Enable maximum power for non-defrost circuit
allows you to force the other circuit to maximum power (the circuit not to be defrosted), for reasons of compensation.

16.1.3 End defrost and coil drainage

Defrost terminates:

Due to temperature/pressure: if the temperature or pressure of the end defrosting probe of the circuit rises
above the value set in parameter dF21: Defrost deactivation setpoint.
Due to duration: if defrosting does not end due to temperature or pressure within the maximum
time set in parameter dF22: Maximum defrost time.
Due to a digital input: if the digital inputs End defrost circuit 1 and End defrost circuit 2 are configured
and active

If the probe is in error or not configured, defrosting may end in the two other modes (duration and digital input)

The end of defrosting is always independent for each circuit, depending on the analogue or digital end defrost inputs for
the circuit in question.

The end of defrosting starts with the circuit reversing valve switching sequence in a manner similar to that used at the start
of defrosting (St05), apart from coil drainage.
The compressors are switched off with relation to only the time set with parameter Defrost compressor/step delay
minimum Cp27.
Before the valve reverses, coil drainage runs for a period given in dF23.
In this phase the compressors stay off and the external exchanger fan of the circuit is run at maximum power.

After coil drainage, if the Reversal valve switching delay St05 is zero, the valve switches immediately and terminates the
defrost of the circuit.

The end of defrosting corresponds to the moment the valve is switched.

Note: after the end of defrosting, the compressor safety times are no longer regulated by CP27 (the compressor start
sequence of the circuits after defrosting observes normal timings).

In the case of single defrosting on two circuits, the compressors are available for temperature control only if both circuits
have stopped defrosting.
In the case of independent defrosting, the compressors of the circuit which has stopped defrosting are immediately -
available for temperature control.
The circuit for which compensation is active (if either) is controlled by the Heat temperature controller on
termination of defrosting.

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
91/240
16.2 Start defrost setpoint
In very dry and cold climates, it is good to be able to vary the reference temperature for the start of defrosting as a
function of the external temperature.
This regulator linearly compensates the defrosting start temperature or pressure with a positive or negative differential
value according to the external temperature.
The real setpoint for the start of defrosting is calculated by adding this dynamic differential to the value of parameter
dF11: Setpoint to enable interval count between defrosts.

Enabling
The regulator is enabled by setting parameter dF30 Maximum dynamic defrost differential to a value other than zero.
Furthermore, an analogue input must be configured as external temperature.

defrost Parameter Description

External temperature External temperature

Differential dF30 Maximum dynamic defrost differential

Set Point dF31 Defrost dynamic differential setpoint
dF32 Dynamic defrost differential proportional band

Note: In case of error of the external probe, the differential value is set to zero (compensation disabled).

16.3 Management of defrost alarms

For the actuation of loads during alarms, see the diagnostics chapter.

To summarise, and specifically for defrosting, if probe errors or alarms occur which lock the compressors, the start defrost
and end defrost cycles are already defined and are typically based on parameter timings.
E.g.: If during defrosting the compressors are made unavailable by alarms, defrosting will terminate when the maximum
time expires. It may terminate differently if the compressors become available again during the defrosting cycle.

16.4 Manual defrost

EnergySBW600 can force defrost manually by pressing and holding the [UP] key.
Manual defrost is possible when:
 dF00 = 1,2
 UI20 -Enable defrost function from key
 if the temperature / pressure of the external exchanger is less than the value set in parameter dF01 - Enable
maximum power for non-defrost circuit
Defrost starts in the sequence described in the section about "Start Defrost"
 the defrost LED is blinking.

End defrost takes place as described in the section about "End Defrost"

16.5 Power failure during defrost

If a power failure happens during defrosting, the procedure will be cancelled. All timings will be cancelled and restarted.

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
92/240
 17 DYNAMIC SETPOINT (FOLDER PAR/DS)
Dynamic setpoint parameters can be viewed and configured in folder dS (see User Interface and Parameters sections).
The regulator is used to modify the setpoint automatically depending on external conditions.
This modification is obtained by adding a negative or positive value to the setpoint (offset or differential) depending on:
 analogue input set as dynamic setpoint input
NOTE: the applies only for AIL3 (CL32=25) / AIE3 (CE32=25) or AIL4 (CL33=25) / AIE4 (CE33=25)
or
 External temperature

This function has two purposes: to save energy or to run the machine in extreme external temperatures.

Enabling
Dynamic setpoint
a) As a function of external temperature is enabled if:
 The dynamic setpoint activation/selection parameter dS00= 1 or 2
b) As a function of the dynamic setpoint input
 probe AI3 (analogue inputs) is configured as an dynamic setpoint input (CL32=25) / (CE32=25) or
 probe AI4 (analogue inputs) is configured as an dynamic setpoint input (CL33=25) / (CE33=25)

Note:
 these two options (a) and (b) are independent
 If the external temperature probe is in error, the associated dynamic differential is annulled (function disabled)
 The dynamic setpoint input must be a voltage (V) or current (I) input, it may not be an NTC temperature probe.
The Min and Max values of the graphs are associated with the Min (start of scale value) and Max (fullscale value)
values of the input itself. If the dynamic setpoint input is in error, the associated dynamic differential is annulled
(function disabled)

The Economy LED flashes when this function is active (if so configured: UI07=1)

17.1 Modification (decalibration) of the setpoint as a function of the dynamic setpoint input

17.1.1 Modification (decalibration) of the setpoint as a function of the dynamic setpoint input with positive
offset.
The following figure shows decalibration in both cooling and heating modes:

Modification
based on the Positive Offset
dynamic setpoint
input with positive
offset

5 6

Note
The dynamic setpoint input must be a voltage (V) or current (I) input, it may not be an NTC temperature probe, in other
words, CL02/CL03= 3,4,5 or 6
The Min and Max values of the graphs are associated with the Min (start of scale value) and Max (fullscale value) values of
the input itself, in other words
 Min = CL11 for AI3; CL13 for AI4
 Max = CL10 for AI3; CL12 for AI4

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
93/240
 17.1.2 Modification (decalibration) of the setpoint as a function of the dynamic setpoint input with negative
offset.
See above

Modification
based on the Negative Offset
dynamic setpoint
input with
negative offset

5 6

IMG INFO

17.2 Modification (decalibration) of the setpoint based on the external temperature

The setpoint can be decalibrated based on external temperature either proportionally or with a fixed decalibration; this is
set with parameter dS00 - External temperature controller dynamic differential selection
This allows enabling/selecting the temperature controller dynamic digital differential
 0 = disabled
 1 = Proportional
 2 = Fixed (by steps)

17.2.1 Modification (decalibration) of the setpoint based on the external temperature (dS00=1)

Proportional decalibration of the setpoint with positive differential (offset).

The figure shown above shows decalibration in both cooling and heating modes:

Modification Positive Offset

based on the
external
temperature with
positive offset

<IMG INFO>

Proportional decalibration of the setpoint with negative differential (offset).

See above

Modification Negative Offset

based on the
external
temperature with
negative offset

<IMG INFO>
425,25
110,15
0
2
0,05
0
-1

Cool Heat
dS01 dS02 Temperature controller dynamic differential proportional band in Cool / Heat
dS03 dS04 Maximum temperature controller dynamic differential in Cool / Heat
dS05 dS06 Temperature controller dynamic differential setpoint in Cool / Heat
Ext. Temp: External temperature

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
94/240
17.2.2 Fixed modification (decalibration) of the setpoint (dS00=2)
Differential > 0 Differential < 0
Band < 0 Band < 0

<IMG INFO>
197,3
126,35
0
<IMG INFO>

Differential > 0 Differential < 0

Band > 0 Band > 0

<IMG INFO>

Cool Heat
Temperature controller dynamic differential proportional
dS01 dS02
band in Cool / Heat
Maximum temperature controller dynamic differential in
dS03 dS04
Cool / Heat
Temperature controller dynamic differential setpoint in Cool
dS05 dS06
/ Heat
Temp Ext Air: External temperature
Offset: differential

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
95/240
 18 ADAPTIVE (FOLDER PAR/AD)
<IMG INFO>

Chillers generally contain a water accumulation tank.

23,6
27,7
1
2
79 35

The purpose of these tanks is to create sufficient thermal inertia to stop the compressor from repeatedly switching on and
off in periods in which the temperature requirements in the area to be cooled are relatively few (switching repeatedly on
and off will reduce the life time of compressors).
A water accumulator increases the thermal capacity and provides the inertia required to extend running time.
Nevertheless, water accumulation is also a substantial cost and also adds to the minimum dimensions of the machine.

Adaptive function parameters can be viewed and configured in the Ad folder (see chapters on User Interface and
Parameters).

By adjusting the setpoint and hysteresis, the Adaptive function simulates electronically the inertia of a water accumulator,
meaning it can be used less.

Enabling
Use parameter Ad00 - Select no accumulation mode
when set not equal to zero enables the function and enables selecting the amount to which the adaptive function
temperature differential is to be added or subtracted.

0 1 2 2
Accumulation Setpoint +
Ad00 Select no accumulation mode Setpoint Hysteresis
disabled hysteresis

General conditions of operation

 In Off the adaptive function is disabled.
 In Stand-by the adaptive function is disabled.
 In On the adaptive function is enabled.

MT minimum time and ET real time

Note that compressor on/off times must respect safety time delays:

The function analyses actual running time of the compressor (ET) comparing it with the preset minimum running time
(MT).

Minimum time The minimum time (MT) is set in parameter Ad06 - Reference compressor on time for adaptive accumulation
MT
Parameter Description
MT

Ad06 Reference compressor on time for accumulation offset

Real time ET Real running time (ET) is recorded automatically by the device

Type of plant ET
Single circuit
Count
2 / 4 compressors /
[first compressor on / first partialization, last resource switched off]
Segmented compressors
Double circuit Count
1 / 2 compressors / [first compressor on / first partialization, last resource switched off]
Segmented compressors Independently of the circuits
Count
Ordinary compressor
[compressor on, compressor off]

18.1 Adaptive function with setpoint modification

ET<MT example If ET<MT:

when the compressor switches off, the operating setpoint is changed to a value equal to the adaptive offset (AO)
according to the formula below:

 AO=((MT - ET)* Ad01)/10 + Ad02

Where:
Ad01 Accumulation offset constant
Ad02 Accumulation offset differential

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
96/240
Adaptive function COOLING MODE
Setpoint  ET<MT example
If the real running time (ET) is less than the minimum time(MT), each time the compressor switches off, the adaptive
modification in
offset is subtracted from the setpoint.
cooling
Cycle 0:
 Setpoint for cycle 0: SET(0) = SET (COOL)
 Hysteresis for cycle 0: HYSTERESIS (0) = HYSTERESIS (COOL)
 Compressor ON: SET (0)+HYSTERESIS (0) ---> SET (COOL) +HYSTERESIS(COOL)**
 Compressor OFF: SET (0)
Cycle 1:
 Setpoint for cycle 1: SET(1) = SET (0) - AO(1) = SET(COOL)-AO(1)
 Compressor ON: SET (0)+HYSTERESIS (0) ---> SET (COOL) +HYSTERESIS(COOL)**
 Compressor OFF: SET (0) - AO(1) = SET (COOL)** - AO(1)
Cycle 2:
 Setpoint for cycle 2: SET(2) = SET (1) - AO(2)
 Compressor ON: SET (0)+HYSTERESIS (0) ---> SET (COOL) +HYSTERESIS(COOL)**
 Compressor OFF: SET (0) - AO(2) = SET (COOL)** - AO(2)
…

 ET>MT example
See differential regression

Adaptive function HEATING MODE

Modification of Same as heating example. The offset is ADDED to the setpoint:
 SET(0) = SET (HEAT)
setpoint in heating
 SET(1) = SET(HEAT)+AO(1)
 SET(2) = SET(HEAT)+AO(2)
…

Note that in both modes, the compressor on temperature is the same for each operating cycle, even when the adaptive
function is activated.
This extends the zone between the setpoint and on temperatures, reducing the number of times the compressor switches
on and off and thereby reducing any overlap with safety times.

Cooling mode
Adaptive function with setpoint modification (Ad00=0) Setpoint modification after calculation of AO1

<IMG INFO>
212,7
143,65
0
2
-4,95
-142,9
-1

SET1 = SET(1), SET2=SET(2)

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
97/240
 18.2 Adaptive function with hysteresis modification
Adaptive function with hysteresis modification (Ad00=1) Hysteresis modification after calculation of AO1

IMG INFO

18.3 Adaptive function with setpoint and hysteresis modification

Adaptive function with setpoint and hysteresis Setpoint and hysteresis modification after calculation of
modification (Ad01=2) AO1

<IMG INFO>

<IMG INFO>
214,6
158,45
0
2

18.4 Setpoint regression

ETMT example If ET  MT:

If the cycle time is long enough (and greater than MT), regression of the real setpoint occurs: for each interval of Ad05
(from the start of the cycle), the setpoint is modified by the value set in Ad02.

 in cooling, the setpoint (real for cycle N) is increased:

after Ad05: SET(N) + Ad02
after 2*Ad05: SET(N) + 2*Ad02
and so on until the maximum value (setpoint / hysteresis)

 in heating, the setpoint is reduced as above, down to the minimum value (setpoint / hysteresis)

Hence for long cycle times, the "adaptive" function balances out making the cycle times compatible with compressor
timings.

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
98/240
 Cooling mode
Setpoint regression

Parameter Description Parameter

See
Ad01 Accumulation offset constant Modify setpoint offset calculation
formula
See
Modify setpoint offset calculation
Ad02 Accumulation offset differential formula
See
Setpoint regression
See
Ad03 Block accumulation offset setpoint in cooling mode
Protection in cooling mode
See
Ad04 Block accumulation offset setpoint in heating mode
Protection in heating mode

Ad05 Compressor on time for accumulation offset regression See setpoint regression

Ad06 Reference compressor on time for accumulation offset See MT

18.5 Protection
COOL
If the outlet temperature < Ad03 during general cycle n, the controller performs the following actions:
Switches off the compressor (or compressors)
Clears the adaptive offset AO(n) = 0; the next cycle recommences with the original setpoint and hysteresis

This adjustment can be considered a precursor of the antifreeze alarm (the cycle stops without generating an alarm)
should the adaptive function lead to a very low real setpoint.
We recommend you set Ad03 > AL12 Internal circuit antifreeze alarm regulator setpoint

HEAT
If the outlet temperature > Ad04 during general cycle n, the controller performs the following actions:
Switches off the compressor (or compressors)
Clears the adaptive offset AO(n) = 0; the next cycle recommences with the original setpoint and hysteresis
This adjustment can be considered a precursor of the high pressure alarm (the cycle stops without generating an alarm)
should the adaptive function lead to a very high real setpoint.

To set Ad06, we recommend you refer to the high pressure safety devices in use (pressure switch configuration, type of
refrigerant used, and so on)

Note: if the plant is of the two circuit type and two water temperature sensors are configured on circuit 1 and 2 primary
output, consider the minimum of the two values.

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
99/240
 19 ANTIFREEZE PARAMETERS WITH HEAT PUMP (FOLDER PAR/AF) - ANTIFREEZE

Anti-freeze parameters can be viewed and configured in folder AF (see User Interface and Parameters chapters).

The anti-freeze function with heat pump serves to prevent breakdowns due to internal heat exchanger icing (typically in
machines with water-type internal heat exchangers).
SB600 enables control of machines with one or two cooling circuits and one or two internal heat exchangers.
The anti-freeze function with heat pump is controlled separately for each cooling circuit.

The function is always active in any machine operating state, i.e. cooling, heating and standby.
Anti-freeze function with heat pump is enabled
via parameter (AF00 - Select antifreeze probe with circuit 1 heat pump ≠ 0)
via parameter (AF01 - Select antifreeze probe with circuit 2 heat pump ≠ 0)

The Heating LED flashes when this function is active.

<IMG INFO>
42,9
29,75
1
2
51
28 35

Mode change is disabled when this function is enabled.

Defrosting is disabled when this function is enabled.

Analogue inputs for anti-freeze function with heat pump

The analogue inputs used for regulation are selected distinctly for each cooling circuit, using parameters
AF00 - Select antifreeze probe with circuit 1 heat pump
AF01 - Select antifreeze probe with circuit 2 heat pump
Note: For machines with a single circuit AF01 - Select antifreeze probe with circuit 2 heat pump must be set = 0.

Value AF00 / AF01 Probe

0 No probe (anti-freeze function with heat pump disabled)
1 Internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature
2 Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature
3 Circuit 1 internal exchanger water outlet temperature
4 Circuit 2 internal exchanger water outlet temperature
5 Circuit 1 and 2 internal exchanger water outlet minimum temperature

General conditions of operation

In Off the anti-freeze function with heat pump is disabled.
In Stand-by the anti-freeze function with heat pump is enabled, as in On.
In On, further to the principal regulation specified in the following paragraphs, the following situation (with priority over
the principal regulation itself) may occur: anti-freeze function with heat pump inhibited during defrosts.

NOTE:
The valve reverses with a delay ST05 - Reversal valve switching delay.
Furthermore, during the anti-freeze phase, the compressors run at maximum power and are turned off and on with
reference only to the delay CP27 - Defrost compressor step/delay minimum

Heat pump activation

The function is enabled (°) if the temperature measured
Circuit 1: by the anti-freeze with heat pump probe for circuit 1 < AF02 - Anti-freeze regulator setpoint with heat
pump
Circuit 2: by the anti-freeze with heat pump probe for circuit 2 < AF02 - Anti-freeze regulator setpoint with heat
pump

(°) the heat pump is activated if previously switched off; if previously activated, it remains active

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
100/240
Circuit 1 Circuit 2

<IMG INFO>
<IMG INFO>
219,9
219
128,45
128,35
0
0
2
2
0,75
-5 15
127 75

Heat Pump = pompa di calore Heat Pump = pompa di calore

Anti-freeze probe Anti-freeze probe
anti-freeze function heat pump probe for circuit 1 (AF00) anti-freeze function heat pump probe for circuit 2 (AF01)

Parameter Description
AF02 Anti-freeze regulator setpoint with heat pump
AF03 Anti-freeze regulator hysteresis with heat pump
Regulator probe AF01 (circuit 1) / AF02 (Circuit 2)

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
101/240
20 SANITARY WATER AND ANTI-LEGIONNAIRE'S DISEASE (FOLDER PAR/AS)

Small/medium installations (typically residential installations) require “integrated” management of sanitary water (also
referred to as ACS) by means of the heat pump system (for heating and cooling the interior environment).
In practice, this involves controlling the sanitary water temperature (ACS temperature) in a dedicated accumulator.

The switch between 'normal' mode (heating/cooling) and ACS mode can occur in 2 ways, depending on the type of
system:
 With ACS Valve: the flow will be diverted from the heating/cooling circuit to the ACS accumulator
 With ACS Pump: the heating/cooling circuit pump will be switched off and the ACS accumulator pump switched
on

Type of system
The type of system is configured using parameter AS00 - Select ACS mode

Enabling
When parameter AS00 - Select ACS mode is different from zero, the regulator is enabled.
The possible values of parameter AS00 are:
 0 = Disabled
 1 = Enabled only heat pump for sanitary water system with sanitary water valve
 2 = Enabled only sanitary water heater
 3 = Enabled sanitary water heat pump and heater system with sanitary water valve
 4 = Enabled only heat pump for sanitary water system with sanitary water pump
 5 = Enabled only sanitary water heater
 6 = Enabled sanitary water heat pump and heater system with sanitary water pump

Refer also to the following table where the AS00 values are indicated in relation to the type of system used

Par. Description value

0 1 or 4 2 or 5 3 or 6
Heat pump
only sanitary water
Select Heat pump +
Enabling AS00 disabled heater
ACS mode sanitary
water heater

AS00 = 1 system AS00 = 3

Sanitary water with sanitary system with
valve water valve sanitary
water valve
system AS00 = 6
AS00 = 4 system
system with
Sanitary water with sanitary
sanitary
pump water pump
water pump

Notes.
 The term heat pump actually denotes the entire machine (e.g. including the integrated internal exchanger
heaters, if any)
 Since the behaviour of the sanitary water heater is independent from the type of system, the values 2 and 5
determine the same device behaviour.
 When parameters Anti-legionnaire's disease event duration, Monday – Tuesday - etc. AS25, AS26… are different
from zero (at least one must be) the Anti-legionnaire's disease function is enabled .Furthermore the RTC must
be present and enabled for operation (it must not be faulty and/or not set, for further details refer to the
specific alarms)

General conditions of operation

 In Off the regulator is switched off immediately and continuously.
 In Standby the regulator is on, with exclusive reference to activation of the ACS antifreeze heater.
 In On, in addition to the main control specified in subsequent paragraphs, the following situations are also
possible (with priority given to the main control itself):
 If there is an error in the sanitary water temperature sensor, the compressor associated with that sensor is
disabled
 The ACS valve / pump is immediately switched off in the event of valve / pump shutdown alarms
 The ACS heater is immediately switched off in the event of heater shutdown alarms
 On start-up of SBW600 (power on or reboot from OFF or Stdby), ACS mode is inhibited for 120 seconds in
order to prevent multiple settings competing on start-up, with impulsive activations of the loads (e.g.
internal pump).

Sanitary Water Setpoint

Regulation occurs on the actual ACS Setpoint.

The Actual Setpoint is determined by the following contributing factors:
 At start-up of the instrument, the Sanitary Water Setpoint = AS01 - ACS setpoint
 If Time Bands are active (tE00 - Enable time band operation = 1) the Sanitary Water Setpoint will be
determined by the ACS Set Point of the corresponding event / profile (see Time Bands section (folder PAr/tE))
 If AS11 - ACS set point dynamic constant is different from zero then the Dynamic ACS Setpoint function is
activated on the Sanitary Water Setpoint

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
102/240
20.1 Sanitary Water in HEAT mode
Sanitary water consent
In Sanitary Water mode, the machine's operation is governed by the request/consent concept. Consent may be given
(with resulting switchover from normal mode to the mode determined by the Sanitary Water regulator) if and only if all of
the following conditions are satisfied:
 Sanitary Water Setpoint not reached (a function of the temperature of the ACS accumulator – See diagram A
 the time AS10 - ACS minimum deactivation/activation time has elapsed
 NO Anti-Legionnaire's Disease period is in progress*
*example: Saturday 21.30. AS40 different from 0; AS41 = 22, AS42 = 0

This request, which was described above, takes priority over the "normal" ACS heating request.

Diagram A
Sanitary water CONSENT
ACS heating Actual ACS
setpoint

ON

OFF

AS04 Sanitary water

temperature

Par. Description
AS04 ACS hysteresis
AS01 ACS setpoint
Note: using the parameters:
AS02 - ACS minimum setpoint
AS02-AS03
AS03 - ACS maximum setpoint
It is possible to limit the maximum and minimum configuration values of AS01
Setpoint Actual ACS Setpoint
Control sensor
Sanitary water temperature

Regulation, machine in
HEAT
In the event of a sanitary water heating request:
 the machine remains in Heat Pump mode (and maintains the same control sensor that it uses in normal Heat
mode) but modifies the control setpoint from actual Heat Setpoint to AS01 -ACS Setpoint (ACS) with AS05 -
ACS disengage setpoint differential
 the ACS valve / pump is activated with the following actions:
o machine with ACS valve: the ACS valve is activated without switching off the internal pump
o machine with ACS pump: the ACS pump is activated at the same time as the internal pump is
switched off; to prevent flow switch alarms, it is necessary to re-enter the time AL14 - Flow switch
alarm bypass

ACS heater: see corresponding paragraph

ACS disengage
Once the machine has been "disengaged" to heat the sanitary water for Anti-Legionnaire's disease, it will continue to do so
until at least one of the following conditions is satisfied:
 tACS accumulator sensor reaches the actual ACS setpoint - see figure B
 the Heat control sensor (which typically is not the ACS accumulator sensor) reaches a certain value, equal to the
AS01 -ACS Setpoint (ACS) plus a specifiable differential, which takes account of the temperature difference that
may exist between the ACS accumulator and the position of the Heat control sensor, parameter AS05 - see
figure C
 the time set using parameter AS09 - ACS maximum activation time has elapsed
 an Anti-Legionnaire's Disease period is starting

When normal mode and the actual Heat (or Cool) setpoint are restored, except in the event of request/consent for
machine operation in ACS for Anti-Legionnaire's Disease – see corresponding paragraph
All considerations regarding the actions adopted during switchovers apply.
If normal operating mode is restored, the ACS valve / pump is switched off with the following actions:
 machine with ACS valve: the ACS valve is switched off, the internal pump will continue to function if required
for normal operating mode
 machine with ACS pump: the internal pump is activated at the same time as the ACS pump is deactivated; to
prevent flow switch alarms, it is necessary to re-enter the time AL14 - Flow switch alarm bypass

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
103/240
 Diagram B
sanitary water DISENGAGE
SETPOINT REACHED
ACS heating
Actual ACS
setpoint

ON

OFF

Sanitary water
temperature

Diagram C
sanitary water DISENGAGE
ACS
Heating

AS01
ON

OFF
AS05 AIn

Diagram Par. Description

Note: using the parameters:
AS02 - ACS minimum setpoint
AS02-AS03 AS03 - ACS maximum setpoint
It is possible to limit the maximum and minimum configuration values
of AS01
B Setpoint Actual ACS Setpoint
Control sensor
B Sanitary water temperature
C AS01 ACS Setpoint
C AS05 ACS disengage setpoint differential
Control sensor
C HEAT control sensor
AIn

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
104/240
20.1.1 Sanitary water heater in Heat/Cool mode *
* behaviour independent from mode
Sanitary water heat regulation occurs on the actual ACS setpoint, with
 fixed differential AS07 - ACS heater differential
 hysteresis AS06 - ACS heater hysteresis, as shown in the figure
The analogue input used for regulation is exclusively the sanitary water temperature
Once enabled, the ACS heater is independent (setpoint differential aside, it does not influence and is not influenced by the
machine's other regulators, and the concepts relating to ACS consent do not apply to it)

Differential AS07 is cancelled if the unit is in Heat Pump Lock

ACS heater
ACS heater

Actual setpoint - AS07

ON

OFF
Sanitary water
AS06 temperature
IMG INFO

Par. Description
AS06 ACS heater hysteresis
AS07 ACS heater differential
Setpoint Actual Setpoint – AS07
Control sensor Sanitary water temperature

20.2 Sanitary Water, Cool mode

In the event of an ACS heating request, the machine switches temporarily from Chiller to Heat Pump (for Heat Pump
operation see HEAT Mode), and remains in this mode until it is "disengaged", when normal Cool mode is restored, with
actual Cool Setpoint.
In this case, special attention must be paid to the switchovers, since both the reversal valve (already discussed in the
corresponding section) and the ACS valve / pump must respect the times indicated below:

Diagram Par. Mode Change

A St05 different COOL - ACS

B from 0 ACS - COOL
C COOL - ACS
St05 = 0
D ACS - COOL

Diagram A
CP20

CP24 CP23

St05 St05
ON
Compressor 2 Compressor 2
OFF

ON
Compressor 1 Compressor 1
OFF

ON
OFF Reversal valve

ON
Pumps switch ACS valve
OFF
time

Par. Description
St05 different from 0 Reversal valve switching delay
CP20 Minimum off/on for same compressor
CP23 Minimum on/on time for same compressor

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
105/240
 Par. Description
CP24 Minimum off/off time for different compressors

The switchover occurs with the following measures:

 machine with ACS valve: the ACS valve is activated after the time St05 - Reversal valve switching delay from
the valve switchover (to switch-on of the first compressor, unless other safety timings further delay said
compressor), without switching off the internal pump. If in normal mode the compressors are switched off, the
internal exchanger water pump can also be switched off (e.g. operation enabled on request): in this case the
pump will switch on at the same time as the ACS mode is activated, resulting in the delayed switch-on of the
compressors due to the need for pre-pumping.
 machine with ACS pump: the ACS pump is activated after the time St05 - Reversal valve switching delay
from the valve switchover (to switch-on of the first compressor, unless other safety timings further delay said
compressor): the internal pump is switched off at the same time; to prevent flow switch alarms it is necessary to
re-enter the time AL14 - Flow switch alarm bypass

Diagram B
CP20

CP24 CP23

St05 St05
ON
Compressor 2 Compressor 2
OFF

ON
Compressor 1 Compressor 1
OFF

ON
OFF Reversal valve

ON
Pumps switch ACS valve
OFF
time

Par. Description
St05 different from 0 Reversal valve switching delay
CP20 Minimum off/on for same compressor
CP23 Minimum on/on time for same compressor
CP24 Minimum off/off time for different compressors

The switchover occurs with the following actions:

 machine with ACS valve: the ACS valve is deactivated after the time St05 - Reversal valve switching delay
from the valve switchover (to switch-on of the first compressor, unless other safety timings further delay said
compressor), without switching off the internal pump (this water pump may be switched off according to
normal mode logic (e.g. operation enabled on request and compressors off).
 machine with ACS pump:: the internal exchange pump is activated after the time St05 - Reversal valve
switching delay from the valve switchover (to switch-on of the first compressor, unless other safety timings
further delay said compressor), the ACS is switched off at the same time; to prevent flow switch alarms it is
necessary to reset the time AL14 - Flow switch alarm bypass.

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
106/240
 Diagram C

ON
Compressor 2
OFF

ON
Compressor 1
OFF

ON
OFF Reversal valve

ON
Pumps switch ACS valve
OFF
time
<IMG INFO>

Diagram D

ON
Compressor 2
OFF

ON
Compressor 1
OFF

ON
OFF Reversal valve

ON
Pumps switch ACS valve
OFF
time
<IMG INFO>

Par. Description
St05 = 0 Reversal valve switching delay

20.2.1 Dynamic ACS setpoint

The Dynamic ACS Setpoint function consists of modifying the actual ACS setpoint according to the system's thermal
efficiency.
In fact, it may occur that (e.g. due to incorrect dimensioning of the system) the machine never manages to reach the
actual ACS setpoint.
Based on previous considerations, in this case the machine would exit ACS mode either due to timeout expired (AS09 -
ACS maximum activation time) or due to Heat control setpoint reached (AS01 + AS05).

The Dynamic ACS Setpoint function calculates and updates the maximum sanitary water temperature which the system can
achieve under those particular conditions. In this way, the system is in any case "guaranteed" to exit from ACS mode due
to attainment of the ACS Setpoint.

Enabling
This function is enabled by setting parameter AS11 - ACS setpoint dynamic constant to a value different from zero.
You must also configure all of the following analogue inputs as:
 water delivery temperature.
 water return temperature.
 ACS temperature

The Dynamic ACS Setpoint function will calculate the new ACS setpoint as the minimum value between
 Actual Setpoint
 (*) ACS maximum water temperature achievable as a function of the system
Where (*) is a function of the parameters
AS11 - ACS setpoint dynamic constant
AS12 - ACS system maximum temperature

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
107/240
20.3 Sanitary water regulation, AS mode
During operation in Heat or Cool mode, the controller/machine (heat pump) meet ACS (or ACS for AL) heating needs if
there is a request and provided the necessary conditions are met, otherwise they meet system needs (Heat or Cool).

AS mode is useful in the event that (e.g. due to the current season or the type of system) it is not necessary to meet
system needs. In other words in AS mode, the controller/machine (heat pump) are only activated if there is a need for ACS
(or ACS for AL) heating, according to the same process as that described previously, otherwise there is no actuation.

The above indications also apply to defrost (must be managed as normal!).

20.4 Anti-Legionnaire's Disease

The Anti-Legionnaire's Disease function eliminates Legionnaire's disease bacteria, which reside in water sources; these
bacteria are typically destroyed if the water temperature rises above 60°C for a certain period of time.

Anti-Legionnaire's Disease period

An anti-legionnaire's disease period can be activated on each day of the week with a configurable start time and duration:

Duration of
Event (start)
Description event Event (start)
hour
(0= disabled) minutes Par.
Par.
Par.
day 1 (Monday) AS25 AS26 AS27
day 2 (Tuesday) AS28 AS29 AS30
day 3 (Wednesday) AS31 AS32 AS33
day 4 (Thursday) AS34 AS35 AS36
day 5 (Friday) AS37 AS38 AS39
day 6 (Saturday) AS40 AS41 AS42
day 7 (Sunday) AS43 AS44 AS45

Note.
The Anti-Legionnaire's disease period (duration of event) must be of suitable length, otherwise there is the risk that AS20 -
ACS setpoint for anti-legionnaire's disease is never reached. If so an Er48 Anti-legionnaires alarm will raise up. The
automatic alarm reset when the setpoint will be reached.

ACS setpoint for anti-legionnaire's disease

Regulation always occurs on the ACS setpoint for anti-legionnaire's disease AS20

ACS consent for anti-legionnaire's disease

In the same way as for the "normal" ACS regulator, the request/consent concept applies to machine operation in ACS
for Anti-Legionnaire's Disease. Consent may be given (with resulting switchover from normal mode, or from ACS mode,
to the mode determined by the ACS regulator for Anti-Legionnaire's disease) if and only if all of the follow conditions are
satisfied:
 Anti-Legionnaire's disease period in progress*
*example: Saturday 22.30. AS40 different from 0; AS41 = 22, AS42 = 0
 ACS setpoint for Anti-Legionnaire's Disease not reached (a function of the temperature of the ACS accumulator
– See diagram A
 the time AS23 - ACS minimum deactivation/activation time for anti-legionnaire's disease has elapsed

This request, which was described above, takes priority over the "normal" ACS heating request.

Diagram A
Anti- Legionnaire's disease CONSENT
ACS heating for
Anti-Legionnaire's
Disease AS20

ON

OFF

AS04 Sanitary water

temperature

Par. Description
AS04 ACS hysteresis
AS20 ACS setpoint for anti-legionnaire's disease
AS21-AS22 Note: with the parameters :

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
108/240
 AS21 - Minimum ACS setpoint for anti-legionnaire's disease
AS22 - Maximum ACS setpoint for anti-legionnaire's disease
It is possible to limit the maximum and minimum configuration values of AS20
Control sensor
ACS water temperature

Notes
Consent is not subject to compliance with safety times*, since the aim is to bring the ACS to the temperature specified for
Anti-Legionnaire's Disease, with priority over everything else.
*times controlled by defining Anti-Legionnaire's disease periods using parameters AS25...AS45
Typically AS20 - ACS setpoint for anti-legionnaire's disease > AS01 - ACS setpoint which means that the machine will
switch to managing ACS heating for Anti-Legionnaire's Disease as soon as the Anti-Legionnaire's Disease period starts (all
the more so if the machine was in Cool mode).

Regulation
HEAT
the machine operates in much the same way as for the ACS case, except that a different setpoint is adopted: in the event
of a request for ACS heating for Anti-Legionnaire's disease:
 the machine remains in Heat Pump mode (and maintains the same control sensor that it uses in normal Heat
mode) but modifies the control setpoint from Actual Heat Setpoint to AS20 - ACS setpoint for anti-
legionnaire's disease with the same AS05 - ACS disengage setpoint differential
 the ACS valve / pump is activated (or remains active) with the same actions as those indicated in the ACS case.

COOL
the machine operates in a similar way, it must switch from chiller to PdC and vice versa.
All considerations made with regard to actions adopted during switchovers apply.

ACS Disengage for Anti-Legionnaire's Disease

Once the machine has been "engaged" to heat sanitary water for Anti-Legionnaire's disease, it will continue to do so until
at least one of the following conditions is satisfied:
 the ACS accumulator sensor reaches the ACS setpoint for Anti-Legionnaire's disease, parameter AS20 - see
figure B
 the Heat control sensor (which typically is not the ACS accumulator sensor) will reach a certain value, equal to
the ACS Setpoint for Anti-Legionnaire's Disease plus a specifiable differential, which takes account of the
temperature difference that may exist between the ACS accumulator and the position of the Heat control
sensor, parameter AS05 - see figure C
 the Anti-Legionnaire's Disease period is finished

when normal mode and the actual Heat (or Cool) setpoint are restored, except in the event of request/consent for
machine operation in ACS mode, for which the machine's behaviour has already been described in detail.
All considerations made with regard to actions adopted during switchovers apply.

Note. Once the request for ACS heating for Anti-Legionnaire's Disease is exhausted, typically the conditions for having an
ACS heating request are not satisfied, but this may occur if the Anti-Legionnaire's Disease period has a limited duration. In
which case, normal mode will not be restored but the machine will operate in ACS mode, for which the machine's
behaviour has already been described in detail.

Diagram B
Anti-Legionnaire's Disease
DISENGAGE
SETPOINT REACHED
ACS heating for
Anti-Legionnaire's
Disease AS20

ON

OFF

Sanitary water
temperature

Diagram C
Anti-Legionnaire's Disease
DISENGAGE

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
109/240
 ACS heating for
Anti-Legionnaire's
Disease AS20

ON

OFF
AS05 AIn
IMG INFO

Diagram Par. Description

C AS05 ACS disengage setpoint differential
B-C AS20 ACS setpoint for anti-legionnaire's disease
Note: with the parameters :
AS21 - Minimum ACS setpoint for anti-legionnaire's disease
B-C AS21-AS22 AS22 - Maximum ACS setpoint for anti-legionnaire's disease
it is possible to limit the maximum and minimum configuration values
of AS20
Control sensor
B Sanitary water temperature
Aln
C HEAT control sensor
Control sensor

Note
Diagram C Case:: if the Heat control sensor is disengaged (e.g. the sanitary water did not achieve the Anti-Legionnaire's
Disease setpoint), the conditions for a new ACS consent for Anti-Legionnaire's Disease may immediately exist.
In order to prevent the machine fluctuating between normal mode and ACS for Anti-Legionnaire's Disease mode, there
must be a minimum ACS OFF-ON safety time for Anti-legionnaire's disease defined by parameter AS23 - ACS minimum
deactivation/activation time for anti-legionnaire's disease

20.4.1 ACS Heater for Anti-Legionnaire's Disease

The ACS heater is regulated in the same way as described for ACS heating, except that:
 the setpoint adopted is AS20 - ACS setpoint for anti-legionnaire's disease

Differential AS07 is cancelled if the unit is in Heat Pump Lock

ACS Heater for Anti-Legionnaire's Disease

ACS heater

AS20 - AS07

ON

OFF
Sanitary water
AS06 temperature
<IMG INFO>

Par. Description
AS06 ACS heater hysteresis (for anti-legionnaire's disease)
AS07 ACS heater differential
AS20 ACS setpoint for anti-legionnaire's disease
Control sensor ACS water temperature

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
110/240
 20.5 Sanitary Water Antifreeze
In specific situations (e.g. machine in standby) it is necessary to guard against the risk of the ACS water freezing.
For this purpose, only the ACS heater (which must be present*) is used and the machine's operation mode is not modified
(e.g. if in Cool, it remains in Cool).

* at least one digital input must be configured as ACS Electrical Heater by means of parameters CL90…CL97 / CL80-CL81
if digital / CL61…CL63 if digital = ±28.

The heater is regulated on parameter AS08 - ACS antifreeze setpoint, as shown in the figure below. The analogue input
used for regulation is exclusively the sanitary water temperature

Antifreeze for ACS water

ACS heater

AS08

ON

OFF
Sanitary water
AS04 temperature
IMG INFO

Par. Description
AS04 ACS hysteresis
AS08 ACS antifreeze setpoint
Control sensor Sanitary water temperature

21 BLOCK HEAT PUMP (FOLDER PAR/HP)

The block heat pump function allows energy savings by disabling the heat pump in specific operating conditions, such as:
 when the installation is not working efficiently due to the external temperature (Block heat pump by external
temperature)
 when on account of the particular electricity supply agreement it would be useful to disable the heat pump at
peak charge times (Block heat pump with digital input)

Block heat pump 1 and 2 parameters table

Differential
Parameter
External Setpoint
Parameter Description (analogue
temperature External
input)
Temperature
Block 1
HP00 Select heat pump 1 lock probe X (=1) x
HP01 Block heat pump 1 setpoint x x
HP02 Block heat pump 1 hysteresis x x
HP03 Heat pump 1 lock maximum dynamic differential x
HP04 Block heat pump 1 dynamic differential setpoint x
Block heat pump 1 dynamic differential proportional
HP05 x
band
Block 2
HP10 Select probe for block heat pump 2 X (=1) x
HP11 Block heat pump 2 setpoint x x
HP12 Block heat pump 2 hysteresis x x

If the external temperature is too low, heat pump performance will not be acceptable; the following are thus available:

Block heat pump Block heat pump based on external temperature

based on external  set a set point (HP01 / HP11) below which the heat pump will be disabled.
 Set the parameters HP00 / HP10 Select probe for block heat pump 1 / 2 = 1
temperature

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
111/240
Block heat pump Block heat pump based on regulation temperature
based on  set a set point (HP01 / HP11) above which the heat pump will be disabled.
 Set the parameters HP00 / HP10 Select probe for block heat pump 1 / 2 > 1
regulation
temperature Value Probe Mode
0 No probe (block pump disabled) -
1 External temperature Heating
2 Internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature Cooling
3 Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature Cooling
4 Circuit 1 and 2 internal exchanger water outlet average temperature Cooling
5 Recovery exchanger inlet water temperature Cooling
(or external exchanger)
6 Recovery exchanger water outlet temperature Cooling
(or external exchanger)
7 Circuit 1 and 2 external exchanger average temperature Cooling

Note: The Economy LED illuminates with a steady light on the display to indicate heat pump lock (set UI07 -
Configuration of Economy LED = 2)

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
112/240
Block heat pump based on external temperature Block heat pump based on regulation temperature
Circuit 1 / Circuit 2 Circuit 1 / Circuit 2

IMG INFO

Heat Pump = pompa di calore Heat Pump = pompa di calore

Heat Pump Heat pump state

T ext External temperature
AIn Probe selected by parameter

21.1.1 Block heat pump 1 - setpoint

It is useful to be able to vary the block heat pump temperature according to the external temperature.
This regulator linearly compensates the setpoint for the block heat pump function with a positive or negative differential
value according to the external temperature.
The real setpoint for the block function is calculated by adding this dynamic differential to the value of parameter
HP01 - Block heat pump 1 setpoint

Enabling
The regulator is enabled by setting parameter HP03 - Heat pump 1 lock maximum dynamic differential ≠ 0.
Furthermore, an analogue input must be configured as external temperature.

Positive offset HP03>0 Negative offset HP03<0

<IMG INFO>
202,9
81,95 <IMG INFO>
0 209,9
2 78,35
0,25 0
-83,25 2
-1

Heat Pump = pompa di calore Heat Pump = pompa di calore

21.1.2 Block heat pump from digital input

If a digital input is configured as “Block heat pump” or CL40..CL45 / CL50..CL54=±20 , then when it is activated, the heat
pump will be deactivated.

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
113/240
22 POWER LIMITATION (FOLDER PAR/PL)
Power limitation parameters can be viewed and set in folder PL (see User Interface and Parameters chapters)

22.1 Operating modes

The power limitation function:
 protects the machine from high and low temperature situations when used with the temperature control probe;
 protects the machine from high pressure situations, when used with the high pressure probe;
 protects the machine from low pressure situations, when used with the low pressure probe;
 prevents the machine from running at a low efficiency level, when used with the external temperature.

Enabling
 Power limitation on external temperature * is enabled by parameter (PL00 - Proportional band for power
limitation on external temperature ≠ 0)
 Power limitation on temperature * is enabled by parameter (PL10 - Proportional band for power limitation on
water/air temperature ≠ 0)
 Power limitation on pressure ** is enabled by parameter (PL20 - Proportional band for power limitation on
pressure ≠ 0)

* The external temperature and temperature power limitation act on the power steps independently of the circuits.
** In the case of machines with two circuits, power limitation is controlled on each circuit separately, as a function of their
parameters.

General conditions of operation

Function active in Cool/Heat mode.
1. In Off the power limitation function is disabled.
2. In Standby the power limitation function is disabled.
3. In On power limitation acts by switching off the power steps in observance of the set safety timings. The same
applies to their turning back on when returning from limitation.
Note: when limitation is active, no special message indicates this on the display
Note: if the control input is not configured or in error, the individual power limitation controllers are disabled.
Apart from probe errors, in this situation there is no special indication on the display

Parameter Parameter Description See diagram

COOL HEAT COOL
HEAT
Power limitation on external temperature proportional band
PL00
External SETPOINT. COOL temperature
External temperature setpoint for power limitation in Cool/Heat.
PL01 PL02 A A’ B B’
External SETPOINT. HEAT temperature
PL11 Select probe for power limitation on water/air temperature See table, parameter PL11
High water temperature setpoint for power limitation
PL12 C
PL12 High temperature SETPOINT
Low water temperature setpoint for power limitation
PL13 D
Low temperature SETPOINT
PL20 Power limitation on pressure proportional band
High pressure setpoint for power limitation
PL21 E E’ E’’
High Pressure SETPOINT
Low pressure setpoint for power limitation
PL22 F F’ F’’
Low Pressure SETPOINT

Table, parameter PL11

Value Probe
0 No probe (regulator disabled)
1 Internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature
2 Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature
3 Circuit 1 and 2 internal exchanger water outlet average temperature
4 Recovery (or external) exchanger inlet water temperature
5 Recovery (or external) exchanger water outlet temperature
6 Circuit 1 and 2 external exchanger average temperature

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
114/240
Power limitation - 2 compressors

Diagrams A’ B’ E’ E’’ F’ F’’ represent the inhibition/enabling of two power steps (two compressor machine or power stage
compressor);
The pressure or temperature interval between inhibition/enabling of one step and the next depends on the proportional
band and the number of resources present in the circuit.
The switching on/off of steps respects the operating logic set

Power limitation - 4 compressors

The external temperature and temperature power limitation act on the power steps independently of the circuits.

22.2 Power limitation - by external temperature (Cool and Heat)

COOL HEAT
Diagram A Diagram B
for high external temperature for low external temperature PL02 = External SET
PL01 = External SET POINT COOL temperature POINT HEAT temperature
Total of 4 steps
Power Power PL02
Reduction Reduction
SET POINT
PL01 Ext. Temp. HEAT
SET POINT
Ext. Temp. COOL
Step 4
Step 4

Step 3
Step 3

Step 2
Step 2

Step 1
Step 1

Ext. Temp

Ext. Temp
PL00

PL00
IMG INFO

NOTE: “POWER REDUCTION” INDICATES THE POWER STEPS TO BE CUT OUT

Diagram A Diagram B
Total of 2 steps
Power
Reduction
Power
PL01 Reduction
SET POINT
Ext. Temp. COOL
Step 2
Step 2

PL02
SET POINT
Ext. Temp. HEAT
Step 1
Step 1

Ext. Temp
Ext. Temp
PL00

<IMG INFO>
PL00

NOTE: “POWER REDUCTION” INDICATES THE POWER STEPS TO BE CUT OUT

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
115/240
22.3 Power limitation - by temperature (Cool and Heat)

Example of power limitation on temperature in a 4 step machine,

Diagram C Diagram D
for high temperature on the control probe for low temperature on the control probe
(Cool and Heat) (Cool and Heat)
PL12 High temperature SETPOINT PL13 Low temperature SETPOINT
Power Power PL13
Reduction Redcuction
SET POINT
PL12 Low.Temp
SET POINT
HIGH temp.
Step 4 Step 4

Step 3
Step 3

Step 2
Step 2

Step 1
Step 1

Low.Temp
High temp.
PL10
PL10 <IMG INFO>
214,2
167 05
<IMG INFO>
209,6
174,25
0
2
-5,05

NOTE: “POWER REDUCTION” INDICATES THE POWER STEPS TO BE CUT OUT

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
116/240
22.4 Power limitation - by high pressure probe (Cool and Heat)
Example of power limitation on high pressure in a 4 step/1 circuit machine

Diagram E
on high pressure probe (Cool and Heat)
PL21 = High Pressure SETPOINT
Power
Reduction
PL21
SET POINT
HIGH Pressure
Step 4

Step 3

Step 2

Step 1

High Pressure.

PL20
IMG INFO

NOTE: “POWER REDUCTION” INDICATES THE POWER STEPS TO

BE CUT OUT

Example of power limitation on high pressure in a 2 step/2 circuit machine

Diagram E' Diagram E''

on high pressure probe (Cool and Heat) on high pressure probe (Cool and Heat)
PL21 = High Pressure SETPOINT PL21 = High Pressure SETPOINT
Steps to cut out on circuit 1 Steps to cut out on circuit 2
Power Power
Reduction Reduction

PL21 PL21
SET POINT SET POINT
High Pressure High Pressure

Step 2 Step 2

Step 1 Step 1

AI HIGH PRESSURE AI HIGH PRESSURE

PL20 <IMG INFO>

PL20
214,2
<IMG INFO> 144
214,6

NOTE: “POWER REDUCTION” INDICATES THE POWER NOTE: “POWER REDUCTION” INDICATES THE POWER
STEPS TO BE CUT OUT ON CIRCUIT 1 STEPS TO BE CUT OUT ON CIRCUIT 2
HIGH PRESSURE = high pressure input circuit 1 HIGH PRESSURE = high pressure input circuit 2

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
117/240
22.5 Power limitation - by low pressure probe (Cool and Heat)
Example of power limitation on low pressure in a 4 step/1 circuit machine

Diagram F
on low pressure probe (Cool and Heat)
PL22 Low Pressure SETPOINT

Power PL22
Reduction
SET POINT
Low Pressure

Step 4

Step 3

Step 2

Step 1

Low Pressure

PL20
<IMG INFO>

NOTE: “POWER REDUCTION” INDICATES THE POWER STEPS TO

BE CUT OUT

Example of power limitation on low pressure in a 2 step/2 circuit machine

Diagram F' Diagram F''

on low pressure probe (Cool and Heat) on low pressure probe (Cool and Heat)
PL22 Low Pressure SETPOINT PL22 Low Pressure SETPOINT

Steps to cut out on circuit 1 Steps to cut out on circuit 2

Power Power
Reduction Reduction

Step 2 Step 2

PL22 PL22
SET POINT SET POINT
Low Pressure Low Pressure

Step 1 Step 1

LOW PRESSURE LOW PRESSURE

<IMG INFO>
PL20 <IMG INFO>
PL20
222,7 222,15

NOTE: “POWER REDUCTION” INDICATES THE POWER STEPS NOTE: “POWER REDUCTION” INDICATES THE POWER STEPS
TO BE CUT OUT ON CIRCUIT 1 TO BE CUT OUT ON CIRCUIT 2
LOW PRESSURE = low pressure input circuit 1 LOW PRESSURE = low pressure input circuit 2

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
118/240
22.6 Power limitation to 50%

Function enabled by configuring:

a digital input as 50% power limitation or by setting one of parameters CL40…CL45 = ±21
or an analogue input when configured as digital input CL46…CL54 = ±21;

Activating the digital input halves the availability of power steps, thus reducing energy consumption.

Power limitation to 50% is independent of the forced power stages described above.
The limitations act in parallel, and the number of steps limited is the maximum of the two limitation functions.

With the SB600 this results in a large number of possible situations: the first column shows the power steps normally
available (without alarms or blocks, a value which depends exclusively on how the SB600 is configured, not on the
particular situation at any given time), while the second column shows the residual power steps with 50% power limitation
active.

Number of power steps Number of power steps available with

Notes
configured limitation to 50% active
1 1 No effect
2 1
3 2
4 2

By step we mean the power equivalent of a compressor power stage; the selection of the step is subordinate to the
compressor controller mechanism (e.g. limitation to 50% makes no distinction between the power stages of different
circuits).
In other words, the selection of which power step to turn off is made by the power stage on/off logic described in the
chapter Compressors.

Example 1
SB device configured with two power steps, one per circuit (= one compressor per circuit): the activation of the input has
no effect if only one compressor is running at the time; if the input stays active, it will affect any request for activation of
the compressor of the other circuit (it will impede it).

Example 2
SB device configured with four power steps (one power stage compressor per circuit): activation of the input has no effect
if only 1 or 2 power stages are active at the time (whether both or only one compressor is running), as for the previous
example. It will have an effect if 3 or 4 power stages are active and 1 or 2 steps are turned off according to the
compressor controller logic (either both compressors or only one remains active).

As fro other forms of limitation, the step off/on sequence is subordinate to the safety timings.

The function has no effect on other resources, and is not indicated on the display in any way.

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
119/240
23 TIME BANDS (FOLDER PAR/TE)

SBW600 allows for differentiated operation based on the time and the days of the week.
In fact, you can “define” time bands (e.g. in order to save energy at night, when less energy is requested by the system), by
programming specific “profiles” and “events” throughout the course of the week.
You can define the hour and minute of each event, at which point a new “time band” triggers the activation of a specific
mode (ON or STANDBY) and specific Cool / Heat setpoints.

The Time Band control parameters can be viewed and configured in the tE folder (see User interface section and
Parameters section).

Enabling
The function may be enabled using parameter tE00 - Enable time band operation

Parameter Description
0 1
Enable time band Time bands Time bands
Enable tE00
operation disabled enabled

General conditions of operation

tE00 - Enable time band operation = 1
The RTC must be present (models /C)
The time must first be checked and if necessary adjusted (see paragraph on How to adjust the clock (CL), in the User
Interface section (folder PAr/UI)

NOTE: This DOES NOT affect the Heat/Cool mode change or even the system / ACS mode change but only the Cool and
Heat setpoint values defined by the indicated parameters, as well as the mode change from ON to STANDBY and vice
versa.
The mode change procedure always occurs in accordance with the basic regulation times and rules.

Time Band Operation

Up to 3 profiles are available for each day of the week. They may be selected from the following parameters:

Parameter Description 1 2 3
tE01 Select profile, day 1 (Monday) Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3
tE02 Select profile, day 2 (Tuesday) Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3
tE03 Select profile, day 3 (Wednesday) Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3
tE04 Select profile, day 4 (Thursday) Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3
tE05 Select profile, day 5 (Friday) Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3
tE06 Select profile, day 6 (Saturday) Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3
tE07 Select profile, day 7 (Sunday) Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
120/240
Up to 4 events can be associated with each profile – see the following table:

Description Description Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3

tE10..tE15 tE38..tE50 tE66..tE71
Hour / Minutes tE10..tE11 tE38..tE39 tE66..tE67
ON/Standby
operating tE12 tE40 tE68
EVENT 1
mode
Cool setpoint tE13 tE41 tE69
Heat setpoint tE14 tE42 tE70
ACS setpoint tE15 tE43 tE71
tE17..tE22 tE45..tE50 tE73..tE78
Hour / Minutes tE17...tE18 tE45..tE46 tE73..tE74
ON/Standby
operating tE19 tE47 tE75
EVENT 2
mode
Cool setpoint tE20 tE48 tE76
Heat setpoint tE21 tE49 tE77
ACS setpoint tE22 tE50 tE78
tE24..tE29 tE52..tE57 tE80..tE85
Hour / Minutes tE24...tE25 tE52..tE53 tE80..tE81
ON/Standby
operating tE26 tE54 tE82
EVENT 3
mode
Cool setpoint tE27 tE55 tE83
Heat setpoint tE28 tE56 tE84
ACS setpoint tE29 tE57 tE85
tE31..tE36 tE59..tE64 tE87..tE92
Hour / Minutes tE31...tE32 tE59..tE60 tE87..tE88
ON/Standby
EVENT 4 operating tE33 tE61 tE89
mode
Cool setpoint tE34 tE62 tE90
ACS setpoint tE36 tE64 tE92

ACS = Domestic hot water

Each event will have
a start time defined by 2 parameters
event start hour
event start minute
operating mode
ON
Standby
SBW600 will enter ON or standby when the time coincides with the start of the time band
Cool mode temperature controller setpoint
Heat mode temperature controller setpoint
Sanitary Water setpoint
The Cool mode setpoint will be active with SBW600 in Cool mode when the time coincides with the predefined event
(start of the time band).
Similarly, the Heat mode setpoint will be active with SBW600 in Heat mode when the time coincides with the start of the
time band
NOTE: the SBW600 device does NOT change mode but will use the setpoints indicated if in Cool/Heat mode

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
121/240
 24 ALARMS AND DIAGNOSTICS (FOLDER PAR/AL)
Alarms The “Energy SBW600 ” performs full installation diagnostics and reports a variety of alarms.

Parameters for alarm activation and acknowledgment can be viewed and configured in folder
AL (parameters AL00…AL82) (see User Interface and Parameters chapters)

Automatic reset Automatic reset

For automatic reset alarms, normal operation is restored as soon as the cause of the alarm has been removed.

Manual reset Manual reset

Alarms can be manually reset by pressing and releasing the [UP + DOWN] keys
Normal operation can only be reset
 by pressing a key on the instrument keyboard and
 only if the cause of the alarm has been removed.

Alarm acknowledgement
Alarms can be acknowledged by pressing any key.
NOTE: acknowledging an alarm has no effect on the alarm other than on the alarm LED that goes from fixed to
flashing.
<IMG INFO>
42,7
29,75
1
2
51
-28 35

An alarm has two effects:

 It blocks the utilities concerned
 Message on keyboard display alternates with a message on the main display

The next two sections summarize alarms grouped by type (digital or analogue).
Alarm code and alarm parameters are in bold (PAr/AL folder)

For some alarms, the signal can be excluded for a preset interval, set in the relative parameter.

No. interventions
The number of interventions per sampling period is defined in parameter AL00 - Time interval for alarm event count

No. interventions For some alarms, the number of interventions can be counted: if, in a period of time defined in AL00 a threshold set in a
parameter is exceeded, the alarm changes from automatic to manual reset.

Alarms are counted every AL00/32 (minutes) = sample time.

AL00 and hence also AL00/32 is expressed in minutes.

Example: AL10-High pressure alarm circuit 1: if the number of events per hour is set to AL10, for the alarm to change
from automatic to manual reset, the count must reach the number set in AL10.

Example AL10=3

Event =Nr. Events

A: Automatic reset Sampling: sampling AL00/32 sampling time 1
M: Manual reset Time: time 2
Alarm: alarm 3 (=AL10)

NOTE:
 if, during the sample time AL10/32 several alarm events of the same type occur (e.g. High pressure alarm
circuit 1) only 1 event is counted
 if the alarm conditions is active for several sample times, only 1 event is counted.
 if the alarm event is active for a period greater than AL00 the counter resets to zero
Digital alarms
24.1.1 Digital alarms
Automatic Manual
Exit alarm Number of
Alarm Bypass Bypass alarm alarm
Name of alarm deactivation interventions
code activation event time activation activation
time per sample time
time time
High pressure not
Er01 None not present not present not present AL10
alarm circuit 1 present
High pressure not
Er02 None not present not present not present AL10
alarm circuit 2 present
Circuit
compressor
Low pressure
Er05 activated or AL11 not present not present not present AL12
alarm circuit 1
reversal of 4-way
valve (NOTE 1)
Circuit
compressor
Low pressure
Er06 activated or AL11 not present not present not present AL12
alarm circuit 2
reversal of 4-way
valve (NOTE 1)
Internal circuit
Er20 Internal circuit pump activation
AL14 AL15 AL16 AL15 not present
(NOTE 2) flow meter alarm (One of the two
pumps)
Er25 External flow External circuit
AL17 AL18 AL19 AL18 not present
(NOTE 3) switch alarm pump activation
Compressor 1 Compressor 1
Er10 AL20 not present not present not present AL21
thermal switch switched on
Compressor 2 Compressor 2
Er11 AL20 not present not present not present AL21
thermal switch switched on
Compressor 3 Compressor 3
Er12 AL20 not present not present not present AL21
thermal switch switched on
Compressor 4 Compressor 4
Er13 AL20 not present not present not present AL21
thermal switch switched on
Er15 Compressor 1 oil Compressor 1
AL22 Not present not present Not present AL23
(NOTE 2) pressure switch switched on
Er16 Compressor 2 oil Compressor 2
AL22 Not present not present Not present AL23
(NOTE 2) pressure switch switched on
Er17 Compressor 3 oil Compressor 3
AL22 Not present not present Not present AL23
(NOTE 2) pressure switch switched on
Er18 Compressor 4 oil Compressor 4
AL22 Not present not present Not present AL23
(NOTE 2) pressure switch switched on
Internal
Not
Er40 exchanger fan None Not present not present Not present AL24
present
thermal switch
External
exchanger fan Not
Er41 None Not present not present Not present AL25
thermal switch present
circuit 1
External
exchanger fan Not
Er42 None Not present not present Not present AL25
thermal switch present
circuit 2
Internal circuit
Not
Er21 pump 1 thermal None Not present not present Not present AL26
present
switch
Internal circuit
Not
Er22 pump 2 thermal None Not present not present Not present AL26
present
switch
External circuit
Not
Er26 pump thermal None Not present not present Not present AL27
present
switch
Internal
exchanger Not
Er50 None Not present not present Not present not present
electric heater present
thermal switch
Internal
exchanger Not
Er51 None Not present not present Not present not present
electric heaters 2 present
thermal switch
Auxiliary output Not
Er56 None Not present not present Not present not present
alarm present
(NOTE 1) The bypass is activated by the reversal of the 4-way valve only if at least one compressor is on
(NOTE 2) The alarm is active only if the associated resource (e.g. a given compressor or pump) is active
(NOTE 3) The alarm is active only if the associated resource (e.g. a given compressor or pump) is active and in heating
mode only
24.1.1.1 Flow switch alarm
Management of digital flow switch alarms Er20 & Er25 differs from that of other digital alarms: alarm events are not
considered, only the activation time of the digital input is taken into account. See the following examples
NOTE: The external circuit flow switch alarm is not active in Cool.

Example of external circuit pump automatic reset flow

switch alarm
Alarm generated with activation of digital input D.I. during
bypass;
count AL15 - Enable flow switch time for primary circuit
automatic alarm
starts only when AL14 - Flow switch bypass time after primary
circuit water pump enabled is decremented to 0.

WATER
PUMP ON

OFF

Time

D.I.
ON

OFF

Time

Automatic
Alarm ON

OFF

Time
AL14 AL15 AL15
<IMG INFO>

Example 2 of external circuit pump automatic reset flow switch alarm

Alarm generated with start of next alarm event after the bypass has elapsed

WATER
PUMP ON

OFF

Time

D.I.
ON

OFF

Time

Automatic
Alarm ON

OFF

Time
AL14 AL15
<IMG INFO>
Example of external circuit pump manual reset flow switch alarm
AL15 - Enable flow switch time for primary circuit automatic alarm
AL16 - Enable flow switch time for primary circuit manual alarm

D.I
ON

OFF

Time

ON
Automatic
Alarm

OFF

Time
AL15

ON
Manual
Alarm

OFF

Time
AL16
<IMG INFO>
Analogue alarms
24.1.2 Analogue alarms

NOTES

(NOTE 1) if N° interventions per hour = 1, the alarm is always of the manual reset type.
(NOTE 2) Alarm bypass is active in heating mode only.

Automatic
Bypass activation No.
Alarm code Name of alarm Bypass time SET activation Hysteresis alarm time Control sensor
event interventions
(NOTE 1)
High pressure High pressure probe circuit
Er03 None None AL40 AL41 Not present AL42
(analogue) circuit 1 1
High pressure High pressure probe circuit
Er04 None None AL40 AL41 Not present AL42
(analogue) circuit 2 2
A circuit 1 compressor
Low pressure Low pressure probe circuit
Er07 switched on or reversal AL43 Al44 AL45 Not present AL46
(analogue) circuit 1 1
of the 4-way valve
A circuit 2 compressor
Low pressure Low pressure probe circuit
Er08 Switched on or reversal AL43 Al44 AL45 Not present AL46
(analogue) circuit 2 2
of the 4-way valve
On/Off (local or
Internal exchanger
Internal circuit remote), input in heat
Er30 AL50 AL51 AL52 Not present A53 water/air outlet
antifreeze mode
temperature
(NOTE 2)
On/Off (local or
External circuit remote), input in heat External exchanger outlet
Er31 AL54 AL55 AL56 Not present A57
antifreeze mode water temperature
(NOTE 2)
Internal exchanger
Automatic
Er35 High temperature None None AL47 AL48 AL49 water/air outlet
reset
temperature

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
126/240
 24.1.3 Table of Alarms

 The alarm signal consists of a code, the format being “Ernn” (nn is a 2-figure number identifying the type of alarm, e.g. Er00, Er25, Er39….).
 When more than one alarm occurs at the same time, the one with the lowest number will be shown first; e.g. simultaneous alarms Er00 and Er01. Er00 will be shown alternating
between the display and the main screen
 If the measurement on the main display is incorrect, in the event of an alarm, the alarm code will alternate with “----“.

All possible alarms are listed in the table below with their respective codes and the relative utilities blocked:

Alarm table key

column
Alarm NOTE: codes are listed in increasing order (Er00, Er01) and
code some numbers are “skipped” (Er06 does not exist)
Name of
alarm
notes CMP 1/2 Compressor 1/power step 2
PUMP 1/2 Pump 1/2
alarm D digital
A analogue
See digital alarms table
Reset AUTO automatic
OFF COMP1 OFF compressor 1
OFF COMP2 OFF compressor 2
OFF COMP3 OFF compressor 3
OFF COMP4 OFF compressor 4
UTILITY OFF (1) When used for temperature control
OFF (2) When used for temperature control and/or
antifreeze
OFF RES1 OFF heater 1
OFF RES2 OFF heater 2

Table of Alarms

Table of Alarms

RECIRCULATION FAN

EXTERNAL CIRCUIT
INTERNAL CIRCUIT
SANITARY WATER

SANITARY WATER

EXCHANGER FAN
Digital/Analogue
Name of alarm

COMPRESSORS

EXCHANGER

EXCHANGER
Alarm code

Alarm type

AUXILIARY
EXTERNAL

EXTERNAL
INTERNAL

HEATERS

HEATERS
OUTPUT
HEATER

BOILER
VALVE

PUMP

PUMP
Notes

Er00 General alarm D AUTO OFF0 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Er01 High pressure (digital) circuit 1 D Events OFF (1)
Er02 High pressure (digital) circuit 2 D Events OFF (1)
Er03 High pressure (analogue) circuit 1 A Events OFF (1)

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
127/240
 RECIRCULATION FAN

EXTERNAL CIRCUIT
INTERNAL CIRCUIT
SANITARY WATER

SANITARY WATER

EXCHANGER FAN
Digital/Analogue
Name of alarm

COMPRESSORS

EXCHANGER

EXCHANGER
Alarm code

Alarm type

AUXILIARY
EXTERNAL

EXTERNAL
INTERNAL

HEATERS

HEATERS
OUTPUT
HEATER

BOILER
VALVE

PUMP

PUMP
Notes
Er04 High pressure (analogue) circuit 2 A Events OFF (1)
Er05 Low pressure (digital) D Events OFF (1) OFF (2) OFF
Er07 Low pressure (analogue) circuit 1 A Events OFF (1) OFF (2) OFF
Er08 Low pressure (analogue) circuit 2 A Events OFF (1) OFF (2) OFF
Er09 No refrigerant A Events OFF OFF (2) OFF
OFF
Er10 Compressor 1 thermal switch CMP 1 D Events
COMP1
OFF
Er11 Compressor 2 thermal switch CMP 2 D Events
COMP2
OFF
Er12 Compressor 3 thermal switch CMP 3 D Events
COMP3
OFF
Er13 Compressor 4 thermal switch CMP 4 D Events
COMP4
OFF
Er15 Compressor 1 oil pressure switch CMP 1 D Events
COMP1
OFF
Er16 Compressor 2 oil pressure switch CMP 2 D Events
COMP2
OFF
Er17 Compressor 3 oil pressure switch CMP 3 D Events
COMP3
OFF
Er18 Compressor 4 oil pressure switch CMP 4 D Events
COMP4
OFF for OFF for
manual manual
Er20 Primary circuit flow switch D Time OFF OFF OFF OFF
reset reset
alarm alarm
OFF
Er21 Internal circuit pump 1 thermal switch Pump 1 D Events OFF (3) OFF (3) OFF (3) OFF (3)
Pump 1
OFF
Er22 Internal circuit pump 2 thermal switch Pump 2 D Events OFF (3) OFF (3) OFF (3) OFF (3)
Pump 2
OFF for OFF for
manual manual
Er25 External circuit flow switch D Time OFF OFF
reset reset
alarm alarm
Er26 External circuit pump thermal switch D Events OFF OFF OFF
Er30 Internal circuit antifreeze A AUTO OFF OFF
Er31 External circuit antifreeze A AUTO OFF OFF
Er35 High temperature A AUTO OFF

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
128/240
 RECIRCULATION FAN

EXTERNAL CIRCUIT
INTERNAL CIRCUIT
SANITARY WATER

SANITARY WATER

EXCHANGER FAN
Digital/Analogue
Name of alarm

COMPRESSORS

EXCHANGER

EXCHANGER
Alarm code

Alarm type

AUXILIARY
EXTERNAL

EXTERNAL
INTERNAL

HEATERS

HEATERS
OUTPUT
HEATER

BOILER
VALVE

PUMP

PUMP
Notes
Er40 Internal exchanger fan thermal switch D Events OFF OFF OFF

OFF
Er41 External exchanger fan thermal switch circuit 1 D Events OFF (2) OFF (1)
(2)
OFF
Er42 External exchanger fan thermal switch circuit 2 D Events OFF (2) OFF (1)
(2)
Er45 Error clock faulty AUTO
Er46 Error set clock AUTO
Er47 LAN communication error AUTO

Er48 Anti-Legionnaire AUTO

OFF
Er50 Internal exchanger electric heater 1 thermal switch D AUTO RES.1

OFF
Er51 Internal exchanger electric heater 2 thermal switch D AUTO RES.1

Er56 Auxiliary output thermal switch D AUTO OFF

Er60 Internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature probe faulty AUTO See probe error table
Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature probe
faulty, or
Circuit 1 internal exchanger water outlet temperature
Er61 AUTO See probe error table
probe faulty, or
Circuit 2 internal exchanger water outlet temperature
probe faulty
Circuit 1 external exchanger temperature probe faulty, or
Er62 AUTO See probe error table
Circuit 2 external exchanger temperature probe faulty

Er63 AUTO See probe error table

External exchanger inlet water temperature probe faulty
Er64 AUTO See probe error table
External exchanger outlet water temperature probe faulty
Er66 Sanitary water temperature probe faulty AUTO See Probe Errors Table
Display probe
Er67 AUTO See probe error table
(temperature / pressure) faulty
Er68 External temperature probe faulty AUTO

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
129/240
 RECIRCULATION FAN

EXTERNAL CIRCUIT
INTERNAL CIRCUIT
SANITARY WATER

SANITARY WATER

EXCHANGER FAN
Digital/Analogue
Name of alarm

COMPRESSORS

EXCHANGER

EXCHANGER
Alarm code

Alarm type

AUXILIARY
EXTERNAL

EXTERNAL
INTERNAL

HEATERS

HEATERS
OUTPUT
HEATER

BOILER
VALVE

PUMP

PUMP
Notes
High pressure input circuit 1 faulty, or
Er69 AUTO See probe error table
High pressure input circuit 2 faulty
Low pressure input circuit 1 faulty, or
Er70 AUTO
Low pressure input circuit 2 faulty
Er73 Dynamic setpoint input faulty AUTO
Internal exchanger pressure circuit 1 faulty, or Internal
Er74 AUTO See probe error table
exchanger pressure circuit 2 faulty
External exchanger pressure circuit 1 faulty, or External See probe error table
Er75 AUTO
exchanger pressure circuit 2 faulty

Er80 Configuration error AUTO OFF OFF

Er81 Compressor exceeded running hours message CMP Manual

Er85 Primary circuit pump operating hours exceeded signal PUMP Manual

Er86 External circuit pump operating hours exceeded signal PUMP Manual

Er90 Alarm history records exceeded message Manual

(1) the resources of the associated circuit are switched off

(2) the resources of the associated circuit are switched off if separate condensation, all resources if single condensation. In digital and analogue low pressure alarms, the external exchanger fans
are switched off only if the alarm is of the manual reset type.
(3) if the device is configured for two internal water pumps, the resources are witched off only if both thermal switch alarms (pump 1 and pump 2) are active

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
130/240
Probe errors table Probe errors table

Temperature probe error Use Lock machine Notes

Internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature Cool / Heat temperature controllers (proportional and differential) YES
Change over YES
The fan switches
ON/OFF depending
Recirculation fan NO
on the compressor
state
Internal circuit water pump, antifreeze YES
or
Internal circuit heater, antifreeze
Antifreeze with heat pump YES
Block heat pump YES
Power limitation NO
The alarm is
Low refrigerant alarm NO
disabled
Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature YES
Circuit 1 internal exchanger water outlet
YES
temperature probe
Circuit 2 internal exchanger water outlet
YES
temperature probe
External exchanger temperature circuit 1 Cool / Heat temperature controllers (proportional and differential) YES
or External exchanger temperature External exchanger fans NO
circuit 2 Antifreeze with external circuit heater YES
Auxiliary output NO
Defrost, input and output NO
Block heat pump function or power limitation YES
External exchanger inlet water temperature Cool / Heat temperature controllers (proportional and differential) YES
Antifreeze with external circuit heater YES
Auxiliary output NO
Block heat pump YES
Power limitation NO
External exchanger outlet water temperature YES
External temperature Cool / Heat temperature controllers (differential) YES
Change over NO
Dynamic setpoint NO
Internal circuit water pump, antifreeze YES
Internal integrated heater, differential NO
Auxiliary output NO
External antifreeze heater YES
Boiler, differential NO
Block heat pump YES
Power limitation NO
Defrost, compensation NO
Dynamic setpoint input Dynamic setpoint NO

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
131/240
Temperature probe error Use Lock machine Notes
Temperature display Display NO
Sanitary water temperature Sanitary water NO
Pressure probe error Use Lock machine Notes
External exchanger fans
High pressure input circuit 1 or High pressure YES
Defrost, input and output
input circuit 2
Power limitation
External exchanger fans
Low pressure input circuit 1 or Low pressure
Defrost, input and output YES
input circuit 2
Power limitation
Dynamic setpoint input Dynamic setpoint NO
Internal exchanger pressure circuit 1, or Internal
YES
exchanger pressure circuit 2 External exchanger fans
External exchanger pressure circuit 1, or External exchanger fans
YES
External exchanger pressure circuit 2 Defrost, input and output
Pressure display Display NO

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
132/240
Energy SB-SD-SCW600
133/240
25 PARAMETERS (PAR)
The Energy SBW600 is fully configurable via parameter settings;

They can be modified with:

 The Multi Function key (MFK)
 Keys on the SBW600 front panel / SKW22(L) remote panel
 PC and DeviceManager software

The following sections analyse each parameter, divided into categories (folders), in detail.

Each folder is designated with a 2 character label (example: CF, UI, etc).

Folder
Acronym meaning (label) Parameters of:
label
CL Configuration Local Local I/O configuration
Cr Configuration Remote terminal Remote terminal I/O configuration
CF ConFiguration Configuration
Ui User interface User interface
tr thermoregulation Heat regulation
St Statuses (Operating modes) Operating states
CP ComPressors Compressor
Pump PI Pump (Internal) Internal circuit water pump
FI Fan (Internal) Recirculation fans (internal)
Fan
FE Fan (External) External exchanger fans (external)
Pump PE Pump (External) External exchanger pump
HI Electric Heaters (Internal) Internal exchanger electric heaters
Electric heaters HE Electric Heaters (External) External exchanger electric heaters
HA Auxiliary Output Auxiliary output
br boiler Boiler
dF deFrost Defrost
dS dynamic Setpoint Dynamic setpoint
Ad Adaptive Adaptive (adaptive function)
AF AntiFreeze Antifreeze
AS Sanitary Water
Anti-Legionnaire's Disease
HP Heat Pump Block heat pump
PL Power Limitation Power limitation
tE Time Events Time Band
AL ALarm Alarms

Visibility and value of Parameters

The Energy SBW600 is a family of controllers.
There are 4+1 hardware models (see Appendix, Models section) with varying numbers of inputs and outputs.
The 4+1 hardware models are divided into 3 DeviceManager models (version with 1 or 2 TRIAC and version with 5 relays).
Depending on the model, some configuration parameters may not (usually) be visible or significant given that the
associated resource is not present.
See the table below:

TCL1 TCL2 DOL6

TCE1 TCE2 DOE6
Device
hardware
Manager
CL75-CL78-CL81
636 CL73-CL76-CL79 (AOL2)
636
CE73-CE76-CE79 CE75-CE78-CE81
(AOE2)
model

646/C CL73-CL76-CL79
646 //
646/C/S CE73-CE76-CE79

655/C
CL95
655 655/C/S // //
CE95

When not indicated otherwise, the parameter is always visible and modifiable, unless customised settings have been
configured via serial

NB: parameters and folder visibility can both be controlled (See Folder table).
If folder visibility is modified, the new setting will apply to all parameters in the folder.
 25.1.1 Local I/O configuration parameters (CL) - Configuration Local

CL00 AiL1 analogue input type

Configures the analogue input AiL1 - see table
0 Probe not configured
1 DI
2 NTC
CL01 AiL2 analogue input type
Configures the analogue input AiL2 - as for CL00
CL02 AiL3 analogue input type
Configures the analogue input AiL3 - see table
0 Probe not configured 3 4..20mA
1 DI 4 0-10V
2 NTC 5 0-5V
6 0-1V
CL03 AiL4 analogue input type
Configures the analogue input AiL4 - as for CL02
CL04 AiL5 analogue input type
Configures the analogue input AiL5 - as for CL00

CL10 AiL3 analogue input fullscale value

Configures the full scale value with analogue input AiL3
CL11 AiL3 analogue input start of scale value
Configures the start of scale value with analogue input AiL3
CL12 AiL4 analogue input fullscale value
Configures the full scale value with analogue input AiL4
CL13 AiL4 analogue input start of scale value
Configure the start of scale value with analogue input AiL4
CL20 AiL1 analogue input differential
Configures the differential in analogue input AiL1
M.U. : °C
CL21 AiL2 analogue input differential
Configures the differential in analogue input AiL2
M.U. : °C
CL22 AiL3 analogue input differential
Configures the differential in analogue input AiL3
M.U. : °C / bar
CL23 AiL4 analogue input differential
Configures the differential in analogue input AiL4
M.U. : °C / bar
CL24 AiL5 analogue input differential
Configures the differential in analogue input AiL5
U.M. : °C
CL30 Configuration of analogue input AiL1
Configures the analogue input AiL1 - see table

0 input disabled
1 Air/water inlet temperature
internal exchanger
2 Water/air outlet temperature
internal exchanger
3 Outlet water temperature
internal exchanger circuit 1
4 Outlet water temperature
internal exchanger circuit 2
5 External exchanger temperature circuit 1
6 External exchanger temperature circuit 2
7 Inlet water temperature
recovery (or external) exchanger
8 Outlet water temperature
recovery (or external) exchanger
9 External temperature
10 NOT USED
11 Sanitary water temperature
12 NOT USED
13 NOT USED
14 NOT USED
15 NOT USED
16 Temperature display
CL31 Configuration of analogue input AiL2
Configures the analogue input AiL2 - as for CL30
CL32 Configuration of analogue input AiL3
Configures the analogue input AiL3 - see table
0 input disabled 16 Temperature display
1 Air/water inlet temperature 17 NOT USED
internal exchanger
2 Water/air outlet temperature 18 NOT USED
internal exchanger
3 Outlet water temperature 19 NOT USED
internal exchanger circuit 1
4 Outlet water temperature 20 NOT USED
internal exchanger circuit 2
5 External exchanger temperature circuit 1 21 High pressure input circuit 1
6 External exchanger temperature circuit 2 22 High pressure input circuit 2
7 Inlet water temperature 23 Low pressure input circuit 1
recovery (or external) exchanger
8 Outlet water temperature 24 Low pressure input circuit 2
recovery (or external) exchanger
9 External temperature 25 Dynamic setpoint input
10 NOT USED 26 Internal exchanger pressure circuit 1
11 Sanitary water temperature 27 Internal exchanger pressure circuit 2
12 NOT USED 28 External exchanger pressure circuit 1
13 NOT USED 29 External exchanger pressure circuit 2
14 NOT USED 30 Pressure display
15 NOT USED

CL33 Configuration of analogue input AiL4 - as for CL32

CL34 Configuration of analogue input AiL5 - as for CL32

CL40 Configuration of digital input DI1

Configures the digital input DI1 - see table
0 Input disabled ±31 High pressure switch C2
±1 Remote STD-BY ±32 Low pressure switch C1
±2 Remote OFF ±33 Low pressure switch C2
±3 Remote Summer/Winter ±34 Compressor 1 oil pressure switch
±4 Power step 1 request ±35 Compressor 2 oil pressure switch
±5 Power step 2 request ±36 Compressor 3 oil pressure switch
±6 Power step 3 request ±37 Compressor 4 oil pressure switch
±7 Power step 4 request ±38 NOT USED
±8 Heat power step 1 request digital input ±39 External exchanger fan thermal switch C1
±9 Heat power step 2 request digital input ±40 External exchanger fan thermal switch C2
±10 Heat power step 3 request digital input ±41 Internal exchanger fan thermal switch
±11 Heat power step 4 request digital input ±42 External Free-Cooling fan thermal switch
±12 Cool power step 1 request digital input ±43 Compressor 1 thermal switch
±13 Cool power step 2 request digital input ±44 Compressor 2 thermal switch
±14 Cool power step 3 request digital input ±45 Compressor 3 thermal switch
±15 Cool power step 4 request digital input ±46 Compressor 4 thermal switch
±16 Block compressor 1 ±47 Internal circuit pump 1 thermal switch
±17 Block compressor 2 ±48 Internal circuit pump 2 thermal switch
±18 Block compressor 3 ±49 External circuit pump thermal switch
±19 Block compressor 4 ±50 Internal exchanger electric heater 1 thermal switch
±20 Block heat pump ±51 Internal exchanger electric heater 2 thermal switch
±21 Power limited to 50% ±52 Auxiliary output alarm
±22 Economy input ±53 NOT USED
±23 NOT USED ±54 NOT USED
±24 General alarm ±55 Primary circuit flow switch
±25 End of defrost C1 ±56 External (recovery) circuit flow switch
±26 End of defrost C2 ±57 NOT USED
±27 NOT USED ±58 Display
±28 Remote AS
±29 NOT USED
±30 High pressure switch C1

CL41 Configuration of digital input DI2

Configures the digital input DI2 - as for CL40
CL42 Configuration of digital input DI3
Configures the digital input DI3 - as for CL40
CL43 Configuration of digital input DI4
Configures the digital input DI4 - as for CL40
CL44 Configuration of digital input DI5
Configures the digital input DI5 - as for CL40
CL45 Configuration of digital input DI6
Configures the digital input DI6 - as for CL40
CL50 Configuration of analogue input AiL1 when configured as digital input
Configures analogue input AiL1 when configured as digital input - as for CL40
NOTE: Set to 0 if AiL1 is NOT configured as a DI
CL51 Configuration of analogue input AiL2 when configured as digital input
Configures analogue input AiL2 when configured as digital input - as for CL40
NOTE: Set to 0 if AiL2 is NOT configured as a DI
CL52 Configuration of analogue input AiL3 when configured as digital input
Configures analogue input AiL3 when configured as digital input - as for CL40
NOTE: Set to 0 if AiL3 is NOT configured as a DI
CL53 Configuration of analogue input AiL4 when configured as digital input
Configures analogue input AiL4 when configured as digital input - as for CL40
NOTE: Set to 0 if AiL5 is NOT configured as a DI
CL54 Configuration of analogue input AiL5 when configured as digital input
Configures analogue input AiL5 when configured as digital input - as for CL40
NOTE: Set to 0 if AiL5 is NOT configured as a DI

CL60 Type of analogue output AO5

 0 = 4-20mA
 1 = 0-20mA
CL61 Configuration of analogue output AO3
Configures analogue output AO3 - see table
CL62 Configuration of analogue output AO4
Configures analogue output AO3 - as for CL61 - see table
CL63 Configuration of analogue output AO5
Configures analogue output AO3 - as for CL61 - see table

Outputs: Configuration table

Value Description Type Value Description Type

0 Output disabled Digital ±32 NOT USED Digital
±1 Compressor 1 Digital ±33 NOT USED Digital
±2 Compressor 2 Digital ±34 NOT USED Digital
±3 Compressor 3 Digital ±35 NOT USED Digital
±4 Compressor 4 Digital ±36 NOT USED Digital
±5 Reversal valve circuit 1 Digital ±37 NOT USED Digital
±6 Reversal valve circuit 2 Digital ±38 NOT USED Digital
±7 NOT USED Digital ±39 NOT USED Digital
±8 NOT USED Digital ±40 NOT USED Digital
±9 Sanitary water valve Digital ±41 NOT USED Digital
±10 NOT USED Digital ±42 NOT USED Digital
±11 NOT USED Digital ±43 NOT USED Digital
±12 NOT USED Digital ±44 NOT USED Digital
±13 NOT USED Digital ±45 NOT USED Digital
±14 Internal circuit water pump 1 Digital ±46 NOT USED Digital
±15 Internal circuit water pump 2 Digital ±47 NOT USED Digital
±16 External circuit water pump Digital ±48 NOT USED Digital
±17 NOT USED Digital ±49 NOT USED Digital
±18 Recirculation fan Digital ±50 NOT USED Digital
±19 Fan External exchanger circuit 1 Digital ±51 NOT USED Digital
±20 Fan External exchanger circuit 2 Digital ±52 NOT USED Digital
±21 NOT USED Digital ±53 NOT USED Digital
±22 NOT USED Digital ±54 NOT USED Digital
±23 Electrical heating element 1 Digital ±55 NOT USED Digital
internal exchanger
±24 Electrical heating element 2 Digital Fan
±56 Analogue
internal exchanger External exchanger circuit 1
Electrical heating element Fan
±25 Digital ±57 Analogue
External exchanger 1 External exchanger circuit 2
Electrical heating element
±26 Digital ±58 NOT USED //
External exchanger 2
Internal circuit modulating water
±27 Auxiliary output Digital ±59 Analogue
pump 1
Internal circuit modulating water
±28 Sanitary Water Electric Heater Digital ±60 Analogue
pump 2
±29 NOT USED Digital ±61 NOT USED Analogue
±30 Boiler Digital ±62 Analogue stage 1 for compressor Analogue
±31 Alarm Digital ±63 Analogue stage 2 for Compressor Analogue
 For the visibility of parameters CL71 - CL81 see the table at the head of this chapter
CL71 Enabling analogue output AO1
Enables analogue output AO1
 0 = Output configured as digital - see CL96
 1 = Output configured as triac - see CL74 - CL77 - CL80
CL72 Enabling analogue output AO2
Enables analogue output AO2
 0 = Output configured as digital - see CL97
 1 = Output configured as triac - see CL75 - CL78 - CL81
CL73 Phase shift analogue output TC1
Enables phase shift of analogue output TC1
CL74 Phase shift analogue output AO1
Enables phase shift of analogue output AO1
CL75 Phase shift analogue output AO2
Enables phase shift of analogue output AO2
CL76 Analogue output TC1 pulse length
Configures analogue output pulse
CL77 Analogue output AO1 pulse length
Configures analogue output AO1 pulse
CL78 Analogue output AO2 pulse length
Configures analogue output AO2 pulse
CL79 Configuration of analogue output TC1
Configures analogue output TC1 - as for CL63
CL80 Configuration of analogue output AO1
Configures analogue output AO1 - as for CL63
CL81 Configuration of analogue output AO2
Configures analogue output AO2 - as for CL63
CL90 Configuration of digital output DO1
Configures digital output DO1 - see table
CL91 Configuration of digital output DO2
Configures digital output DO2 - as for CL90 - see Outputs: Configuration table
CL92 Configuration of digital output DO3
Configures digital output DO3 - as for CL90 - see Outputs: Configuration table
CL93 Configuration of digital output DO4
Configures digital output DO4 - as for CL90 - see Outputs: Configuration table
CL94 Configuration of digital output DO5 (Open collector)
Configures digital output DO5 - as for CL90 - see Outputs: Configuration table
CL95 Configuration of digital output DO6 - visible in models SBW655/C/S only
Configures digital output DO6 - as for CL90 - see Outputs: Configuration table
CL96 Configures digital output AO1 - as for CL90 - see Outputs: Configuration table
CL97 Configures digital output AO2 - as for CL90 - see Outputs: Configuration table

25.1.2 I/O configuration parameters expanded on expansion (CE) - Configuration Expansion

CE00 AiE1 analogue input type

Configures AiE1 analogue input - see table
0 Probe not configured
1 DI
2 NTC
CE01 AiE2 analogue input type
Configures AiE2 analogue input - Same as CE00
CE02 AiE3 analogue input type
Configures AiE3 analogue input - see table
0 Probe not configured 3 4..20mA
1 DI 4 0-10V

2 NTC 5 0-5V
6 0-1V
CE03 AiE4 analogue input type
Configures AiE4 analogue input - Same as CE02
CE04 AiE5 analogue input type
Configures AiE5 analogue input - Same as CE00

CE10 AiE3 analogue input fullscale value

Configures the full scale value with AiE3 analogue input
CE11 AiE3 analogue input start of scale value
Configures the start of scale value with AiE3 analogue input
CE12 AiE4 analogue input fullscale value
Configures the full scale value with AiE4 analogue input
CE13 AiE4 analogue input start of scale value
Configures the start of scale value with AiE4 analogue input
CE20 AiE1 analogue input differential
Configures the differential in AiE1 analogue input
M.U. : °C
CE21 AiE2 analogue input differential
Configures the differential in AiE2 analogue input
 M.U. : °C
CE22 AiE3 analogue input differential
Configures the differential in AiE3 analogue input
M.U. : °C/bar
CE23 AiE4 analogue input differential
Configures the differential in AiE4 analogue input
M.U. : °C/bar
CE24 AiE5 analogue input differential
Configures the differential in AiE5 analogue input
M.U. : °C
CE30 AiE1 analogue input configuration
Configures AiE1 analogue input - see table
0 input disabled
1 Water/air inlet temperature
internal exchanger
2 Water/air outlet temperature
internal exchanger
3 Water outlet temperature
internal exchanger circuit 1
4 Water outlet temperature
internal exchanger circuit 2
5 External exchanger temperature circuit 1
6 External exchanger temperature circuit 2
7 Water inlet temperature
recovery (or external) exchanger
8 Water outlet temperature
recovery (or external) exchanger
9 External temperature
10 Water recovery temperature
11 Sanitary water temperature
12 NOT USED
13 NOT USED
14 NOT USED
15 NOT USED
16 Temperature display
CE31 AiE2 analogue input configuration
Configures AiE2 analogue input - Same as CE30
CE32 AiE3 analogue input configuration
Configures AiE3 analogue input - see table
0 input disabled 16 Temperature display
1 Water/air inlet temperature 17 NOT USED
internal exchanger
2 Water/air outlet temperature 18 NOT USED
internal exchanger
3 Water outlet temperature 19 NOT USED
internal exchanger circuit 1
4 Water outlet temperature 20 NOT USED
internal exchanger circuit 2
5 External exchanger temperature circuit 1 21 High pressure input circuit 1
6 External exchanger temperature circuit 2 22 High pressure input circuit 2
7 Water inlet temperature 23 Low pressure input circuit 1
recovery (or external) exchanger
8 Water outlet temperature 24 Low pressure input circuit 2
recovery (or external) exchanger
9 External temperature 25 Input for dynamic set point
10 NOT USED 26 Internal exchanger pressure circuit 1
11 Sanitary water temperature 27 Internal exchanger pressure circuit 2
12 NOT USED 28 External exchanger pressure circuit 1
13 NOT USED 29 External exchanger pressure circuit 2
14 NOT USED 30 Pressure display
15 NOT USED

CE33 AiE4 analogue input configuration – Same as CE32

CE34 AiE5 analogue input configuration – Same as CE32

CE40 DI1 digital input configuration

Configures the DI1 digital input – see table
0 Input disabled ±31 High pressure pressure switch C2
±1 Remote STD-BY ±32 Low pressure pressure switch C1
±2 remote OFF ±33 Low pressure pressure switch C2
±3 Remote Summer/Winter ±34 Compressor 1 oil pressure switch
±4 Power step 1 request ±35 Compressor 2 oil pressure switch
±5 Power step 2 request ±36 Compressor 3 oil pressure switch
±6 Power step 3 request ±37 Compressor 4 oil pressure switch
±7 Power step 4 request ±38 NOT USED
±8 Digital input heat step 1 request ±39 External exchanger fan thermal switch C1
±9 Digital input heat step 2 request ±40 External exchanger fan thermal switch C2
±10 Digital input heat step 3 request ±41 Internal exchanger fan thermoswitch
±11 Digital input heat step 4 request ±42 NOT USED
±12 Digital input cool step 1 request ±43 Compressor 1 thermoswitch
±13 Digital input cool step 2 request ±44 Compressor 2 thermoswitch
±14 Digital input cool step 3 request ±45 Compressor 3 thermal switch
±15 Digital input cool step 4 request ±46 Compressor 4 thermal switch
±16 Block compressor 1 ±47 Internal circuit pump 1 thermal protection
±17 Block compressor 2 ±48 Internal circuit pump 2 thermal protection
±18 Block compressor 3 ±49 External circuit pump thermal protection
±19 Block compressor 4 ±50 Internal exchanger electric heater 1 thermoswitch
±20 Heat pump lock ±51 Internal exchanger electric heater 2 thermoswitch
±21 Power limited to 50% ±52 Auxiliary output alarm
±22 Economy input ±53 NOT USED
±23 NOT USED ±54 NOT USED
±24 General alarm ±55 Primary circuit flow switch
±25 End of defrost C1 ±56 External circuit flow switch (Recovery)
±26 End of defrost C2 ±57 NOT USED
±27 NOT USED ±58 Display
±28 NOT USED
±29 NOT USED
±30 High pressure pressure switch C1

CE41 DI2 digital input configuration

Configures DI2 digital input – Same as CE40
CE42 DI3 digital input configuration
Configures DI3 digital input – Same as CE40
CE43 DI4 digital input configuration
Configures DI4 digital input – Same as CL40
CL44 DI5 digital input configuration
Configures DI5 digital input – Same as CL40
CL45 DI6 digital input configuration
Configures DI6 digital input – Same as CL40
CE50 AiE1 analogue input configuration when configured as digital input
Configures AiE1 analogue input when configured as digital input – Same as CE40
NOTE: Set = 0 if AiE1 is NOT configured as DI
CE51 AiE2 analogue input configuration when configured as digital input
Configures AiE2 analogue input when configured as digital input - Same as CE40
NOTE: Set = 0 if AiE2 is NOT configured as DI
CE52 AiE3 analogue input configuration when configured as digital input
Configures AiE3 analogue input when configured as digital input - Same as CE40
NOTE: Set = 0 if AiE3 is NOT configured as DI
CE53 AiE4 analogue input configuration when configured as digital input
Configures AiE4 analogue input when configured as digital input - Same as CE40
NOTE: Set = 0 if AiE5 is NOT configured as DI
CE54 AiE5 analogue input configuration when configured as digital input
Configures AiE5 analogue input when configured as digital input - Same as CE40
NOTE: Set = 0 if AiE5 is NOT configured as DI

CE60 AOE5 analogue output type

 0 = 4-20mA
 1 = 0-20mA
CE61 AOE3 analogue output configuration
Configures AOE3 analogue output - see table
CE62 AOE4 analogue output configuration
Configures AOE3 analogue output - same as CE61 - see table
CE63 AOE5 analogue output configuration
Configures AOE3 analogue output - same as CL61 - see table

Outputs: configuration table

Value Description Type Value Description Type

0 Output disabled Digital ±32 NOT USED Digital
±1 Compressor 1 Digital ±33 NOT USED Digital
±2 Compressor 2 Digital ±34 NOT USED Digital
±3 Compressor 3 Digital ±35 NOT USED Digital
±4 Compressor 4 Digital ±36 NOT USED Digital
±5 Reversal valve circuit 1 Digital ±37 NOT USED Digital
±6 Reversal valve circuit 2 Digital ±38 NOT USED Digital
±7 NOT USED Digital ±39 NOT USED Digital
±8 NOT USED Digital ±40 NOT USED Digital
±9 Sanitary water valve Digital ±41 NOT USED Digital
±10 NOT USED Digital ±42 NOT USED Digital
±11 NOT USED Digital ±43 NOT USED Digital
±12 NOT USED Digital ±44 NOT USED Digital
±13 NOT USED Digital ±45 NOT USED Digital
±14 Internal circuit water pump 1 Digital ±46 NOT USED Digital
±15 Internal circuit water pump 2 Digital ±47 NOT USED Digital
±16 External circuit water pump Digital ±48 NOT USED Digital
±17 NOT USED Digital ±49 NOT USED Digital
±18 Recirculation fan Digital ±50 NOT USED Digital
±19 Fan External exchanger circuit 1 Digital ±51 NOT USED Digital
±20 Fan External exchanger circuit 2 Digital ±52 NOT USED Digital
±21 NOT USED Digital ±53 NOT USED Digital
±22 NOT USED Digital ±54 NOT USED Digital
±23 Electrical heating element 1 Digital ±55 NOT USED Digital
internal exchanger
±24 Electrical heating element 2 Digital Fan
±56 Analogue
internal exchanger External exchanger circuit 1
Electrical heating element Fan
±25 Digital ±57 Analogue
External exchanger 1 External exchanger circuit 2
Electrical heating element
±26 Digital ±58 NOT USED //
External exchanger 2
Internal circuit modulating water
±27 Auxiliary output Digital ±59 Analogue
pump 1
Internal circuit modulating water
±28 Sanitary Water Electric Heater Digital ±60 Analogue
pump 2
±29 NOT USED Digital ±61 NOT USED Analogue
±30 Boiler Digital ±62 Analogue stage 1 for compressor Analogue
±31 Alarm Digital ±63 Analogue stage 2 for Compressor Analogue

If multiple outputs are configured to run the same resource, the outputs will be activated in parallel.
 For visibility of parameters CE70 – CE81 See table at the beginning of this section
CE71 Enable AOE1 analogue output
Enables AO1 analogue output
 0 = Output configured as digital – see CE96
 1 = Output configured as triac – see CE74 – CE77 – CE80
CE72 Enable AOE2 analogue output
Enables AO2 analogue output
 0 = Output configured as digital – see CE97
 1 = Output configured as triac – see CE75 – CE78 – CE81
CE73 Phase shift TCE1 analogue output
Enables phase shift of TC1 analogue output
CE74 Phase shift AOE1 analogue output
Enables phase shift of AO1 analogue output
CE75 Phase shift AOE2 analogue output
Enables phase shift of AO2 analogue output
CE76 TCE1 analogue output pulse length
Configures analogue output pulse
CE77 AOE1 analogue output pulse length
Configures AO1 analogue output pulse
CE78 AOE2 analogue output pulse length
Configures AO2 analogue output pulse
CE79 TCE1 analogue output configuration
Configures TC1 analogue output - Same as CE63
CE80 AOE1 analogue output configuration
Configures AOE1 analogue output - Same as CE63
CE81 AOE2 analogue output configuration
Configures AOE2 analogue output - Same as CE63
CE90 DOE1 digital output configuration
Configures DOE1 digital output - see table
CE91 DOE2 digital output configuration
Configures DOE2 digital output - Same as CE90 - see Outputs: configuration table
CE92 DOE3 digital output configuration
Configures DOE3 digital output - Same as CE90 - see Outputs: configuration table
CE93 DOE4 digital output configuration
Configures DOE4 digital output - Same as CE90 - see Outputs: configuration table
CE94 DOE5 digital output configuration (Open Collector)
Configures DO5 digital output - Same as CE90 - see Outputs: configuration table
CE95 DOE6 digital output configuration - Visible only in models SE655/C/S
Configures DOE6 digital output - Same as CE90 - see Outputs: configuration table
CE96 AOE1 digital output configuration – Same as CE90 - see Outputs: configuration table
CE97 AOE2 digital output configuration – Same as CE90 - see Outputs: configuration table
 25.1.3 Remote I/O configuration parameters (Cr) - Configuration remote

Cr00 Air1 analogue input type

Configures remote terminal analogue input Air1 - see table
0 Probe not configured
1 //
2 NTC
Cr01 Air2 analogue input type
Configures remote terminal analogue input Air2 - see table
0 Probe not configured
1 DI
2 NTC
3 4..20mA

Cr10 Air2 local analogue input fullscale value

Configures the full scale value with local analogue input Air2
Cr11 Air2 local analogue input start of scale value
Configures the start of scale value with local analogue input Air2
Cr20 Air1 local analogue input differential
Configures the differential in local analogue input Air1
°C
Cr21 Air2 local analogue input differential
Configures the differential in local analogue input Air2
°C / bar
Cr30 Air1 local analogue input configuration
Configures local analogue input AiL1 - see table
input disabled Outlet water temperature
0 8
recovery (or external) exchanger
Air/water inlet temperature External temperature
1 9
internal exchanger
Water/air outlet temperature NOT USED
2 10
internal exchanger
Outlet water temperature Sanitary water temperature
3 11
internal exchanger circuit 1
Outlet water temperature NOT USED
4 12
internal exchanger circuit 2
5 External exchanger temperature circuit 1 13 NOT USED
6 External exchanger temperature circuit 2 14 NOT USED
Inlet water temperature NOT USED
7 15
recovery (or external) exchanger

Cr31 Air2 local analogue input configuration

Configures local analogue input Air2 - see table
0 input disabled 16 Temperature display
1 Air/water inlet temperature 17 NOT USED
internal exchanger
2 Water/air outlet temperature 18 NOT USED
internal exchanger
3 Outlet water temperature 19 NOT USED
internal exchanger circuit 1
4 Outlet water temperature 20 NOT USED
internal exchanger circuit 2
5 External exchanger temperature circuit 1 21 High pressure input circuit 1
6 External exchanger temperature circuit 2 22 High pressure input circuit 2
7 Inlet water temperature 23 Low pressure input circuit 1
recovery (or external) exchanger
8 Outlet water temperature 24 Low pressure input circuit 2
recovery (or external) exchanger
9 External temperature 25 Dynamic setpoint input
10 NOT USED 26 Internal exchanger pressure circuit
1
11 Sanitary water temperature 27 Internal exchanger pressure circuit
2
12 NOT USED 28 External exchanger pressure
circuit 1
13 NOT USED 29 External exchanger pressure
circuit 2
14 NOT USED 30 Pressure display
15 NOT USED

Cr50 Configuration of local analogue input Air2 when configured as digital input
Configures local analogue input Air2 if configured as digital input - as for CL40
NOTE: Set to 0 if Air2 is NOT configured as a DI
 25.1.4 Configuration parameters (CF) - Configuration

CF01 Select COM1 (TTL) protocol

Configures the selection of COM1 (TTL) communication channel protocol
 0 = Eliwell
 1 = Modbus

If CF01=0, the following parameters should be configured: CF20/CF21

CF20 Eliwell protocol controller address
Allows you to modify the Eliwell protocol controller address
CF21 Eliwell protocol controller family
Allows you to modify the Eliwell protocol controller family
CF21= index of device inside family (values run from 0 to 14)
CF22 = device family (values run from 0 to 14)
The pair of values CF20 and CF21 represent the device’s network address and is indicated as "FF.DD" (where FF=CF21 and
DD=CF20).

If CF01=1, the following parameters should be configured: CF30/CF31/CF32

CF30 Modbus protocol controller address
Modifies the Modbus protocol controller address
Values from 1 to 255. NOTE: 0 (zero) is not included
CF31 Modbus protocol Baudrate
Modifies the Modbus protocol baud rate
 0=1200 baud
 1=2400 baud
 2=4800 baud
 3=9600 baud
 4=19200 baud
 5=38400 baud (maximum speed when using VarManager software)
 6=58600 baud
 7=115200 baud
CF32 Modbus protocol parity
Modbus parity
 0= STX
 1= EVEN
 2= NONE
 3= ODD

CF43 firmware screen

Indicates the revision number of the firmware screen. Read-only parameter.
CF44 Firmware release
Indicates the release number of the firmware screen. Read-only parameter.

CF60 Client code 1

CF61 Client code 2
Parameters for use by client/user only. The client can assign these parameters values that e.g. identify the type and/or
model of the system, and its configuration etc. Values from 0 to 999
 25.1.5 User interface parameters (UI) - User Interface
SBW600 utility led configuration
UI00 Configuration of LED 1
UI01 Configuration of LED 2
UI02 Configuration of LED 3
UI03 Configuration of LED 4
UI04 Configuration of LED 5
UI05 Configuration of LED 6
UI06 Configuration of LED 7
Configures LED 1…7

LED utilities table

Default icon
Parameter Default
LED symbol LED SBW600 / LED on front
SBW600 / SBW600 / Default SBW600
on display SKW22 22L panel
SKW22 22L SKW22 22L
SBW600
LED 1 / 11 UI00 / UI30 50 / 50 Output step 1
(first from left)
LED 2 /12 UI01 / UI31 51 / 51 Output step 2

LED 3 /13 UI02 / UI32 14 / 0 Internal circuit water pump 1

LED 4 /14 UI03 / UI33 16 / 0 External circuit water pump
LED 5 /15 UI04 /UI34 23 / 23 Internal exchanger electric heater

LED 6 /16 UI05 /UI35 9* / 0 Sanitary water valve

LED 7 /17 UI06 /UI36 30 / 14 Boiler
LED symbol LED SBW600 Parameter SBW600
on display
Economy LED UI07=0 UI07=0 UI07=1 NOT enabled
dS00=0 dS00=1 dS00=0 (LED off)
Economy LED UI07=1 Enabled
dS00=1 (dynamic
setpoint)

* the LED is permanently on when in AS mode and with heating in progress, blinking when in AS mode and heating not in
progress

See Outputs: configuration table with the following exceptions:

Value Description Notes

±50 Power step 1 output
values used only for
Power step 2 output configuring the user interface
±51
LEDs, and associated with the
power steps requested by the
±52 Power step 3 output main temperature regulator

±53 Power step 4 output

…
±70 internal pump 1 output or
internal pump 2 output or
both
±71 external exchanger fan circuit
1 output
Or
external exchanger fan circuit
2 output
or both
±72 internal exchanger electric Digital
heater 1 output
Or values used only for
internal exchanger electric configuring the user interface
heater 2 output LEDs
or both
±73 external exchanger heater 1
output
or
external exchanger heater 2
output
or both
±74 circuit 1 heat pump lock
status
or
 Value Description Notes
circuit 2 heat pump lock
status
or both

UI07 Configuration of Economy LED

To configure the Economy LED (if=1,2 the economy LED on the display will be permanently on)
 0 = LED disabled
 1 = dynamic setpoint
 2 = heat pump lock

UI10 Select main display

Selects the main display
0 AiL1 analogue input 8 NOT USED
1 AiL2 analogue input 9 NOT USED
2 AiL3 analogue input 10 NOT USED
3 AiL4 analogue input 11 NOT USED
4 AiL5 analogue input 12 Clock
5 Remote terminal AIR1 analogue input 1 13 Setpoint set
6 Remote terminal AIR2 analogue input 2 14 Real setpoint
7 NOT USED

Which we will refer to as:

Display Display A Display B*

2 and a half digit display + sign,

4-digit clock display
see parameter UI11

UI11 Select main display (remote terminal) SKW1

Selects the main display* remote terminal
*Note: 2 and a half digit display + sign
See Ui10

UI20 Enable ACS in standby / Manual defrost function from [UP] key
To enable or disable the Sanitary water in standby function from [UP] key or manual defrost depending on model
 0 = Key not enabled for the function
 1 = Key enabled for the function
UI21 Enable mode function from key
Enables/disables mode selection ([esc] key) (mode function) from a key
 0 = Key not enabled for the function
 1 = Key enabled for the function
UI22 Enable disp function from key
Enables/disables configuration of the main display from a key [set] (disp function)
 0 = Key not enabled for the function
 1 = Key enabled for the function

UI23 Enable standby function from [DOWN] key

To enable or disable standby function from DOWN key
 0 = Key not enabled for the function
 1 = Key enabled for the function

UI24 Enable “set” function from key

Enables/disables access via the "set" to machine state menu and relative subfolders
 0 = Key not enabled for the function
 1 = Key enabled for the function

UI25 Setpoint edit function enable from main screen

Parameter allows you to enable Setpoint modification on the main display with the UP and DOWN keys.
 0 = Key not enabled for the function
 1 = Key enabled for the function
 Default icon on
parameter Key [prolonged press]
front panel
[UP] = Sanitary Water /
Manual defrost
UI20=1
depending on model
<IMG INFO>
56,7
39,65
1
2
51
-28,35
-1

UI21=1 [esc] = change-over mode

UI22=1 [set] = display disp

[DOWN] = Standby /
Local ON/OFF depending
UI23=1
on model
<IMG INFO>
56,7
38,5
1
2
51
-28,35
-1

UI24=1 [Set] = modify SetPoint None (set key)

Default icon on
parameter Key (press and release)
front panel
None (UP and
UI25=1 UP / DOWN
DOWN keys)

UI27 Installation password

Installation password.
When enabled (value other than zero), constitutes the password for access to parameters
Values from 0 to 255
UI28 Manufacturer password
Manufacturer password
When enabled (value other than zero), constitutes the password for access to parameters
Values from 0 to 255

SKW utility led configuration

UI30 Configuration of LED 11
UI31 Configuration of LED 12
UI32 Configuration of LED 13
UI33 Configuration of LED 14
UI34 Configuration of LED 15
UI35 Configuration of LED 16
UI36 Configuration of LED 17
See LED table (parameters UI00..UI06)
 25.1.6 Temperature control parameters (tr) - temperature controller

Main temperature controller

tr00 Type of temperature controller
Sets the type of temperature controller
 0 = Proportional
 1 = Differential
 2 = Digital
 3 = INVERTER Proportional
 4 = INVERTER Differential
tr01 Enable heat pump
Enables/disables the heat pump
 0 = Heat pump absent
 1 = Heat pump present
tr02 Select temperature control probe in Cool
tr03 Select temperature control probe in Heat
Selects the temperature control probe in Cool/Heat modes
value
Internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature
0
(CL30…CL34=0)
Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature
1
(CL30…CL34=1)
Circuit 1 and 2 internal exchanger water outlet average temperature
2
Average ((CL30…CL34=2), (CL30…CL34=3))
External exchanger inlet water temperature
3
(CL30…CL34=6)
External exchanger outlet water temperature
4
(CL30…CL34=7)
Circuit 1 and 2 external exchanger average temperature
5
Average ((CL30…CL34=4), (CL30…CL34=5))

tr04 Select probe for temperature control differential in Cool

tr05 Select probe for temperature control differential in Heat
Selects the probe for temperature control differential in Cool/Heat modes
value Probe 1 Probe 2
Internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature
0
(CL30…CL34=0)
Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature
1
(CL30…CL34=1)
Circuit 1 and 2 internal exchanger water outlet average temperature External temperature NTC input
2 (CL30…CL34=8)
Average ((CL30…CL34=2), (CL30…CL34=3))
External exchanger inlet water temperature
3
(CL30…CL34=6)
External exchanger outlet water temperature
4
(CL30…CL34=7)
Circuit 1 and 2 external exchanger average temperature
5
Average ((CL30…CL34=4), (CL30…CL34=5))

Cool mode setpoint, hysteresis, differentials

tr10 Temperature control setpoint in Cool
Modifies the temperature control setpoint in Cool mode
tr11 Minimum temperature control setpoint in Cool
Modifies the minimum temperature control setpoint in Cool mode
tr12 Maximum temperature control setpoint in Cool
Modifies the maximum temperature control setpoint in Cool mode
tr13 Temperature control hysteresis in Cool
tr14 Steps/compressors insertion differential in Cool
tr15 Setpoint differential in Cool from economy input
Modifies the setpoint differential in Cool mode from economy input

Heat mode setpoint, hysteresis, differentials

tr20 Temperature control setpoint in Heat
Modifies the temperature control setpoint in Heat mode
tr21 Minimum temperature control setpoint in Heat
Modifies the minimum temperature control setpoint in Heat mode
tr22 Maximum temperature control setpoint in Heat
Modifies the maximum temperature control setpoint in Heat mode
tr23 Temperature control hysteresis in Heat
Modifies the temperature control hysteresis in Cool/Heat modes
tr24 Steps/compressors insertion differential in Heat
Modifies the steps/compressors insertion differential in Cool/Heat modes
tr25 Setpoint differential in Heat from economy input
Modifies the setpoint differential in Heat mode from economy input
tr30 Temperature controller hysteresis with inverter in Cool
To modify temperature control hysteresis with INVERTER in Cool mode
tr31 Temperature controller band with inverter in Cool
To modify the proportional band of the temperature controller with INVERTER in Cool mode
tr32 Minimum speed with inverter in Cool
To modify the minimum speed of the compressor with INVERTER in Cool mode
tr33 Maximum speed with inverter in Cool
To modify the maximum speed of the compressor with INVERTER in Cool mode
tr34 Inverter/compressors insertion differential in Cool
To modify the compressor / INVERTER insertion differential in Cool mode

tr40 Temperature controller hysteresis with inverter in Heat

To modify temperature control hysteresis with INVERTER in Heat mode
tr41 Temperature controller band with inverter in Heat
To modify the proportional band of the temperature controller with INVERTER in Heat mode
tr42 Minimum speed with inverter in Heat
To modify the minimum speed of the compressor with INVERTER in Heat mode
tr43 Maximum speed with inverter in Heat
To modify the maximum speed of the compressor with INVERTER in Heat mode
tr44 Inverter/compressors insertion differential in Heat
To modify the compressor / INVERTER insertion differential in Heat

25.1.7 Mode selection parameters (St) - Operating modes

Operating mode
St00 Select operating modes
Selects the operating mode
 0 = cool only
 1 = heat only
 2 = Heat pump heat/cool

Value Mode Description

0 Cool only Only OFF, STAND-BY and COOL allowed (local and remote).
1 Heat only Only OFF, STAND-BY and HEAT allowed (local and remote).
Heat pump All modes allowed.
2
heat/cool

Change-over
St01 Enable changeover from analogue input
Enables operating mode changeover from analogue input
 0 = not enabled
 1 = enabled
St02 Select probe for automatic changeover of operating mode
Selects the probe for automatic changeover of the operating mode
 0 = external temperature
 1 = internal exchanger inlet water temperature
 2 = internal exchanger water outlet temperature
St03 Differential for automatic mode change in Heat
Modifies the differential for the automatic mode change in Heat mode
St04 Differential for automatic mode change in Cool
Modifies the differential for the automatic mode change in Cool mode
Reversal valve
St05 Reversal valve switching delay
In seconds.
 25.1.8 Compressor Parameters (CP) - Compressor
Type of plant
CP00 Compressor type
Selects the type of compressor
 0 = simple (non-power stage)
 1 = alternate power stage
 2 = screw power stage
CP01 Number of circuits
Selects the number of circuits
 1 = 1 circuit
 2 = 2 circuits
CP02 Number of compressors per circuit
Selects the number of compressors per circuit
 1 = 1 compressor
 2 = 2 compressors
 3 = 3 compressors
 4 = 4 compressors
CP03 Number of power stages per compressor
Selects the number of compressors per circuit
 1 = 1 power stage
 2 = 2 power stages
 3 = 3 power stages

Plant resource management

CP10 Enable circuit balancing
Establishes circuit management
 0 = saturation (circuits)
 1 = balancing (circuits)
CP11 Enable compressor balancing
Establishes circuit management
 0 = saturation (compressors)
 1 = balancing (compressors)
 2 = NOT USED
CP12 Circuit selection criterion
Establishes circuit selection
 0 = hours balancing
 1 = on sequence 1-->2; off sequence 2-->1
CP13 Compressor selection criterion
Establishes the selection of compressors on each circuit
 0 = hours balancing
 1 = on sequence 1-->2-->3-->4; off sequence 4-->3-->2-->1
 2 = operating time
CP14 Compressor running time for switch on sequence
Modifies the compressor running time for the switch on sequence

Compressor Protection
CP20 Minimum time between the switching off and on of the same compressor
Modifies the minimum time between the switching off and on of the same compressor
CP21 Minimum time between the switching on of the same compressor
Modifies the minimum time between the switching on of the same compressor
CP22 Minimum compressor on time
Modifies the minimum compressor switch on time
CP23 Minimum time between the switching on of more than one compressor
Modifies the minimum time between the switching on of more than one compressor
CP24 Minimum time between the switching off of more than one compressor
Modifies the minimum time between the switching off of more than one compressor
CP25 Minimum compressor switch on time for increase in power stages
Modifies the minimum compressor switch on time for an increase in power stages
CP26 Minimum compressor switch on time for decrease in power stages
Modifies the minimum compressor switch on time for a decrease in power stages
CP27 Defrost compressor/step delay minimum
Modifies the minimum time between the switching off and on in defrost
 25.1.9 Internal circuit pump parameters (PI) - Internal pump

PI00 Select internal circuit water pump operating mode

To select operating mode of the internal circuit water pump
0 Pump disabled
1 Continuous (always on)
2 on request (pump on when compressor on)

PI01 Internal circuit water pump idle time due to antilock

Modifies the internal circuit water pump idle time due to antilock
PI02 Internal circuit water pump pick-up time
Modifies the internal circuit water pump pick-up time
PI03 Minimum internal circuit water pump start time
Modifies the minimum compressor switch on time
PI05 Maximum internal circuit water pump changeover start time
Pump operation time, after which the active pump is switched off and replaced by the second pump if available. If = 0 the
second pump is not called
PI10 Enable internal circuit water pump on when antifreeze heaters active
Enables the switching on of the internal circuit water pump when the antifreeze heaters are active
 0 = Pump disabled
 1 = Pump enabled
PI11 Enable internal circuit special water pump
 0 = No enabling
 1 = Enable pump when the boiler is on
 2 = Enable modulating pump on the basis of the difference between Internal exchanger water/air inlet
temperature and Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature. See configuration of analogue inputs

Operation on call
PI20 Delay internal circuit water pump on and compressor on
Modifies the delay between switching on the internal circuit water pump and switching on the compressor
PI21 Delay compressor off - internal circuit water pump off
Modifies the delay between switching off the compressor and switching off the internal circuit water pump
PI22 Internal circuit pump periodic activation interval
Modifies the maximum pump off time after which the pump is forced on
If modulating, it will be switched on a maximum speed

Modulating function in Cool mode

PI30 Minimum internal circuit water pump speed in Cool
Modifies the minimum internal circuit water pump speed in Cool mode
PI31 Maximum internal circuit water pump speed in Cool
Modifies the maximum internal circuit water pump speed in Cool mode
PI32 Minimum internal circuit water pump speed setpoint in Cool
Modifies the minimum internal circuit water pump speed setpoint in Cool mode
PI33 Internal circuit water pump proportional band in Cool
Modifies the internal circuit water pump proportional band in Cool mode
PI34 Fan speed setpoint to modulate internal circuit water pump in Cool
Modifies the fan speed setpoint to modulate the internal circuit water pump in Cool mode
PI35 Fan speed hysteresis to modulate internal circuit water pump in Cool
Modifies fan speed hysteresis for modulation of the internal circuit water pump in Cool mode

Modulating function in Heat mode

PI40 Minimum internal circuit water pump speed in Heat
Modifies the minimum internal circuit water pump speed in Heat mode
PI41 Maximum internal circuit water pump speed in Heat
Modifies the maximum internal circuit water pump speed in Heat mode
PI42 Minimum internal circuit water pump speed setpoint in Heat
Modifies the minimum internal circuit water pump speed setpoint in Heat mode
PI43 Internal circuit water pump proportional band in Heat
Modifies the internal circuit water pump proportional band in Heat mode
PI44 Fan speed setpoint to modulate internal circuit water pump in Heat
Modifies the fan speed setpoint to modulate the internal circuit water pump in Heat mode
PI45 Fan speed hysteresis to modulate internal circuit water pump in Heat
Modifies fan speed hysteresis for modulation of the internal circuit water pump in Heat mode
 Antifreeze with pump
PI50 Select antifreeze function probe with internal circuit water pump
To enable or disable the antifreeze function with internal circuit water pump
Value Probe
0 No probe (pump in antifreeze disabled)
1 Internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature
2 Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature
3 Internal exchanger water outlet temperature circuit 1
4 Internal exchanger water outlet temperature circuit 2
5 Circuit 1 and 2 internal exchanger water outlet minimum temperature
6 External temperature

PI51 Internal circuit water pump regulator setpoint for antifreeze

Modifies the internal circuit water pump regulator setpoint for antifreeze
PI52 Internal circuit water pump regulator hysteresis for antifreeze
Modifies the internal circuit water pump regulator hysteresis for antifreeze

25.1.10 Recirculation fan parameters (FI) - Internal Fan

FI00 Select recirculation fan operation

To select the operating mode of the recirculation fan
 0 = recirculation fan disabled
 1 = Always on
 2 = On request
FI01 Recirculation fan regulator hysteresis in Cool mode
Modifies the recirculation fan regulator hysteresis in Cool mode
FI02 Recirculation fan regulator hysteresis in Heat mode
Modifies the recirculation fan regulator hysteresis in Heat mode
FI03 Postventilation time in Heat mode
Modifies postventilation time in Heat mode

25.1.11 Secondary (external) exchanger fan parameters (FE) - External Fan

FE00 Select external exchanger fan operating mode
To select the operating mode of the external exchanger fan
 0 = fan disabled
 1 = Continuous operation (Always ON)
 2 = Operation on call (ON with compressor ON)
FE01 External exchanger fan pick-up time
To vary the pick up time of the external exchanger fan
FAN CONTROL IN DEFROST
FE10 Fan control with single condensation
Configures 2 circuit machines with a single condenser
 0 = separate condensation / independent fans
 1 = single condensation / in parallel
FE11 Enable special open system intercooler fan on
To enable special activation of the external exchanger fan
 0 = Function disabled
 1 = Fan enabled in defrost mode
 2 = Fan enabled in relation to external exchanger heaters
FE12 External exchanger fan on setpoint in defrost
Modifies the external exchanger fan on setpoint in defrost
FE13 External exchanger fan on hysteresis in defrost
Modifies the external exchanger fan on hysteresis in defrost
FE14 Select probe for external exchanger fan regulation in defrost
To select the probe to control the external exchanger fan in defrost
 0 = Probe absent
 1 = External exchanger temperature probe (circuit 1 e 2)
 2 = High pressure probe (circuit 1 e 2)
 3 = External exchanger pressure probe (circuit 1 e 2)
FE20 Bypass time for external exchanger fan cut-off
Modifies the bypass time of the external exchanger fan cut-off
FE21 External exchanger fan preventilation time
To modify the preventilation time of the external exchanger fan
 FAN CONTROL IN COOLING
FE30 Minimum speed external exchanger fan in Cool
Modifies the minimum speed of the external exchanger fan in Cool mode
FE31 Average speed external exchanger fan in Cool
Modifies the average speed of the external exchanger fan in Cool mode
FE32 Maximum speed external exchanger fan in Cool
Modifies the maximum speed of the external exchanger fan in Cool mode
FE33 Select probe for external exchanger fan regulation in Cool
To select the probe to control the external exchanger fan in Cool mode

Value Description Regulation

0 No probe On or On/Off
1 External exchanger temperature (circuit 1 and 2) Direct
2 High pressure input (circuit 1 and 2) Direct
3 Low pressure input (circuit 1 and 2) Reversal
4 External exchanger pressure (circuit 1 and 2) Direct
5 Internal exchanger pressure (circuit 1 and 2) Reversal
6 Internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature Direct
7 Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature Direct

FE34 External exchanger fan minimum speed setpoint in Cool

Modifies the minimum speed setpoint of the external exchanger fan in Cool mode
FE35 External exchanger maximum speed differential in Cool
Modifies the maximum speed differential of the external exchanger fan in Cool mode
FE36 External exchanger fan speed proportional band in Cool
Modifies the proportional band of the external exchanger fan speed in Cool mode
FE37 Maximum external exchanger fan hysteresis in Cool mode
Modifies the maximum hysteresis of the external exchanger fan speed in Cool mode
FE38 External exchanger fan cut-off hysteresis in Cool
Modifies the cut-off hysteresis of the external exchanger fan in Cool mode
FE39 External exchanger fan cut-off differential in Cool
Modifies the cut-off differential for the external exchanger fan in Cool mode

FAN CONTROL IN HEATING

FE50 Minimum speed external exchanger fan in Heat
Modifies the minimum speed of the external exchanger fan in Heat mode
FE51 Average speed external exchanger fan in Heat
Modifies the average speed of the external exchanger fan in Heat mode
FE52 Maximum speed external exchanger fan in Heat
Modifies the maximum speed of the external exchanger fan in Heat mode
FE53 Select probe for external exchanger fan regulation in Heat
To select the probe to control the external exchanger fan in Heat mode

Value Description Regulation

0 No probe On or On/Off
1 External exchanger temperature (circuit 1 and 2) Direct
2 High pressure input (circuit 1 and 2) Direct
3 Low pressure input (circuit 1 and 2) Reversal
4 External exchanger pressure (circuit 1 and 2) Direct
5 Internal exchanger pressure (circuit 1 and 2) Reversal
6 Internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature Direct
7 Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature Direct

FE54 Minimum external exchanger fan speed setpoint in Heat

Modifies the minimum speed setpoint of the external exchanger fan in Heat mode
FE55 Maximum external exchanger speed differential in Heat
Modifies the maximum speed differential of the external exchanger fan in Heat mode
FE56 External exchanger fan speed proportional band in Heat
Modifies the proportional band of the external exchanger fan speed in Heat mode
FE57 Maximum external exchanger fan speed hysteresis in Heat
Modifies the maximum hysteresis of the external exchanger fan speed in Heat mode
FE58 External exchanger fan cut-off hysteresis in Heat
Modifies the cut-off hysteresis of the external exchanger fan in Heat mode
FE59 External exchanger fan cut-off differential in Heat
Modifies the cut-off differential for the external exchanger fan in Heat mode

25.1.12 External circuit pump parameters (PE) - External Pump

PE00 External circuit water pump mode selection
Defines the operation of the external circuit water pump
 0 = Pump disabled
 1 = Continuous operation (Always ON)
 2 = NOT USED
 3 = Operation synchronised with external exchanger fans
 25.1.13 Electric heater parameters (HI) - Electric Heaters

HI00 Enable internal exchanger heaters in Standby

To enable or disable external exchanger heaters in standby
 0 = Heaters disabled
 1 = Heaters enabled
HI01 Enable force heaters on during defrost
To enable or disable force heaters on during defrost
 0 = Heaters enabled (ON) when requested by temperature controller (antifreeze or integrated use)
 1 = Heaters always enabled ON during defrost

ANTIFREEZE
HI10 Select probe to regulate internal exchanger heater 1 during antifreeze
To select the probe for regulation of internal exchanger heaters during antifreeze
 0 = Internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature
 1 = Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature
HI11 Select probe to regulate internal exchanger heater 2 during antifreeze
To select the probe for regulation of internal exchanger heaters during antifreeze
Value Hi10 / Hi11 Probe
0 No probe (antifreeze heater disabled)
1 Internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature
2 Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature
3 Circuit 1 internal exchanger water outlet temperature
4 Circuit 2 internal exchanger water outlet temperature
5 Circuit 1 and 2 internal exchanger water outlet minimum temperature

HI12 Internal exchanger heater regulator setpoint for antifreeze

Modifies the internal exchanger heater regulator setpoint for antifreeze
HI13 Maximum internal exchanger heater regulator setpoint for antifreeze
Modifies the maximum setpoint of the internal exchanger heater regulator for antifreeze
HI14 Minimum internal exchanger heater regulator setpoint for antifreeze
Modifies the minimum setpoint of the internal exchanger heater regulator for antifreeze
HI15 Internal exchanger heater regulator hysteresis for antifreeze
Modifies the hysteresis of the internal exchanger heater regulator for antifreeze

INTEGRATION
HI20 Selects internal exchanger heater operation for integration
To enable or disable integrated use of internal exchanger heaters

Value Description
0 Integration heaters disabled
1 Integration heaters with differential setpoint proportional to external temperature
2 Integration heaters with differential setpoint in steps to external temperature
3 Integration heaters with differential setpoint fixed

Internal exchanger heater dynamic differential setpoint in integrated use

HI21 Modifies the dynamic differential setpoint of the internal exchanger heaters in integrated use
HI22 Maximum dynamic differential internal exchanger heaters in integrated use
Modifies the maximum dynamic differential of the internal exchanger heaters in integrated use
HI23 Heater differential in integration mode with heat pump lock
Modifies the start differential of the internal exchanger heaters in integrated use in case of heat pump lock
HI24 Internal exchanger heater dynamic differential proportional band in integrated use
Modifies the proportional band of the dynamic differential of the internal exchanger heaters in integrated use
HI25 Internal exchanger heater regulator hysteresis in integrated use
Modifies the hysteresis of the internal exchanger heaters in integrated use
HI26 Differential setpoint internal exchanger heater 2 on in integrated use
Modifies the differential setpoint to switch on internal exchanger heater 2 in integrated use
 25.1.14 External exchanger electric heater parameters (HE) - Electric Heaters

HE00 Enable external exchanger heaters in Standby

To enable or disable external exchanger heaters for antifreeze
 0 = Heaters disabled
 1 = Heaters enabled
HE10 Select probe to regulate external exchanger heater1 during antifreeze
To select the probe to control the external exchanger heaters during antifreeze
Value Probe
0 No probe (antifreeze heater disabled)
1 External exchanger average temperature circuit 1 and 2
2 Recovery (or external) exchanger inlet water temperature
3 Recovery (or external) exchanger water outlet temperature
4 External temperature

HE11 Select probe to regulate external exchanger heater 2 during antifreeze

To select the probe to control the external exchanger heaters during antifreeze
As for HE10
HE12 External exchanger heater switch on setpoint for antifreeze
Modifies the external exchanger switch on setpoint for antifreeze
HE13 Maximum external exchanger heater regulator setpoint for antifreeze
Modifies the maximum setpoint of the external exchanger heater regulator for antifreeze
HE14 Minimum external exchanger heater regulator setpoint for antifreeze
Modifies the minimum setpoint of the external exchanger heater regulator for antifreeze
HE15 External exchanger heater regulator hysteresis for antifreeze
Modifies the regulator hysteresis of external exchanger heaters for antifreeze

25.1.15 Auxiliary output parameters (HA) - Auxiliary Output

HA00 Select probe for auxiliary output

Selects the probe for regulation of the auxiliary output
Value Probe
0 No probe (auxiliary output disabled)
1 External temperature
2 External exchanger temperature circuit 1
3 External exchanger temperature circuit 2
4 Recovery (or external) exchanger inlet water temperature
5 Recovery (or external) exchanger water outlet temperature
6 NOT USED

HA01 Auxiliary heater regulator setpoint

Sets the auxiliary output regulator setpoint
HA02 Auxiliary heater regulator hysteresis
Sets the auxiliary output regulator hysteresis

25.1.16 Boiler parameters (br) -boiler

br00 Select boiler mode
Selects the boiler mode
Value Description
0 Boiler disabled
1 Boiler with differential setpoint proportional to external temperature
2 Boiler with differential setpoint in steps as a function of external temperature
3 Boiler with differential setpoint fixed

br01 Boiler dynamic differential setpoint

Modifies the setpoint of the boiler dynamic differential
br02 Maximum boiler dynamic differential
Modifies the maximum dynamic differential of the boiler
br03 Boiler dynamic differential with heat pump lock
In case of heat pump block, the Boiler differential takes the fixed value of this parameter
br04 Boiler dynamic differential proportional band
Modifies the proportional band of the dynamic differential of the boiler
br05 Boiler regulator hysteresis
Modifies the hysteresis of the boiler regulator
 25.1.17 Defrost parameters (dF) - deFrost

dF00 Select defrost function

Selects the defrost function
Value Description
0 Defrost disabled
1 Simultaneous defrost (in double-circuit plants only)
2 Independent defrost in single or in double-circuit plants (only with separate condensation)

dF01 Enable maximum power for non-defrost circuit

Allows you to force the other circuit to maximum power (the circuit not to be defrosted), for reasons of compensation
0 = forcing the other circuit to maximum power disabled
1 = forcing the other circuit to maximum power enabled
Select probe to enable interval count between defrosts
dF10 To select the probe to enable the defrost interval count
Value Description
0 No probe
1 External exchanger temperature (circuit 1 and 2)
2 High pressure input (circuit 1 and 2)
3 Low pressure input (circuit 1 and 2)
4 External exchanger pressure (circuit 1 and 2)

dF11 Enable interval count between defrosts setpoint

Modifies the setpoint enabling the interval count between defrosts
dF12 Setpoint to clear cumulative time between defrosts
Modifies the setpoint clearing the cumulative time between defrosts
dF13 Cumulative interval between defrosts
Modifies the overall time between defrosts
dF14 Minimum interval between defrost cycles
Modifies the minimum interval between defrosts
dF20 Select probe to end defrost
To select the probe to end defrost
Value Description
0 No probe
1 External exchanger temperature (circuit 1 and 2)
2 High pressure input (circuit 1 and 2)
3 Low pressure input (circuit 1 and 2)
4 External exchanger pressure (circuit 1 and 2)

dF21 Defrost deactivation setpoint

Modifies the defrost deactivation setpoint
dF22 Maximum defrost time
Modifies the maximum defrost time
dF23 Coil drainage time
Modifies the coil drainage time

dF30 Maximum dynamic defrost differential

Modifies the maximum defrost dynamic differential
dF31 Defrost dynamic differential setpoint
Modifies the dynamic differential setpoint for defrost
dF32 Dynamic defrost differential proportional band
Modifies the proportional band of the dynamic defrost differential

25.1.18 Dynamic setpoint parameters (dS) - dynamic Setpoint

dS00 External temperature controller dynamic differential selection

Selects the external temperature controller dynamic differential
 0 = disabled
 1 = proportional
 2 = by steps
dS01 Temperature controller dynamic differential proportional band in Cool
dS02 Temperature controller dynamic differential proportional band in Heat
Modifies the proportional band of the temperature controller dynamic differential in Cool/Heat mode
dS03 Maximum temperature controller dynamic differential in Cool
dS04 Maximum temperature controller dynamic differential in Heat
Modifies the maximum dynamic differential of the temperature controller in Cool/Heat mode
dS05 Temperature controller dynamic differential setpoint in Cool
dS06 Temperature controller dynamic differential setpoint in Heat
Modifies the dynamic differential setpoint of the temperature controller in Cool/Heat mode
 25.1.19 Adaptive parameters (Ad) - Adaptive

Ad00 Select no accumulation mode

To select the type of accumulation compensation
 0 = accumulation disabled
 1 = Setpoint
 2 = Hysteresis
 3 = Setpoint and hysteresis
Ad01 Accumulation offset constant
Modifies the accumulator offset constant
Ad02 Accumulator offset differential
Modifies the accumulator offset differential
Ad03 Block accumulation offset setpoint in Cool mode
Modifies the block accumulation offset setpoint in Cool mode
Ad04 Block accumulation offset setpoint in heating mode
Modifies the block accumulation offset setpoint in Heat mode
Ad05 Compressor on time for accumulation offset/regression
Modifies the compressor on time for accumulation offset and regression
Ad06 Reference compressor on time for accumulation offset
Modifies the reference compressor on time for accumulation offset

25.1.20 Antifreeze parameters with heat pump (AF) - AntiFreeze

AF00 Select antifreeze function heat pump probe for circuit 1
To select the probe to control the heat pump in circuit 1 antifreeze
Value AF00 / AF01 Probe
0 No probe (anti-freeze function with heat pump disabled)
1 Internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature
2 Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature
3 Circuit 1 internal exchanger water outlet temperature
4 Circuit 2 internal exchanger water outlet temperature
5 Circuit 1 and 2 internal exchanger water outlet minimum temperature

AF01 Select antifreeze function heat pump probe for circuit 2

To select the probe to control the heat pump in circuit 2 antifreeze
As for AF00
AF02 Heat pump regulator setpoint for antifreeze
Modifies heat pump regulator setpoint for antifreeze
AF03 Block heat pump hysteresis in antifreeze
Modifies the hysteresis to block heat pump during antifreeze

25.1.21 Sanitary Water Parameters (AS)

AS00 Select ACS mode

To select the Sanitary Water operating mode
0 = Sanitary water disabled
1 = Enabled only heat pump for sanitary water (system with sanitary water valve)
2 = Enabled only sanitary water heater
3 = Enabled sanitary water heat pump and heater (system with sanitary water valve)
4 = Enabled only heat pump for sanitary water (system with sanitary water pump)
5 = Enabled only sanitary water heater
6 = Enabled sanitary water heat pump and heater (system with sanitary water pump)
AS01 ACS setpoint
To modify the sanitary water setpoint
AS02 ACS minimum setpoint
To limit the minimum configurable value of the sanitary water setpoint
AS03 ACS maximum setpoint
To limit the maximum configurable value of the sanitary water setpoint
AS04 ACS hysteresis
To modify the sanitary water hysteresis
AS05 ACS disengage setpoint differential
To modify the sanitary water disengage setpoint differential
AS06 ACS heater hysteresis
To modify the sanitary water heater hysteresis
AS07 ACS heater differential
To modify the sanitary water heater differential for anti-legionnaire's disease
AS08 ACS antifreeze setpoint
To modify the antifreeze setpoint value for sanitary water
AS09 ACS maximum activation time
To modify the maximum activation time of Sanitary Water mode
AS10 ACS minimum deactivation/activation time
To modify the minimum time between deactivation and activation of Sanitary Water mode
AS11 ACS setpoint dynamic constant
If different from 0 the dynamic setpoint is enabled
AS12 ACS system maximum temperature
To modify the maximum temperature value of the system for sanitary water
AS20 ACS setpoint for anti-legionnaire's disease
To limit the value of the sanitary water setpoint for anti-legionnaire's disease
AS21 Minimum ACS setpoint for anti-legionnaire's disease
To limit the minimum configurable value of setpoint AS20 - Sanitary water for anti-legionnaire's disease
AS22 Maximum ACS setpoint for anti-legionnaire's disease
To limit the maximum configurable value of setpoint AS20 - Sanitary water for anti-legionnaire's disease
AS23 ACS minimum deactivation/activation time for anti-legionnaire's disease
To modify the minimum time between deactivation and activation of Sanitary Water mode for anti-legionnaire's disease
AS25 Anti-legionnaire's disease period, day 1 (Monday)
In hours. 0=event disabled
AS26 Event hour, day 1 (Monday)
Determines the start time hour of the event [0…23]
AS27 Event minutes, day 1 (Monday)
Determines the start time minute of the event at a set hour [0…59]
AS28 Anti-legionnaire's disease period, day 2 (Tuesday)
In hours. 0=event disabled
AS29 Event hour, day 2 (Tuesday)
Determines the start time hour of the event [0…23]
AS30 Event minutes, day 2 (Tuesday)
Determines the start time minute of the event at a set hour [0…59]
AS31 Anti-legionnaire's disease period, day 3 (Wednesday)
In hours. 0=event disabled
AS32 Event hour, day 3 (Wednesday)
Determines the start time hour of the event [0…23]
AS33 Event minutes, day 3 (Wednesday)
Determines the start time minute of the event at a set hour [0…59]
AS34 Anti-legionnaire's disease period, day 4 (Thursday)
In hours. 0=event disabled
AS35 Event hour, day 4 (Thursday)
Determines the start time hour of the event [0…23]
AS36 Event minutes, day 4 (Thursday)
Determines the start time minute of the event at a set hour [0…59]
AS37 Anti-legionnaire's disease period, day 5 (Friday)
In hours. 0=event disabled
AS38 Event hour, day 5 (Friday)
Determines the start time hour of the event [0…23]
AS39 Event minutes, day 5 (Friday)
Determines the start time minute of the event at a set hour [0…59]
AS40 Anti-legionnaire's disease period, day 6 (Saturday)
In hours. 0=event disabled
AS41 Event hour, day 6 (Saturday)
Determines the start time hour of the event [0…23]
AS42 Event minutes, day 6 (Saturday)
Determines the start time minute of the event at a set hour [0…59]
AS43 Anti-legionnaire's disease period, day 7 (Sunday)
In hours. 0=event disabled
AS44 Event hour, day 7 (Sunday)
Determines the start time hour of the event [0…23]
AS45 Event minutes, day 7 (Sunday)
Determines the start time minute of the event at a set hour [0…59]
 25.1.22 Heat pump block parameters (HP) - Heat Pump
HP00 Select heat pump lock probe circuit 1
To select the probe to block the heat pump in circuit 1 antifreeze

Value Probe Mode

0 No probe (block pump disabled) -
1 External temperature Heating
2 Internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature Cooling
3 Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature Cooling
4 Circuit 1 and 2 internal exchanger water outlet average temperature Cooling
5 Recovery (or external) exchanger inlet water temperature Cooling
6 Recovery (or external) exchanger water outlet temperature Cooling
7 Circuit 1 and 2 external exchanger average temperature Cooling

HP01 Heat pump lock setpoint

Sets the heat pump 1 regulator setpoint
HP02 Boiler regulator hysteresis
Modifies heat pump 1 regulator hysteresis
HP03 Block heat pump 1 maximum differential
Modifies the block heat pump differential circuit 1
HP04 Block heat pump circuit 1 differential setpoint
Modifies the block heat pump differential setpoint circuit 1
HP05 Block heat pump proportional band circuit 1
Modifies the block heat pump proportional band circuit 1

HP10 Select heat pump lock probe circuit 2

To select the probe to block the heat pump in circuit 2 antifreeze
As for HP00
HP11 Heat pump 2 lock setpoint
Sets the heat pump 2 regulator setpoint
HP12 Hysteresis Heat pump 2 lock
Modifies heat pump 2 regulator hysteresis
 25.1.23 Power limitation parameters (PL) - Power Limitation
Power limitation on external temperature
PL00 Power limitation on external temperature proportional band
Modifies the proportional band for power limitation on external temperature
PL01 External temperature setpoint for power limitation in Cool
Modifies the external temperature setpoint for power limitation in Cool mode
PL02 External temperature setpoint for power limitation in Heat
Modifies the external temperature setpoint for power limitation in Heat mode

Power limitation on temperature

PL10 Power limitation on water/air temperature proportional band
Modifies the proportional band for power limitation on temperature
PL11 Select probe for power limitation on water/air temperature
To select the probe for power limitation
Value Probe
0 No probe (regulator disabled)
1 Internal exchanger water/air inlet temperature
2 Internal exchanger water/air outlet temperature
3 Circuit 1 and 2 internal exchanger water outlet average temperature
4 Recovery (or external) exchanger inlet water temperature
5 Recovery (or external) exchanger water outlet temperature
6 Circuit 1 and 2 external exchanger average temperature

PL12 High temperature setpoint for power limitation

Modifies the high temperature setpoint for power limitation
PL13 Low temperature setpoint for power limitation
Modifies the low temperature setpoint for power limitation

Power limitation on pressure

PL20 Power limitation on pressure proportional band
Modifies the proportional band for power limitation on pressure
PL21 High pressure setpoint for power limitation
Modifies the high pressure setpoint for power limitation
PL22 Low pressure setpoint for power limitation
Modifies the low pressure setpoint for power limitation

25.1.24 Time Band Parameters (tE)

tE00 Enable time band operation
To enable or disable time band operation
0= time bands disabled
1= time bands enabled
tE01 Select profile, day 1 (Monday)
To select the profile of the first day of the week
 1= Profile 1
 2= Profile 2
 3= Profile 3
tE02 Select profile, day 2 (Tuesday)
To select the profile of the second day of the week - See tE01
tE03 Select profile, day 3 (Wednesday)
To select the profile of the third day of the week - See tE01
tE04 Select profile, day 4 (Thursday)
To select the profile of the fourth day of the week - See tE01
tE05 Select profile, day 5 (Friday)
To select the profile of the fifth day of the week - See tE01
tE06 Select profile, day 6 (Saturday)
To select the profile of the sixth day of the week - See tE01
tE07 Select profile, day 7 (Sunday)
To select the profile of the seventh day of the week - See tE01

PROFILE 1
EVENT 1 / PROFILE 1
tE10 Event start time hour 1, profile 1
Determines the start time hour of the event [0…23]
tE11 Event start time minutes 1, profile 1
Determines the start time minute of the event at a set hour [0…59]
tE12 Operating mode from event 1, profile 1
Determines the operating mode of Energy Flex during the event
 0= ON
 1 = Standby
tE13 Cool mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 1, profile 1
Determines the Cool setpoint to use during the event (with Energy Flex in Cool mode)
tE14 Heat mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 1, profile 1
Determines the Heat setpoint to use during the event (with Energy Flex in Heat mode)
tE15 ACS setpoint, from event 1, profile 1
Determines the Sanitary Water setpoint to use during the event
 EVENT 2 / PROFILE 1
tE17 Event start time hour 2, profile 1
Determines the start time hour of the event [0…23]
tE18 Event start time minutes 2 profile 1
Determines the start time minute of the event at a set hour [0…59]
tE19 Operating mode from event 2, profile 1
Determines the operating mode of Energy Flex during the event
 0= ON
 1 = Standby
tE20 Cool mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 2, profile 1
Determines the Cool setpoint to use during the event (with Energy Flex in Cool mode)
tE21 Heat mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 2, profile 1
Determines the Heat setpoint to use during the event (with Energy Flex in Heat mode)
tE22 ACS setpoint, from event 2, profile 1
Determines the sanitary water setpoint to use during the event

EVENT 3 / PROFILE 1
tE24 Event start time hour 3, profile 1
Determines the start time hour of the event [0…23]
tE25 Event start time minutes 3, profile 1
Determines the start time minute of the event at a set hour [0…59]
tE26 Operating mode from event 3, profile 1
Determines the operating mode of Energy Flex during the event
 0= ON
 1 = Standby
tE27 Cool mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 3, profile 1
Determines the Cool setpoint to use during the event (with Energy Flex in Cool mode)
tE28 Heat mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 3, profile 1
Determines the Heat setpoint to use during the event (with Energy Flex in Heat mode)
tE29 ACS setpoint, from event 3, profile 1
Determines the sanitary water setpoint to use during the event

EVENT 4 / PROFILE 1
tE31 Event start time hour 4, profile 1
Determines the start time hour of the event [0…23]
tE32 Event start time minutes 4, profile 1
Determines the start time minute of the event at a set hour [0…59]
tE33 Operating mode from event 4, profile 1
Determines the operating mode of Energy Flex during the event
 0= ON
 1 = Standby
tE34 Cool mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 4, profile 1
Determines the Cool setpoint to use during the event (with Energy Flex in Cool mode)
tE35 Heat mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 4, profile 1
Determines the Heat setpoint to use during the event (with Energy Flex in Heat mode)
tE36 ACS setpoint, from event 4, profile 1
Determines the sanitary water setpoint to use during the event

PROFILE 2

EVENT 1 / PROFILE 2
tE38 Event start time hour 1, profile 2
Determines the start time hour of the event [0…23]
tE39 Event start time minutes 1, profile 2
Determines the start time minute of the event at a set hour [0…59]
tE40 Operating mode from event 1, profile 2
Determines the operating mode of Energy Flex during the event
 0= ON
 1 = Standby
tE41 Cool mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 1, profile 2
Determines the Cool setpoint to use during the event (with Energy Flex in Cool mode)
tE42 Heat mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 1, profile 2
Determines the Heat setpoint to use during the event (with Energy Flex in Heat mode)
tE43 ACS setpoint, from event 1, profile 2
Determines the sanitary water setpoint to use during the event

EVENT 2 / PROFILE 2
tE45 Event start time hour 2, profile 2
Determines the start time hour of the event [0…23]
tE46 Event start time minutes 2 profile 2
Determines the start time minute of the event at a set hour [0…59]
tE47 Operating mode from event 2, profile 2
Determines the operating mode of Energy Flex during the event
 0= ON
  1 = Standby
tE48 Cool mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 2, profile 2
Determines the Cool setpoint to use during the event (with Energy Flex in Cool mode)
tE49 Heat mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 2, profile 2
Determines the Heat setpoint to use during the event (with Energy Flex in Heat mode)
tE50 ACS setpoint, from event 2, profile 2
Determines the sanitary water setpoint to use during the event

EVENT 3 / PROFILE 2
tE52 Event start time hour 3, profile 2
Determines the start time hour of the event [0…23]
tE53 Event start time minutes 3, profile 2
Determines the start time minute of the event at a set hour [0…59]
tE54 Operating mode from event 3, profile 2
Determines the operating mode of Energy Flex during the event
 0= ON
 1 = Standby
tE55 Cool mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 3, profile 2
Determines the Cool setpoint to use during the event (with Energy Flex in Cool mode)
tE56 Heat mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 3, profile 2
Determines the Heat setpoint to use during the event (with Energy Flex in Heat mode)
tE57 ACS setpoint, from event 3, profile 2
Determines the sanitary water setpoint to use during the event

EVENT 4 / PROFILE 2
tE59 Event start time hour 4, profile 2
Determines the start time hour of the event [0…23]
tE60 Event start time minutes 4, profile 2
Determines the start time minute of the event at a set hour [0…59]
tE61 Operating mode from event 4, profile 2
Determines the operating mode of Energy Flex during the event
 0= ON
 1 = Standby
tE62 Cool mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 4, profile 2
Determines the Cool setpoint to use during the event (with Energy Flex in Cool mode)
tE63 Heat mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 4, profile 2
Determines the Heat setpoint to use during the event (with Energy Flex in Heat mode)
tE64 ACS setpoint, from event 4, profile 2
Determines the sanitary water setpoint to use during the event

PROFILE 3

EVENT 1 / PROFILE 3
tE66 Event start time hour 1, profile 3
Determines the start time hour of the event [0…23]
tE67 Event start time minutes 1, profile 3
Determines the start time minute of the event at a set hour [0…59]
tE68 Operating mode from event 1, profile 3
Determines the operating mode of Energy Flex during the event
 0= ON
 1 = Standby
tE69 Cool mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 1, profile 3
Determines the Cool setpoint to use during the event (with Energy Flex in Cool mode)
tE70 Heat mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 1, profile 3
Determines the Heat setpoint to use during the event (with Energy Flex in Heat mode)
tE71 ACS setpoint, from event 1, profile 3
Determines the sanitary water setpoint to use during the event

EVENT 2 / PROFILE 3
tE73 Event start time hour 2, profile 3
Determines the start time hour of the event [0…23]
tE74 Event start time minutes 2 profile 3
Determines the start time minute of the event at a set hour [0…59]
tE75 Operating mode from event 2, profile 3
Determines the operating mode of Energy Flex during the event
 0= ON
 1 = Standby
tE76 Cool mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 2, profile 3
Determines the Cool setpoint to use during the event (with Energy Flex in Cool mode)
tE77 Heat mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 2, profile 3
Determines the Heat setpoint to use during the event (with Energy Flex in Heat mode)
tE78 ACS setpoint, from event 2, profile 3
Determines the sanitary water setpoint to use during the event

EVENT 3 / PROFILE 3
tE80 Event start time hour 3, profile 3
Determines the start time hour of the event [0…23]
tE81 Event start time minutes 3, profile 3
Determines the start time minute of the event at a set hour [0…59]
tE82 Operating mode from event 3, profile 3
Determines the operating mode of Energy Flex during the event
 0= ON
 1 = Standby
tE83 Cool mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 3, profile 3
Determines the Cool setpoint to use during the event (with Energy Flex in Cool mode)
tE84 Heat mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 3, profile 3
Determines the Heat setpoint to use during the event (with Energy Flex in Heat mode)
tE85 ACS setpoint, from event 3, profile 3
Determines the sanitary water setpoint to use during the event

EVENT 4 / PROFILE 3
tE87 Event start time hour 4, profile 3
Determines the start time hour of the event [0…23]
tE88 Event start time minutes 4, profile 3
Determines the start time minute of the event at a set hour [0…59]
tE89 Operating mode from event 4, profile 3
Determines the operating mode of Energy Flex during the event
 0= ON
 1 = Standby
tE90 Cool mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 4, profile 3
Determines the Cool setpoint to use during the event (with Energy Flex in Cool mode)
tE91 Heat mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 4, profile 3
Determines the Heat setpoint to use during the event (with Energy Flex in Heat mode)
tE92 ACS setpoint, from event 4, profile 3
Determines the sanitary water setpoint to use during the event
 25.1.25 Alarm parameters (AL) - ALarm

AL00 Time interval for alarm event count

Modifies the interval in which alarm events are counted
AL00 is expressed in minutes.
Alarms are counted every AL00/32 (minutes) = sample time.
AL01 Maximum number of events in alarm log
Modifies the maximum number of events stored in the alarm log

DIGITAL ALARMS
AL10 Number of high pressure alarms
Modifies the number of high pressure alarms
AL11 Low pressure alarm bypass time
Modifies the low pressure alarm bypass time
AL12 Number of low pressure alarms
Modifies the number of low pressure alarms
AL13 Enable low pressure alarm during defrost
To enable or disable the low pressure alarm during defrost
 0 = Alarm disabled
 1 = Alarm enabled
AL14 Bypass flow switch time from activation of the internal circuit water pump
Modifies the bypass flow switch time from activation of the internal circuit water pump
AL15 Flow switch activation time for internal circuit automatic alarms
Modifies the activation time of the flow switch for internal circuit automatic alarms
AL16 Flow switch activation time for internal circuit manual alarm
Modifies the activation time of the flow switch for internal circuit manual alarms
AL17 Bypass flow switch time from activation of the external circuit water pump
Modifies the flow switch bypass time from activation of the external circuit water pump
AL18 Flow switch activation time for external circuit automatic alarms
Modifies the activation time of the flow switch for external circuit automatic alarms
AL19 Flow switch activation time for external circuit manual alarm
Modifies the activation time of the flow switch for external circuit manual alarms
AL20 Compressor thermal switch alarm bypass time
Modifies the bypass time of the compressor thermal switch alarm
AL21 Number of compressor thermal switch alarms
Modifies the number of compressor thermal switch alarms
AL22 Compressor oil pressure switch alarm bypass time
Modifies the compressor oil pressure switch alarm bypass time
AL23 Number of compressor oil pressure switch alarms
Modifies the number of compressor oil pressure switch alarms
AL24 Number of internal exchanger fan thermal switch alarms
Modifies the number of internal exchanger fan thermal switch alarms
AL25 Number of external exchanger fan thermal switch alarms
Modifies the number of external exchanger fan thermal switch alarms
AL26 Number of internal circuit pump thermoswitch alarms
To modify the number of internal circuit pump thermoswitch alarms
AL27 Number of external circuit pump thermoswitch alarms
To modify the number of external circuit pump thermoswitch alarms

ANALOGUE ALARMS
AL40 High pressure alarm regulator setpoint from analogue input
Modifies the setpoint of the high pressure alarm regulator from analogue input
AL41 High pressure alarm regulator hysteresis from analogue input
Modifies the hysteresis of the high pressure alarm regulator from analogue input
AL42 Number of high pressure alarms from analogue input
Modifies the number of high pressure alarms from analogue input
AL43 Low pressure alarm bypass time from analogue input
Modifies the low pressure alarm bypass time from analogue input
AL44 Low pressure alarm regulator setpoint from analogue input
Modifies the setpoint of the low pressure alarm regulator from analogue input
AL45 Low pressure alarm regulator hysteresis from analogue input
Modifies the setpoint of the low pressure alarm regulator hysteresis from analogue input
AL46 Number of low pressure alarms from analogue input
Modifies the number of low pressure alarms from analogue input
AL47 High temperature alarm regulator setpoint from analogue input
Modifies the setpoint of the high temperature alarm regulator from analogue input
AL48 High temperature alarm regulator hysteresis from analogue input
Modifies the hysteresis of the high temperature alarm regulator from analogue input
AL49 High temperature delay before alarm
Modifies the time temperature is high before alarm generated
AL50 Internal circuit antifreeze alarm bypass time
Modifies the internal circuit antifreeze alarm bypass time
AL51 Internal circuit antifreeze alarm regulator setpoint
Modifies the internal circuit antifreeze alarm regulator setpoint
AL52 Internal circuit antifreeze alarm regulator hysteresis
Modifies the internal circuit antifreeze alarm regulator hysteresis
AL53 Number of internal circuit antifreeze alarms
Modifies the number of internal circuit antifreeze alarms
AL54 External circuit antifreeze alarm bypass time
Modifies the external circuit antifreeze alarm bypass time
AL55 External circuit antifreeze alarm regulator setpoint
Modifies the external circuit antifreeze alarm regulator setpoint
AL56 External circuit antifreeze alarm regulator hysteresis
Modifies the external circuit antifreeze alarm regulator hysteresis
AL57 Number of external circuit antifreeze alarms
Modifies the number of external circuit antifreeze alarms

NO REFRIGERANT
AL70 Enable low refrigerant alarm
To enable or disable the low refrigerant alarm
 0 = Low refrigerant alarm disabled
 1 = Low refrigerant alarm enabled
AL71 Low refrigerant alarm bypass time
Modifies the low refrigerant alarm bypass time
AL72 Low refrigerant alarm differential
Modifies the low refrigerant alarm differential
AL73 Low refrigerant delay before alarm
Modifies the time refrigerant is low before alarm generated

MAINTENANCE
AL80 Compressor start time for maintenance signal
Modifies the on time of compressor for the service message
AL81 Internal pump start time on maintenance signal
Modifies the on time of pump for the service message
AL82 External pump start time on maintenance signal
Modifies the on time of pump for the service message
 25.2 Parameters / visibility table, folder visibility table and client table
the following tables contain the read/write/decoding information for each resource to which the device has access.
There are three tables:
- The parameters table contains all the device configuration parameters stored in its non-volatile memory,
including visibilities
- The folders table contains all the parameter folder visibilities
- The client table contains all the I/O state and alarm resources available in the device’s volatile memory.

Description of columns:

FOLDER This indicates the label of the folder containing the parameter in question

LABEL Indicates the label with which the parameters are displayed in the device’s menus.

VALUE PAR The whole part represents the address of the MODBUS register containing the value of the resource to be read or written
ADDRESS in the
instrument. The value after the point indicates the position of the most significant data bit in the register; if not indicated
it is taken to be zero. This information is always provided when the register contains more than one information item, and
it is necessary to distinguish which bits actually represent the data (the working size of the data indicated in the column
DATA SIZE is also taken into consideration). Given that the modbus registers have the size of one WORD (16 bit), the index
number after the point can vary from 0 (least significant bit -LSb-) to 15 (most significant bit -MSb-).

Examples (in binary form the least significant bit is the first on the right):

VAL PAR ADDRESS DATA SIZE Value Content of register

8806 WORD 1350 1350 (0000010101000110)
8806 Byte 70 1350 (0000010101000110)
8806,8 Byte 5 1350 (0000010101000110)
8806,14 1 bit 0 1350 (0000010101000110)
8806,7 4 bit 10 1350 (0000010101000110)

Important: when the register contains more than one data item, during the write operation proceed as follows:
 read current register value
 modify the bits that represent the resource concerned
 write the register

VAL PAR ADDRESS Same as above. In this case, the parameter visibility value is in the MODBUS register address.
By default, all parameters have:
 Data size bits
 Range 0…3
 **Visibility 3
 U.M. number

**Value Significance
 Value 3 = parameter or folder always visible
 Value 2 = manufacturer level; these parameters can only be seen by entering the manufacturer's password
(see parameter UI18) (all parameters specified as always visible, parameters that are visible at the installation
level, and manufacturer level parameters will be visible)
 Value 1 = installation level; these parameters can only be viewed by entering the installation password (see
parameter UI17) (all parameters specified as always visible and parameters that are visible at the installation
level will be visible)
 Value 0 = parameter or folder NOT visible

1. Parameters and/or folders with visibility level <>3 (i.e. password protected) will only be visible if the correct
password is entered (installer or manufacturer) following the procedure outlined below:
2. Parameters and/or folders with visibility level =3 are always visible and no password is required; in this case, the
procedure below is not required.

Examples (in binary form the least significant bit is the first on the right):
Default visibility:

VAL PAR ADDRESS DATA SIZE Value Content of register

49481,6 2 bit 3 65535 -------------(1111111111111111)
49482 2 bit 3 65535 (1111111111111111)
49482,2 2 bit 3 65535 (1111111111111111)
49482,4 2 bit 3 65535 (1111111111111111)
49482,6 2 bit 3 65535 (1111111111111111)
 Modifies the visibility value of parameter CL04 (address 49482.6) from 3 to 0

Visibility modified

VAL PAR ADDRESS DATA SIZE Value Content of register

49481,6 2 bit 0 16383 (0011111111111111)

RESET (Y/N) Indicates whether the device MUST be rebooted after the modification.
 Y=YES the device MUST be rebooted after the modification:
 N=NO the device DOESN'T need to be rebooted to modify the parameter
Example: ALL configuration parameters (folder CF) have a value of Y so that the device MUST ALWAYS BE REBOOTED
AFTER MODIFICATION

R/W Indicates if resources are read/write, read-only or write-only:

R Read-only resource
W Write-only resource
RW Read / write resource

DATA SIZE Indicates the size of the data in bits.

WORD = 16 bit
Bytes = 8 bit
“n” bits = 0...15 bits depending on the value of “n”

CPL When the field indicates “Y”, the value read by the register requires conversion, because the value represents a number
with a sign. In the other cases the value is always positive or null.
To carry out conversion, proceed as follows:
 if the value in the register is between 0 and 32767, the result is the value itself (zero and positive values)
 if the value in the register is between 32768 and 65535, the result is the value of the register - 65536 (negative
values)

RANGE Describes the interval of values that can be assigned to the parameter. It can be correlated with other parameters in the
controller (indicated with the parameter label).
NOTE: If the actual value is outside the limits specified for the parameter itself (for example, because other parameters
defining the limits in question have been varied), teh actual value is not displayed but rather the value of the limit in
violation

DEFAULT Indicates the factory setting for the standard model of the instrument. Then table considers the hardware model
SBW646/C with 4 relays + TRIAC + 2 analogue outputs A01 AO2 PWM + 1 low voltage analogue output A03

EXP If set to -1 the value read from the register must be divided by 10 (value/10) to convert to the values given in the column
RANGE and DEFAULT with the unit of measure given in the column U.M.,
Example: parameter CL04 = 50.0. Column EXP = -1:
 The value read by the device /DeviceManager is 50.0
 The value read from the register is 500 --> 500/10 = 50.0

U.M. Measurement unit for values converted according to the rules indicated in the CPL and EXP columns.

25.2.1 Parameters / visibility table

(see following page)
 VALUE PAR ADDRESS

VIS PAR ADDRESS

DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
DATA SIZE

DEFAULT
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

M.U.
R/W
EXP
CPL
CL CL00 49208 BYTE 49435,4 Y RW AIL1 analogue input type 0 ... 2 0 num
CL CL01 49209 BYTE 49435,6 Y RW AIL2 analogue input type 0 ... 2 0 num
CL CL02 49210 BYTE 49436 Y RW AIL3 analogue input type 0 ... 6 0 num
CL CL03 49211 BYTE 49436,2 Y RW AIL4 analogue input type 0 ... 6 0 num
CL CL04 49212 BYTE 49436,4 Y RW AIL5 analogue input type 0 ... 2 0 num
CL CL10 16450 WORD Y -1 49436,6 Y RW AIL3 analogue input fullscale value CL11 ... 999 500 °C/Bar
CL CL11 16462 WORD Y -1 49437 Y RW AIL3 analogue input start of scale value -500 ... CL10 0.0 °C/Bar
CL CL12 16452 WORD Y -1 49437,2 Y RW AIL4 analogue input fullscale value CL13 ... 999 500 °C/Bar
CL CL13 16464 WORD Y -1 49437,4 Y RW AIL4 analogue input start of scale value -500 ... CL12 0 °C/Bar
CL CL20 49238 BYTE Y -1 49437,6 Y RW AIL1 analogue input differential -120 ... 120 0 °C
CL CL21 49239 BYTE Y -1 49438 Y RW AIL2 analogue input differential -120 ... 120 0 °C
CL CL22 49240 BYTE Y -1 49438,2 Y RW AIL3 analogue input differential -120 ... 120 0 °C/Bar
CL CL23 49241 BYTE Y -1 49438,4 Y RW AIL4 analogue input differential -120 ... 120 0 °C/Bar
CL CL24 49242 BYTE Y -1 49438,6 Y RW AIL5 analogue input differential -120 ... 120 0 °C
CL CL30 49286 BYTE 49439 Y RW AIL1 analogue input configuration 0 ... 16 0 num
CL CL31 49287 BYTE 49439,2 Y RW AIL2 analogue input configuration 0 ... 16 0 num
CL CL32 49288 BYTE 49439,4 Y RW AIL3 analogue input configuration 0 ... 30 0 num
CL CL33 49289 BYTE 49439,6 Y RW AIL4 analogue input configuration 0 ... 30 0 num
CL CL34 49290 BYTE 49440 Y RW AIL5 analogue input configuration 0 ... 16 0 num
CL CL40 49292 BYTE Y 49440,2 Y RW DIL1 digital input configuration -58 ... 58 0 num
CL CL41 49293 BYTE Y 49440,4 Y RW DIL2 digital input configuration -58 ... 58 0 num
CL CL42 49294 BYTE Y 49440,6 Y RW DIL3 digital input configuration -58 ... 58 0 num
CL CL43 49295 BYTE Y 49441 Y RW DIL4 digital input configuration -58 ... 58 0 num
CL CL44 49296 BYTE Y 49441,2 Y RW DIL5 digital input configuration -58 ... 58 0 num
CL CL45 49297 BYTE Y 49441,4 Y RW DIL6 digital input configuration -58 ... 58 0 num
CL CL50 49302 BYTE Y 49442 Y RW AIL1 analogue input configuration 1 when configured as digital input -58 ... 58 0 num
CL CL51 49303 BYTE Y 49442,2 Y RW AIL2 analogue input configuration 2 when configured as digital input -58 ... 58 0 num
CL CL52 49304 BYTE Y 49442,4 Y RW AIL3 analogue input configuration 3 when configured as digital input -58 ... 58 0 num

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
168/240
 VALUE PAR ADDRESS

VIS PAR ADDRESS

DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
DATA SIZE

DEFAULT
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

M.U.
R/W
EXP
CPL
CL CL53 49305 BYTE Y 49442,6 Y RW AIL4 analogue input configuration 4 when configured as digital input -58 ... 58 0 num
CL CL54 49306 BYTE Y 49443 Y RW AIL5 analogue input configuration 5 when configured as digital input -58 ... 58 0 num
CL CL60 49248 BYTE 49443,2 Y RW AOL5 analogue output type 0 ... 1 0 num
CL CL61 49310 BYTE Y 49443,4 Y RW AOL3 analogue output configuration -53 ... 63 59 num
CL CL62 49311 BYTE Y 49443,6 Y RW AOL4 analogue output configuration -53 ... 63 0 num
CL CL63 49312 BYTE Y 49444 Y RW AOL5 analogue output configuration -53 ... 63 0 num
CL CL71 49251 BYTE 49444,4 Y RW Enable AOL2 analogue output 0 ... 1 0 num
CL CL72 49252 BYTE 49444,6 Y RW Enable AOL2 analogue output 0 ... 1 0 num
CL CL73 49253 BYTE 49445 Y RW Phase shift TCL1 analogue output 0 ... 90 27 num
CL CL74 49254 BYTE 49445,2 Y RW Phase shift AO1 analogue output 0 ... 90 27 num
CL CL75 49255 BYTE 49445,4 Y RW Phase shift AOL2 analogue output 0 ... 90 27 num
Num
CL CL76 49256 BYTE 49445,6 Y RW 5 ... 40 10 (1 unità =
TCL1 analogue output pulse length 69.4 μsec)
Num
CL CL77 49257 BYTE 49446 Y RW 5 ... 40 10 (1 unità =
AOL1 analogue output pulse length 69.4 μsec)
Num
CL CL78 49258 BYTE 49446,2 Y RW 5 ... 40 10 (1 unità =
AOL2 analogue output pulse length 69.4 μsec)
CL CL79 49314 BYTE Y 49446,4 Y RW TCL1 analogue output configuration -53 ... 63 56 num
CL CL80 49315 BYTE Y 49446,6 Y RW AOL1 analogue output configuration -53 ... 63 0 num
CL CL81 49316 BYTE Y 49447 Y RW AOL2 analogue output configuration -53 ... 63 0 num
CL CL90 49322 BYTE Y 49447,2 Y RW DOL1 digital output configuration -53 ... 53 1 num
CL CL91 49323 BYTE Y 49447,4 Y RW DOL2 digital output configuration -53 ... 53 14 num
CL CL92 49324 BYTE Y 49447,6 Y RW DOL3 digital output configuration -53 ... 53 5 num
CL CL93 49325 BYTE Y 49448 Y RW DOL4 digital output configuration -53 ... 53 23 num
CL CL94 49326 BYTE Y 49448,2 Y RW DOL5 digital output configuration -53 ... 53 2 num
CL CL95 49327 BYTE Y 49448,4 Y RW DOL6 digital output configuration (655 models) -53 ... 53 0 num
CL CL96 49328 BYTE Y 49448,6 Y RW AOL1 digital output configuration -53 ... 53 30 num
CL CL97 49329 BYTE Y 49449 Y RW AOL2 digital output configuration -53 ... 53 31 num
CE CE00 49696 BYTE 49451,6 Y RW AIE1 analogue input type 0 ... 2 0 num

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
169/240
 VALUE PAR ADDRESS

VIS PAR ADDRESS

DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
DATA SIZE

DEFAULT
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

M.U.
R/W
EXP
CPL
CE CE01 49697 BYTE 49452 Y RW AIE2 analogue input type 0 ... 2 0 num
CE CE02 49698 BYTE 49452,2 Y RW AIE3 analogue input type 0 ... 6 0 num
CE CE03 49699 BYTE 49452,4 Y RW AIE4 analogue input type 0 ... 6 0 num
CE CE04 49700 BYTE 49452,6 Y RW AIE5 analogue input type 0 ... 2 0 num
CE CE10 16938 WORD Y -1 49453 Y RW AIE3 analogue input fullscale value CE11 ... 999 500 °C/Bar
CE CE11 16950 WORD Y -1 49453,2 Y RW AIE3 analogue input start of scale value -500 ... CE10 0 °C/Bar
CE CE12 16940 WORD Y -1 49453,4 Y RW AIE4 analogue input fullscale value CE13 ... 999 500 °C/Bar
CE CE13 16952 WORD Y -1 49453,6 Y RW AIE4 analogue input start of scale value -500 ... CE12 0 °C/Bar
CE CE20 49726 BYTE Y -1 49454 Y RW AIE1 analogue input differential -120 ... 120 0 °C
CE CE21 49727 BYTE Y -1 49454,2 Y RW AIE2 analogue input differential -120 ... 120 0 °C
CE CE22 49728 BYTE Y -1 49454,4 Y RW AIE3 analogue input differential -120 ... 120 0 °C/Bar
CE CE23 49729 BYTE Y -1 49454,6 Y RW AIE4 analogue input differential -120 ... 120 0 °C/Bar
CE CE24 49730 BYTE Y -1 49455 Y RW AIE5 analogue input differential -120 ... 120 0 °C
CE CE30 49748 BYTE 49455,2 Y RW AIE1 analogue input configuration 0 ... 16 0 num
CE CE31 49749 BYTE 49455,4 Y RW AIE2 analogue input configuration 0 ... 16 0 num
CE CE32 49750 BYTE 49455,6 Y RW AIE3 analogue input configuration 0 ... 30 0 num
CE CE33 49751 BYTE 49456 Y RW AIE4 analogue input configuration 0 ... 30 0 num
CE CE34 49752 BYTE 49456,2 Y RW AIE5 analogue input configuration 0 ... 16 0 num
CE CE40 49754 BYTE Y 49456,4 Y RW DIE1 digital input configuration -58 ... 58 0 num
CE CE41 49755 BYTE Y 49456,6 Y RW DIE2 digital input configuration -58 ... 58 0 num
CE CE42 49756 BYTE Y 49457 Y RW DIE3 digital input configuration -58 ... 58 0 num
CE CE43 49757 BYTE Y 49457,2 Y RW DIE4 digital input configuration -58 ... 58 0 num
CE CE44 49758 BYTE Y 49457,4 Y RW DIE5 digital input configuration -58 ... 58 0 num
CE CE45 49759 BYTE Y 49457,6 Y RW DIE6 digital input configuration -58 ... 58 0 num
CE CE50 49762 BYTE Y 49458 Y RW AIE1 analogue input configuration when configured as digital input -58 ... 58 0 num
CE CE51 49763 BYTE Y 49458,2 Y RW AIE2 analogue input configuration when configured as digital input -58 ... 58 0 num
CE CE52 49764 BYTE Y 49458,4 Y RW AIE3 analogue input configuration when configured as digital input -58 ... 58 0 num
CE CE53 49765 BYTE Y 49458,6 Y RW AIE4 analogue input configuration when configured as digital input -58 ... 58 0 num
CE CE54 49766 BYTE Y 49459 Y RW AIE5 analogue input configuration when configured as digital input -58 ... 58 0 num

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
170/240
 VALUE PAR ADDRESS

VIS PAR ADDRESS

DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
DATA SIZE

DEFAULT
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

M.U.
R/W
EXP
CPL
CE CE60 49736 BYTE 49459,2 Y RW AOE5 analogue output type 5 0 ... 1 0 num
CE CE61 49768 BYTE Y 49459,4 Y RW AOE3 analogue output configuration -53 ... 63 0 num
CE CE62 49769 BYTE Y 49459,6 Y RW AOE4 analogue output configuration -53 ... 63 0 num
CE CE63 49770 BYTE Y 49460 Y RW AOE5 analogue output configuration -53 ... 63 0 num
CE CE70 49738 BYTE 49460,2 Y RW Enable TCE1 analogue output 0 ... 1 1 num
CE CE71 49739 BYTE 49460,4 Y RW Enable AOE1 analogue output 0 ... 1 0 num
CE CE72 49740 BYTE 49460,6 Y RW Enable AOE2 analogue output 0 ... 1 0 num
CE CE73 49741 BYTE 49461 Y RW Phase shift TCE1 analogue output 0 ... 90 27 Deg
CE CE74 49742 BYTE 49461,2 Y RW Phase shift AOE1 analogue output 0 ... 90 27 Deg
CE CE75 49743 BYTE 49461,4 Y RW Phase shift AOE2 analogue output 0 ... 90 27 Deg
CE CE76 49744 BYTE 49461,6 Y RW TCE1 analogue output pulse length 5 ... 40 10 69 μsec
CE CE77 49745 BYTE 49462 Y RW AOE1 analogue output pulse length 5 ... 40 10 69 μsec
CE CE78 49746 BYTE 49462,2 Y RW AOE2 analogue output pulse length 5 ... 40 10 69 μsec
CE CE79 49772 BYTE Y 49462,4 Y RW TCE1 analogue output configuration -53 ... 63 0 num
CE CE80 49773 BYTE Y 49462,6 Y RW AOE1 analogue output configuration -53 ... 63 0 num
CE CE81 49774 BYTE Y 49463 Y RW AOE2 analogue output configuration -53 ... 63 0 num
CE CE90 49776 BYTE Y 49463,2 Y RW DOE1 digital output configuration -53 ... 53 0 num
CE CE91 49777 BYTE Y 49463,4 Y RW DOE2 digital output configuration -53 ... 53 0 num
CE CE92 49778 BYTE Y 49463,6 Y RW DOE3 digital output configuration -53 ... 53 0 num
CE CE93 49779 BYTE Y 49464 Y RW DOE4 digital output configuration -53 ... 53 0 num
CE CE94 49780 BYTE Y 49464,2 Y RW DOE5 digital output configuration -53 ... 53 0 num
CE CE95 49781 BYTE Y 49464,4 Y RW DOE6 digital output configuration -53 ... 53 0 num
CE CE96 49782 BYTE Y 49464,6 Y RW AOE1 digital output configuration -53 ... 53 0 num
CE CE97 49783 BYTE Y 49465 Y RW AOE2 digital output configuration -53 ... 53 0 num
Cr Cr00 49664 BYTE 49449,2 Y RW AIR1 analogue input type 0 ... 2 0 num
Cr Cr01 49665 BYTE 49449,4 Y RW AIR2 analogue input type 0 ... 3 0 num
Cr Cr10 16900 WORD Y -1 49449,6 Y RW AIR2 analogue input fullscale value Cr11 ... 999 0 num
Cr Cr11 16904 WORD Y -1 49450 Y RW AIR2 analogue input start of scale value -999 ... Cr10 0 num
Cr Cr20 49674 BYTE Y -1 49450,2 Y RW AIR1 analogue input differential -12.0 ... 12.0 0.0 °C

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
171/240
 VALUE PAR ADDRESS

VIS PAR ADDRESS

DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
DATA SIZE

DEFAULT
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

M.U.
R/W
EXP
CPL
Cr Cr21 49675 BYTE Y -1 49450,4 Y RW AIR2 analogue input differential -12.0 ... 12.0 0.0 °C/Bar
Cr Cr30 49676 BYTE 49450,6 Y RW AIR1 analogue input configuration 0…16 0 num
Cr Cr31 49677 BYTE 49451 Y RW AIR2 analogue input configuration 0…30 0 num
Cr Cr50 49683 BYTE Y 49451,2 Y RW AIR2 input configuration when configured as digital input 0 ... 6 0 num
CF CF01 49169 BYTE 49465,4 Y RW Select COM1 protocol 0 ... 1 0 num
CF CF20 16426 BYTE 49467,2 Y RW Eliwell protocol controller address 0 ... 14 0 num
CF CF21 16428 BYTE 49467,4 Y RW Eliwell protocol controller family 0 ... 14 0 num
CF CF30 49600 BYTE 49467,6 Y RW Modbus protocol controller address 1 ... 255 1 num
CF CF31 49600 BYTE 49468 Y RW Modbus baud rate protocol 0 ... 7 3 num
CF CF32 16426 BYTE 49468,2 Y RW Modbus parity protocol 1 ... 3 1 num
CF CF43 49600 BYTE 49470,4 Y RW Firmware screen 0 ... 999 0 num
CF CF44 49600 BYTE 49465,4 Y RW Firmware version 0 ... 999 0 num
CF CF60 16430 BYTE 49467,2 Y RW Customer code 1 0 ... 999 0 num
CF CF61 16432 BYTE 49467,4 Y RW Customer code 2 0 ... 999 0 num
UI UI00 49388 BYTE 49470,6 Y RW LED1 configuration 0 ... 74 50 num
UI UI01 49389 BYTE 49471 Y RW LED2 configuration 0 ... 74 51 num
UI UI02 49390 BYTE 49471,2 Y RW LED3 configuration 0 ... 74 14 num
UI UI03 49391 BYTE 49471,4 Y RW LED4 configuration 0 ... 74 16 num
UI UI04 49392 BYTE 49471,6 Y RW LED5 configuration 0 ... 74 23 num
UI UI05 49393 BYTE 49472 Y RW LED6 configuration 0 ... 74 9 num
UI UI06 49394 BYTE 49472,2 Y RW LED7 configuration 0 ... 74 30 num
UI UI07 49402 BYTE 49472,4 Y RW Standby LED configuration 0 ... 2 1 num
UI UI10 49366 BYTE 49473 Y RW Fundamental state display selection 0 ... 14 0 num
UI UI11 49367 BYTE 49473,2 Y RW SKW basic state display 1 0 ... 14 5 num
UI UI20 49382 BYTE 49473,6 Y RW Enable ACS/Defrost function from key 0 ... 1 1 num
UI UI21 49383 BYTE 49474 Y RW Enable MODE function from key 0 ... 1 1 num
UI UI22 49384 BYTE 49474,2 Y RW Enable DISP function from key 0 ... 1 1 num
UI UI23 49385 BYTE 49474,4 Y RW Enable Standby/ON/OFF function from key 0 ... 1 1 num
UI UI24 49386 BYTE 49474,6 Y RW Enable SET function from key 0 ... 1 1 num

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
172/240
 VALUE PAR ADDRESS

VIS PAR ADDRESS

DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
DATA SIZE

DEFAULT
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

M.U.
R/W
EXP
CPL
UI UI25 49387 BYTE 49475 Y RW Setpoint edit function enable from main screen 0 ... 1 0 num
UI UI27 16640 WORD 49475,4 Y RW Installation engineer password 0 ... 255 1 num
UI UI28 16642 WORD 49475,6 Y RW Manufacturer password 0 ... 255 2 num
UI UI30 49395 BYTE 49476 Y RW LED11 configuration 0 ... 74 50 num
UI UI31 49396 BYTE 49476,2 Y RW LED12 configuration 0 ... 74 51 num
UI UI32 49397 BYTE 49476,4 Y RW LED13 configuration 0 ... 74 0 num
UI UI33 49398 BYTE 49476,6 Y RW LED14 configuration 0 ... 74 0 num
UI UI34 49399 BYTE 49477 Y RW LED15 configuration 0 ... 74 23 num
UI UI35 49400 BYTE 49477,2 Y RW LED16 configuration 0 ... 74 0 num
UI UI36 49401 BYTE 49477,4 Y RW LED17 configuration 0 ... 74 14 num
tr tr00 49824 BYTE 49477,6 Y RW Temperature control type 0 ... 4 0 Num
tr tr01 49825 BYTE 49478 Y RW Enable heating pump 0 ... 1 1 Num
tr tr02 49826 BYTE 49478,2 Y RW Select temperature control probe in Cool 0 ... 5 0 Num
tr tr03 49827 BYTE 49478,4 Y RW Select temperature control probe in Heat 0 ... 5 1 Num
tr tr04 49828 BYTE 49478,6 Y RW Select probes for temperature control differential in Cool 0 ... 5 0 Num
tr tr05 49829 BYTE 49479 Y RW Select probes for temperature control differential in Heat 0 ... 5 0 Num
tr tr10 17062 WORD Y -1 49479,2 N RW Temperature control setpoint in Cool tr11 ... tr12 120 °C
tr tr11 17064 WORD Y -1 49479,4 Y RW Minimum temperature control setpoint in Cool -500 ... tr12 110 °C
tr tr12 17066 WORD Y -1 49479,6 Y RW Maximum temperature control setpoint in Cool tr11 ... 999 200 °C
tr tr13 17068 WORD -1 49480 N RW Temperature control hysteresis in Cool 1 ... 255 30 °C
tr tr14 17070 WORD -1 49480,2 N RW Insert steps/compressors differential in Cool 1 ... 255 30 °C
tr tr15 17072 WORD Y -1 49480,4 N RW Setpoint differential in Cool from Economy input -255 ... 255 50 °C

tr tr20 17074 WORD Y -1 49480,6 N RW Temperature control setpoint in Heat tr21 ...tr22 400 °C

tr tr21 17076 WORD Y -1 49481 Y RW Minimum temperature control setpoint in Heat -500 ... tr22 300 °C

tr tr22 17078 WORD Y -1 49481,2 Y RW tr21 ... 999 450 °C

Maximum temperature control setpoint in Heat
tr tr23 17080 WORD -1 49481,4 N RW Temperature control hysteresis in Heat 1 ... 255 30 °C

tr tr24 17082 WORD -1 49481,6 N RW Insert steps/compressors differential in Heat 1 ... 255 30 °C

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
173/240
 VALUE PAR ADDRESS

VIS PAR ADDRESS

DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
DATA SIZE

DEFAULT
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

M.U.
R/W
EXP
CPL
tr tr25 17084 WORD Y -1 49482 N RW Setpoint differential in Heat from Economy Input -255 ... 255 -50 °C
tr tr30 17712 WORD -1 49482,4 Y RW Temperature controller hysteresis with inverter in Cool 0 ... 255 20 °C
tr tr31 17714 WORD -1 49482,6 Y RW Temperature controller band with inverter in Cool 0 ... 255 30 °C
tr tr32 50484 BYTE 49483 Y RW Minimum speed with inverter in Cool 0 ... tr33 20 num
tr tr33 50485 BYTE 49483,2 Y RW Maximum speed with inverter in Cool tr32 ... 100 100 num
tr tr34 17718 WORD -1 49483,4 Y RW Insert Inverters/compressors differential in Cool 0 ... 255 60 °C
tr tr40 17726 WORD -1 49483,6 Y RW Temperature controller hysteresis with inverter in Heat 0 ... 255 20 °C
tr tr41 17728 WORD -1 49484 Y RW Temperature controller band with inverter in Heat 0 ... 255 30 °C
tr tr42 50498 BYTE 49484,2 Y RW Minimum speed with inverter in Heat 0 ... tr43 20 num
tr tr43 50499 BYTE 49484,4 Y RW Maximum speed with inverter in Heat tr42 ... 100 100 num
tr tr44 17732 WORD -1 49484,6 Y RW Insert Inverters/compressors differential in Heat 0 ... 255 0 °C
St St00 49808 BYTE 49482,2 Y RW Select operating mode 0 ... 2 2 num
St St01 49809 BYTE 49482,4 Y RW Enable change mode from analogue input 0 ... 1 0 num
St St02 49810 BYTE 49482,6 Y RW Select probe to change automatic mode 0 ... 2 0 num
St St03 17044 WORD Y -1 49483 N RW Differential for change automatic mode in Heat -25.5 ... 25.5 -10.0 °C
St St04 17046 WORD Y -1 49483,2 N RW Differential for change automatic mode in Cool -25.5 ... 25.5 10.0 °C
St St05 49816 BYTE 49483,4 Y RW Reversal valve switching delay 0 ... 255 3 Sec
CP CP00 49886 BYTE 49483,6 Y RW Type of compressor 0 ... 2 0 num
CP CP01 49887 BYTE 49484 Y RW Number of circuits 1 ... 2 1 num
CP CP02 49888 BYTE 49484,2 Y RW Number of compressors per circuit 1 ... 4 2 num
CP CP03 49889 BYTE 49484,4 Y RW Number of capacity steps of compressor 0 ... 3 0 num
CP CP10 49896 BYTE 49485,2 Y RW Enable circuit balancing 0 ... 1 0 Num
CP CP11 49897 BYTE 49485,4 Y RW Enable compressor balancing 0 ... 1 0 Num
CP CP12 49898 BYTE 49485,6 Y RW Circuit selection criterion 0 ... 1 0 Num
CP CP13 49899 BYTE 49486 Y RW Compressor selection criterion 0 ... 2 0 Num

CP CP14 17132 WORD 49486,2 Y RW Compressor operating time for each on sequence 0 ... 255 18 Sec*10
CP CP20 17136 WORD 49486,4 Y RW Minimum off/on for same compressor 0 ... 255 18 Sec*10
CP CP21 17138 WORD 49486,6 Y RW Minimum on/on time for same compressor 0 ... 255 30 Sec*10
CP CP22 17140 WORD 49487 Y RW Minimum compressor on time 0 ... 255 2 Sec*10

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
174/240
 VALUE PAR ADDRESS

VIS PAR ADDRESS

DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
DATA SIZE

DEFAULT
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

M.U.
R/W
EXP
CPL
CP CP23 17142 WORD 49487,2 Y RW Minimum on/on time for different compressors 1 ... 255 10 Sec
CP CP24 17144 WORD 49487,4 Y RW Minimum off/off time for different compressors 1 ... 255 10 Sec
CP CP25 17146 WORD 49487,6 Y RW Minimum compressor on time per splitting increment 1 ... 255 10 Sec
CP CP26 17148 WORD 49488 Y RW Minimum compressor on time per splitting decrease 1 ... 255 5 Sec
CP CP27 17150 WORD 49488,2 Y RW Defrost compressor/step delay minimum 1 ... 255 3 Sec
PI PI00 49984 BYTE 49491,4 Y RW Select primary circuit water pump function 0 ... 2 2 Num
PI PI01 49985 BYTE 49491,6 Y RW Time primary circuit water pump not active for anti-lock 0 ... 255 50 h
PI PI02 49986 BYTE 49492 Y RW Internal circuit water pump pick-up time 0 ... 255 2 Sec
PI PI03 49987 BYTE 49492,2 Y RW Minimum internal circuit water pump start time 0 ... 255 10 Sec*10

PI PI05 49989 BYTE 49492,6 Y RW Maximum internal circuit water pump changeover start time 0 ... 255 0 h
PI PI10 49992 BYTE 49493 Y RW Enable primary circuit water pump on when anti-freeze heaters on 0 ... 1 0 Num
PI PI11 49993 BYTE 49493,2 Y RW Enable internal circuit special water pump 0 ... 2 1 Num

PI PI20 49996 BYTE Y -1 49493,4 Y RW Delay primary circuit water pump on - compressor on 0 ... 255 60 Sec

PI PI21 49997 BYTE Y -1 49493,6 Y RW Delay compressor off - primary circuit water pump off 0 ... 255 60 Sec

PI PI22 49998 BYTE 49494 Y RW 0 ... 255 30 Min

Internal circuit pump periodic activation interval
PI PI30 50002 BYTE 49494,2 Y RW Minimum primary circuit water pump speed in Cool 0 ... 100 30 %
PI PI31 50003 BYTE 49494,4 Y RW Maximum primary circuit water pump speed in Cool 0 ... 100 100 %
PI PI32 17236 WORD 49494,6 N RW Minimum primary circuit water pump setpoint speed in Cool -500 ... 999 200 °C
PI PI33 17238 WORD 49495 N RW Proportional band primary circuit water pump in Cool -255 ... 255 80 °C
PI PI34 50008 BYTE 49495,2 N RW Fan speed setpoint for primary circuit water pump modulation in cool 0 ... 100 80 %
PI PI35 50009 BYTE 49495,4 N RW Fan speed hysteresis for primary circuit water pump modulation in Cool 1 ... 100 10 %
PI PI40 50012 BYTE 49495,6 Y RW Minimum primary circuit water pump speed in Heat 0 ... 100 30 %
PI PI41 50013 WORD 49496 Y RW Maximum primary circuit water pump speed in Heat 0 ... 100 100 %
PI PI42 17246 WORD 49496,2 N RW Minimum primary circuit water pump setpoint speed in Heat -500 ... 999 200 °C
PI PI43 17248 BYTE 49496,4 N RW Proportional band primary circuit water pump in Heat -255 ... 255 180 °C
PI PI44 50018 BYTE 49496,6 N RW Fan speed setpoint for primary circuit water pump modulation in Heat 0 ... 100 80 %

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
175/240
 VALUE PAR ADDRESS

VIS PAR ADDRESS

DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
DATA SIZE

DEFAULT
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

M.U.
R/W
EXP
CPL
PI PI45 50019 BYTE 49497 N RW Fan speed hysteresis for primary circuit water pump modulation in Heat 1 ... 100 10 %
PI PI50 50022 BYTE 49497,2 Y RW Select probe for internal circuit + water pump antifreeze 0 ... 7 0 Num
PI PI51 17256 WORD 49497,4 N RW Primary circuit water pump regulator setpoint for anti-freeze -500 ... 999 80 °C
PI PI52 17258 WORD 49497,6 N RW Primary circuit water pump regulator hysteresis for anti-freeze 1 ... 255 20 °C
FI FI00 17150 BYTE 49498 Y RW Select recirculating fan function 0 ... 2 0 Num
FI FI01 49956 WORD -1 49498,2 N RW Recirculating fan regulator hysteresis in Cool 1 ... 255 20 °C
FI FI02 17190 WORD -1 49498,4 N RW Recirculating fan regulator hysteresis in Heat 1 ... 255 20 °C
FI FI03 17192 WORD 49498,6 Y RW Post-ventilation time in Heat 0 ... 255 10 Sec
FE FE00 50038 BYTE 49500 Y RW External exchanger fan mode selection 0 ... 2 2 Num
FE FE01 50039 BYTE 49500,2 Y RW Surge current time open system intercooler fan 0 ... 60 2 Sec
FE FE10 50046 BYTE 49500,4 Y RW Enable single condensation 0 ... 1 0 num
FE FE11 50047 BYTE 49500,6 Y RW Enable open system intercooler fan on during defrost 0 ... 2 0 num
FE FE12 17280 WORD Y -1 49501 N RW Open system intercooler fan switch on setpoint during defrost -500 ... 999 190 °C/Bar
FE FE13 17282 WORD -1 49501,2 N RW Open system intercooler fan switch-on hysteresis during defrost 1 ... 255 10 °C/Bar

FE FE14 50052 BYTE 49501,4 Y RW Select probe to regulate open system intercooler fan during defrost 0 ... 3 1 num
FE FE20 17290 WORD 49501,6 Y RW Cut-off open system intercooler fan bypass time 0 ... 255 2 Sec

FE FE21 17292 WORD 49502 Y RW External exchanger fan preventilation time 0 ... 255 15 Sec

FE FE30 50062 BYTE 49502,2 Y RW Open system intercooler fan minimum speed in Cool 0 ... 100 50 %
FE FE31 50063 BYTE 49502,4 Y RW Open system intercooler fan average speed in Cool 0 ... 100 95 %
FE FE32 50064 BYTE 49502,6 Y RW Open system intercooler fan maximum speed in Cool 0 ... 100 100 %
FE FE33 50065 BYTE 49503 Y RW Select probe to regulate open system intercooler fan in Cool 0 ... 7 1 Num

FE FE34 17298 WORD Y -1 49503,2 N RW -500 ... 999 140 °C/Bar

Open system intercooler fan minimum setpoint speed in Cool
FE FE35 17300 WORD Y -1 49503,4 N RW Open system intercooler fan maximum speed differential in Cool 1 ... 999 55 °C/Bar

FE FE36 17302 WORD -1 49503,6 N RW Open system intercooler fan proportional band speed in Cool 0 ... 999 35 °C/Bar

FE FE37 17304 WORD -1 49504 N RW Open system intercooler fan maximum speed hysteresis in Cool 1 ... 255 10 °C/Bar

FE FE38 17306 WORD -1 49504,2 N RW Open system intercooler fan hysteresis cut-off in Cool 1 ... 255 10 °C/Bar

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
176/240
 VALUE PAR ADDRESS

VIS PAR ADDRESS

DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
DATA SIZE

DEFAULT
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

M.U.
R/W
EXP
CPL
FE FE39 17308 WORD -1 49504,4 N RW Open system intercooler fan differential cut-off in Cool 0 ... 255 20 °C/Bar

FE FE50 50082 BYTE 49504,6 Y RW

Open system intercooler fan minimum speed in Heat
0 ... 100 50 %
FE FE51 50083 BYTE 49505 Y RW Open system intercooler fan average speed in Heat 0 ... 100 95 %
FE FE52 50084 BYTE 49505,2 Y RW Open system intercooler fan maximum speed in Heat 0 ... 100 100 %
FE FE53 50085 BYTE 49505,4 Y RW 0 ... 7 1 Num
Select probe to regulate open system intercooler fan in Heat
FE FE54 17318 WORD Y -1 49505,6 N RW -500 ... 999 55 °C/Bar
Open system intercooler fan minimum setpoint speed in Heat
FE FE55 17320 WORD Y -1 49506 N RW Open system intercooler fan maximum speed differential in Heat 1 ... 999 17 °C/Bar
FE FE56 17322 WORD -1 49506,2 N RW Open system intercooler fan proportional band speed in Heat 0 ... 999 10 °C/Bar
FE FE57 17324 WORD -1 49506,4 N RW Open system intercooler fan maximum speed hysteresis in Heat 1 ... 255 5 °C/Bar

FE FE58 17326 WORD -1 49506,6 N RW 1 ... 255 5 °C/Bar

Open system intercooler fan hysteresis cut-off in Heat
FE FE59 17328 WORD -1 49507 N RW Open system intercooler fan differential cut-off in Heat 0 ... 255 10 °C/Bar
PE PE00 50110 BYTE 49507,2 Y RW External circuit water pump mode selection 0 ... 3 0 num

HI HI00 50126 BYTE 49507,4 Y RW 0 ... 1 0 Num

Enable internal exchanger antifreeze heaters in standby
HI HI01 50127 BYTE 49507,6 Y RW Enable force heaters on during defrost 0 ... 3 0 Num
HI HI10 50130 BYTE 49508 Y RW Select probe for antifreeze internal exchanger + heater 1 0 ... 3 2 Num

HI HI11 50131 BYTE 49508,2 Y RW Select probe for antifreeze internal exchanger + heater 2 0 ... 3 2 num

HI HI12 17364 WORD Y -1 49508,4 N RW Hi14 ... Hi13 40 °C

Primary intercooler heaters regulator setpoint for anti-freeze
HI HI13 17366 WORD Y -1 49508,6 Y RW Primary intercooler heaters regulator maximum setpoint for anti-freeze Hi14 ... 999 70 °C
HI HI14 17368 WORD Y -1 49509 Y RW Primary intercooler heaters regulator minimum setpoint for anti-freeze -500 ... Hi13 -100 °C
HI HI15 17370 WORD -1 49509,2 N RW Primary intercooler heaters regulator hysteresis for anti-freeze 1 ... 255 5 °C

HI HI20 50146 BYTE 49509,4 Y RW Select heater mode for internal exchanger in integration mode 0 ... 3 0 Num

HI HI21 17380 WORD Y -1 49509,6 N RW Primary intercooler heaters dynamic differential setpoint in integration -500 ... 999 100 °C
HI HI22 17382 WORD -1 49510 Y RW Primary intercooler heaters maximum dynamic differential in integration 0 ... 999 255 °C
HI HI23 17384 WORD -1 49510,2 N RW Heater differential in integration mode with heat pump lock 0 ... 999 0 °C

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
177/240
 VALUE PAR ADDRESS

VIS PAR ADDRESS

DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
DATA SIZE

DEFAULT
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

M.U.
R/W
EXP
CPL
HI HI24 17386 WORD -1 49510,4 N RW Primary intercooler heaters dynamic differential proportional band in integration 0 ... 999 50 °C
HI HI25 17388 WORD -1 49510,6 N RW Primary intercooler heaters regulator hysteresis in integration 1 ... 255 10 °C
HI HI26 17390 WORD -1 49511 N RW Primary intercooler heater 2 switch-on setpoint differential in integration 0 ... 999 30 °C
HE HE00 50166 BYTE 49511,2 Y RW Enable external exchanger antifreeze heaters in standby 0 ... 1 0 Num
HE HE10 50168 BYTE 49511,4 Y RW Select probe for antifreeze external exchanger + heater 1 0 ... 4 0 Num

HE HE11 50169 BYTE 49511,6 Y RW 0 ... 4 0 num

Select probe for antifreeze external exchanger + heater 2
HE HE12 17402 WORD Y -1 49512 N RW Open-system intercooler heaters switch-on setpoint for anti-freeze HE14 ...HE13 40 °C
Primary open-system intercooler heaters regulator
HE HE13 17404 WORD Y -1 49512,2 Y RW HE14 ... 999 70 °C
maximum setpoint for anti-freeze
Primary open-system intercooler heaters regulator
HE HE14 17406 WORD Y -1 49512,4 Y RW -500 ... HE13 -100 °C
minimum setpoint for anti-freeze
HE HE15 17408 WORD Y -1 49512,6 N RW Open-system intercooler heaters regulator hysteresis for anti-freeze 1 ... 255 10 °C
HA HA00 50186 BYTE 49513 Y RW Select probe for auxiliary output regulator 0 ... 6 0 Num
HA HA01 17420 WORD Y -1 49513,2 N RW Auxiliary output regulator setpoint -500 ... 999 20 °C
HA HA02 17422 WORD Y -1 49513,4 N RW Auxiliary output regulator hysteresis -500 ... 999 10 °C
br br00 50200 BYTE 49513,6 Y RW Select boiler mode 0 ... 3 0 Num
br br01 17434 WORD Y -1 49514 N RW Boiler dynamic differential setpoint -500 ... 999 100 °C
br br02 17436 WORD -1 49514,2 Y RW Maximum boiler dynamic differential 0 ... 999 255 °C
br br03 17438 WORD -1 49514,4 Y RW Boiler dynamic differential with heat pump lock 0 ... 999 0 °C
br br04 17440 WORD -1 49514,6 N RW Boiler proportional band dynamic differential 0 ... 999 50 °C
br br05 17442 WORD -1 49515 N RW Boiler regulator hysteresis 1 ... 255 20 °C
dF dF00 50262 BYTE 49519 Y RW Select defrost mode 0 ... 2 2 num
dF dF01 50263 BYTE 49519,2 Y RW Enable maximum power for non-defrost circuit 0 ... 1 0 num
dF dF10 50266 BYTE 49519,4 Y RW Select probe to enable interval count between defrost cycles 0 ... 4 1 Num
dF dF11 17500 WORD Y -1 49519,6 N RW Setpoint for enable interval count between defrost cycles -500 ... 999 25 °C / Bar
dF dF12 17502 WORD Y -1 49520 N RW Setpoint to clear cumulative time between defrost cycles -500 ... 999 130 °C / Bar
dF dF13 17504 WORD 49520,2 Y RW Cumulative time between defrost cycles 1 ... 255 20 Min
dF dF14 17506 WORD 49520,4 Y RW Minimum interval between defrost cycles 1 ... 255 60 Min

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
178/240
 VALUE PAR ADDRESS

VIS PAR ADDRESS

DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
DATA SIZE

DEFAULT
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

M.U.
R/W
EXP
CPL
dF dF20 50280 BYTE 49520,6 Y RW Select probe to disable defrost 0 ... 4 1 Num
dF dF21 17514 WORD Y -1 49521 N RW Disable defrost setpoint -500 ... 999 130 °C / Bar
dF dF22 17516 WORD 49521,2 Y RW Maximum defrost time 1 ... 255 5 Min
dF dF23 17518 WORD 49521,4 Y RW Drip time 0 ... 255 40 sec
dF dF30 17524 WORD Y -1 49521,6 Y RW Maximum dynamic defrost differential -500 ... 999 0 °C / Bar
dF dF31 17526 WORD Y -1 49522 N RW Dynamic defrost differential setpoint -500 ... 999 100 °C

dF dF32 17528 WORD Y -1 49522,2 N RW -500 ... 999 -50 °C

Defrost proportional band dynamic differential
dS dS00 49876 BYTE 49522,4 Y RW External temperature controller dynamic differential selection 0 ... 2 0 Num

dS dS01 17096 WORD Y -1 49522,6 N RW -500 ... 999 50 °C

Temperature control proportional band dynamic differential in Cool
dS dS02 17098 WORD Y -1 49523 N RW Temperature control proportional band dynamic differential in Heat -500 ... 999 50 °C

dS dS03 17100 WORD Y -1 49523,2 Y RW -500 ... 999 50 °C

Maximum temperature control dynamic differential in Cool
dS dS04 17102 WORD Y -1 49523,4 Y RW Maximum temperature control dynamic differential in Heat -500 ... 999 50 °C
dS dS05 17104 WORD Y -1 49523,6 N RW Temperature control dynamic setpoint differential in Cool -500 ... 999 150 °C

dS dS06 17106 WORD Y -1 49524 N RW Temperature control dynamic setpoint differential in Heat -500 ... 999 220 °C
Ad Ad00 50308 BYTE 49524,2 Y RW Select no accumulation mode 0 ... 3 0 Num
Ad Ad01 17542 WORD -1 49524,4 Y RW Constant accumulation compensation 0 ... 255 20 Num
Ad Ad02 17544 WORD -1 49524,6 N RW Accumulation compensation differential 0 ... 255 5 °C
Ad Ad03 17546 WORD Y -1 49525 N RW Accumulation compensation block setpoint in Cool -500 ... 999 40 °C
Ad Ad04 17548 WORD Y -1 49525,2 N RW Accumulation compensation block setpoint in Heat -500 ... 999 500 °C
Ad Ad05 17550 WORD 49525,4 Y RW Time compressor on for accumulation compensation regression 0 ... 255 24 sec*10
Ad Ad06 17552 WORD 49525,6 Y RW Compressor on reference time for accumulation compensation 0 ... 255 18 sec*10
AF AF00 50332 BYTE 49526 Y RW Select antifreeze function heat pump probe for circuit 1 0 ... 5 0 num
AF AF01 50333 BYTE 49526,2 Y RW Select antifreeze function heat pump probe for circuit 2 0 ... 5 0 num
AF AF02 17566 WORD Y -1 49526,4 Y RW Setpoint for antifreeze regulator with heat pump -500 ... 999 50 °C
AF AF03 17568 WORD -1 49526,6 Y RW Antifreeze regulator hysteresis with heat pump 1 ... 125 30 °C

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
179/240
 VALUE PAR ADDRESS

VIS PAR ADDRESS

DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
DATA SIZE

DEFAULT
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

M.U.
R/W
EXP
CPL
AS AS00 50344 BYTE 49530,4 Y RW Select ACS mode 0 ... 6 0 num
AS AS01 17578 WORD Y -1 49530,6 Y RW ACS setpoint AS02 ... AS03 500 °C
AS AS02 17580 WORD Y -1 49531 Y RW ACS minimum setpoint -500 ... AS03 400 °C
AS AS03 17582 WORD Y -1 49531,2 Y RW ACS maximum setpoint AS02 ... 999 600 °C
AS AS04 17584 WORD -1 49531,4 Y RW ACS hysteresis 1 ... 255 30 °C
AS AS05 17586 WORD Y -1 49531,6 Y RW ACS disengage setpoint differential -500 ... 999 30 °C
AS AS06 17588 WORD -1 49532 Y RW ACS heater hysteresis 1 ... 255 20 °C
AS AS07 17590 WORD -1 49532,2 Y RW ACS heater differential 0 ... 999 0 °C
AS AS08 17592 WORD Y -1 49532,4 Y RW ACS antifreeze setpoint -500 ... AS03 30 °C
AS AS09 17594 WORD 49532,6 Y RW ACS maximum activation time 1 ... 999 60 min
AS AS10 17596 WORD 49533 Y RW ACS minimum deactivation/activation time 1 ... 999 60 min
AS AS11 17598 WORD -1 49533,2 Y RW Sanitary water set point dynamic constant 0 ... 255 0 °C
AS AS12 17600 WORD Y -1 49533,4 Y RW Sanitary water system maximum temperature -500 ... 999 650 °C
AS AS20 17602 WORD Y -1 49533,6 Y RW ACS setpoint for anti-legionnaire’s disease AS21 ... AS22 650 °C
AS AS21 17604 WORD Y -1 49534 Y RW Minimum ACS setpoint for anti-legionnaire’s disease -500 ... AS22 600 °C
AS AS22 17606 WORD Y -1 49534,2 Y RW Maximum ACS setpoint for anti-legionnaire’s disease AS22 ... 999 700 °C
AS AS23 17608 WORD 49534,4 Y RW ACS minimum deactivation/activation time for anti-legionnaire’s disease 1 ... 999 15 min
AS AS25 50382 BYTE 49534,6 Y RW Anti-legionnaire’s disease period duration, day 1 0 ... 24 0 Ore
AS AS26 50383 BYTE 49535 Y RW Event hour, day 1 0 ... 23 0 Ore
AS AS27 50384 BYTE 49535,2 Y RW Event minutes, day 1 0 ... 59 0 Minuti
AS AS28 50385 BYTE 49535,4 Y RW Anti-legionnaire’s disease period duration, day 2 0 ... 24 0 Ore
AS AS29 50386 BYTE 49535,6 Y RW Event hour, day 2 0 ... 23 0 Ore
AS AS30 50387 BYTE 49536 Y RW Event minutes, day 2 0 ... 59 0 Minuti
AS AS31 50388 BYTE 49536,2 Y RW Anti-legionnaire’s disease period duration, day 3 0 ... 24 0 Ore
AS AS32 50389 BYTE 49536,4 Y RW Event hour, day 3 0 ... 23 0 Ore
AS AS33 50390 BYTE 49536,6 Y RW Event minutes, day 3 0 ... 59 0 Minuti
AS AS34 50391 BYTE 49537 Y RW Anti-legionnaire’s disease period duration, day 4 0 ... 24 0 Ore
AS AS35 50392 BYTE 49537,2 Y RW Event hour, day 4 0 ... 23 0 Ore
AS AS36 50393 BYTE 49537,4 Y RW Event minutes, day 4 0 ... 59 0 Minuti

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
180/240
 VALUE PAR ADDRESS

VIS PAR ADDRESS

DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
DATA SIZE

DEFAULT
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

M.U.
R/W
EXP
CPL
AS AS37 50394 BYTE 49537,6 Y RW Anti-legionnaire’s disease period duration, day 5 0 ... 24 0 Ore
AS AS38 50395 BYTE 49538 Y RW Event hour, day 5 0 ... 23 0 Ore
AS AS39 50396 BYTE 49538,2 Y RW Event minutes, day 5 0 ... 59 0 Minuti
AS AS40 50397 BYTE 49538,4 Y RW Anti-legionnaire’s disease period duration, day 6 0 ... 24 0 Ore
AS AS41 50398 BYTE 49538,6 Y RW Event hour, day 6 0 ... 23 0 Ore
AS AS42 50399 BYTE 49539 Y RW Event minutes, day 6 0 ... 59 0 Minuti
AS AS43 50400 BYTE 49539,2 Y RW Anti-legionnaire’s disease period duration, day 7 0 ... 24 0 Ore
AS AS44 50401 BYTE 49539,4 Y RW Event hour, day 7 0 ... 23 0 Ore
AS AS45 50402 BYTE 49539,6 Y RW Event minutes, day 7 0 ... 59 0 Minuti
HP HP00 50408 BYTE 49534,6 Y RW Select heat pump 1 lock probe 0 ... 7 0 num
HP HP01 17642 WORD Y -1 49535 N RW Heat pump 1 lock setpoint -500 ... 999 0 °C
HP HP02 17644 WORD -1 49535,2 N RW Heat pump 1 lock hysteresis 1 ... 255 20 °C
HP HP03 17646 WORD Y -1 49535,4 Y RW Heat pump 1 lock maximum dynamic differential -500 ... 999 0 °C
HP HP04 17648 WORD Y -1 49535,6 Y RW Heat pump 1 lock dynamic differential setpoint -500 ... 999 0 °C
HP HP05 17650 WORD Y -1 49536 Y RW Heat pump 1 lock dynamic differential proportional band -500 ... 999 0 °C
HP HP10 50424 BYTE 49536,2 Y RW Select heat 2 pump lock probe 0 ... 7 0 num
HP HP11 17658 WORD Y -1 49536,4 N RW Heat pump 2 lock setpoint -500 ... 999 450 °C
HP HP12 17660 WORD Y -1 49536,6 N RW Heat pump 2 lock hysteresis 1 ... 255 20 °C
PL PL00 17676 WORD -1 49537 Y RW Power limitation proportional band on external temperature 0 ... 255 0 °C
PL PL01 17678 WORD Y -1 49537,2 N RW External temperature setpoint for power limitation in Cool -500 ... 999 500 °C
PL PL02 17680 WORD Y -1 49537,4 N RW External temperature setpoint for power limitation in Heat -500 ... 999 -50 °C

PL PL10 17686 WORD -1 49537,6 Y RW Power limitation proportional band on water/air temperature 0 ... 255 0 °C
PL PL11 50456 BYTE 49538 Y RW Power limitation probe selection on water/air temperature 0 ... 6 2 Num
PL PL12 17690 WORD Y -1 49538,2 N RW High temperature setpoint for power limitation -500 ... 999 500 °C

PL PL13 17692 WORD Y -1 49538,4 N RW Low temperature setpoint for power limitation -500 ... 999 50 °C
PL PL20 17694 WORD -1 49538,6 Y RW Power limitation proportional band on pressure 0 ... 255 0 Bar
PL PL21 17696 WORD Y -1 49539 N RW High pressure setpoint for power limitation -500 ... 999 400 Bar
PL PL22 17698 WORD Y -1 49539,2 N RW Low pressure setpoint for power limitation -500 ... 999 30 Bar

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
181/240
 VALUE PAR ADDRESS

VIS PAR ADDRESS

DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
DATA SIZE

DEFAULT
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

M.U.
R/W
EXP
CPL
tE tE00 50688 BYTE 49544,6 Y RW Enable time band operation 0 ... 1 0 Num

tE tE01 50689 BYTE 49545 Y RW Select profile, day 1 1 ... 3 1 Num

tE tE02 50690 BYTE 49545,2 Y RW Select profile, day 2 1 ... 3 1 Num

tE tE03 50691 BYTE 49545,4 Y RW Select profile, day 3 1 ... 3 1 Num

tE tE04 50692 BYTE 49545,6 Y RW Select profile, day 4 1 ... 3 1 Num

tE tE05 50693 BYTE 49546 Y RW Select profile, day 5 1 ... 3 1 Num

tE tE06 50694 BYTE 49546,2 Y RW Select profile, day 6 1 ... 3 2 Num

tE tE07 50695 BYTE 49546,4 Y RW Select profile, day 7 1 ... 3 3 Num

tE tE10 50700 BYTE 49546,6 Y RW Event start time hour 1, profile 1 0 ... 23 7 Ore

tE tE11 50701 BYTE 49547 Y RW Event start time minutes 1, profile 1 0 ... 59 0 Minuti

tE tE12 50702 BYTE 49547,2 Y RW Operating mode from event 1, profile 1 0 ... 1 0 Num

tE tE13 17936 WORD Y -1 49547,4 N RW Cool mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 1, profile 1 tr11 ... tr12 120 °C

tE tE14 17938 WORD Y -1 49547,6 N RW Heat mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 1, profile 1 tr21 ... tr22 400 °C

tE tE15 17940 WORD Y -1 49548 N RW Sanitary water set point from event 1, profile 1 AS02 ... AS03 450 °C

tE tE17 50712 BYTE 49548,2 Y RW Event start time hour 2, profile 1 0 ... 23 12 Ore

tE tE18 50713 BYTE 49548,4 Y RW Event start time minutes 2, profile 1 0 ... 59 0 Minuti

tE tE19 50714 BYTE 49548,6 Y RW Operating mode from event 2, profile 1 0 ... 1 0 Num

tE tE20 17948 WORD Y -1 49549 N RW Cool mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 2, profile 1 tr11 ... tr12 120 °C

tE tE21 17950 WORD Y -1 49549,2 N RW Heat mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 2, profile 1 tr21 ... tr22 400 °C

tE tE22 17952 WORD Y -1 49549,4 N RW Sanitary water set point from event 2, profile 1 AS02 ... AS03 450 °C

tE tE24 50724 BYTE 49549,6 Y RW Event start time hour 3, profile 1 0 ... 23 15 Ore

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
182/240
 VALUE PAR ADDRESS

VIS PAR ADDRESS

DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
DATA SIZE

DEFAULT
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

M.U.
R/W
EXP
CPL
tE tE25 50725 BYTE 49550 Y RW Event start time minutes 3, profile 1 0 ... 59 0 Minuti

tE tE26 50726 BYTE 49550,2 Y RW Operating mode from event 3, profile 1 0 ... 1 0 Num

tE tE27 17960 WORD Y -1 49550,4 N RW Cool mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 3, profile 1 tr11 ... tr12 120 °C

tE tE28 17962 WORD Y -1 49550,6 N RW Heat mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 3, profile 1 tr21 ... tr22 400 °C

tE tE29 17964 WORD Y -1 49551 N RW Sanitary water set point from event 3, profile 1 AS02 ... AS03 450 °C

tE tE31 50736 BYTE 49551,2 Y RW Event start time hour 4, profile 1 0 ... 23 22 Ore

tE tE32 50737 BYTE 49551,4 Y RW Event start time minutes 4, profile 1 0 ... 59 0 Minuti

tE tE33 50738 BYTE 49551,6 Y RW Operating mode from event 4, profile 1 0 ... 1 0 Num

tE tE34 17972 WORD Y -1 49552 N RW Cool mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 4, profile 1 tr11 ... tr12 120 °C

tE tE35 17974 WORD Y -1 49552,2 N RW Heat mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 4, profile 1 tr21 ... tr22 400 °C

tE tE36 17976 WORD Y -1 49552,4 N RW Sanitary water set point from event 4, profile 1 AS02 ... AS03 450 °C

tE tE38 50748 BYTE 49552,6 Y RW Event start time hour 1, profile 2 0 ... 23 7 Ore

tE tE39 50749 BYTE 49553 Y RW Event start time minutes 1, profile 2 0 ... 59 0 Minuti

tE tE40 50750 BYTE 49553,2 Y RW Operating mode from event 1, profile 2 0 ... 1 0 Num

tE tE41 17984 WORD Y -1 49553,4 N RW Cool mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 1, profile 2 tr11 ... tr12 120 °C

tE tE42 17986 WORD Y -1 49553,6 N RW Heat mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 1, profile 2 tr21 ... tr22 400 °C

tE tE43 17988 WORD Y -1 49554 N RW Sanitary water set point from event 1, profile 2 AS02 ... AS03 450 °C

tE tE45 50760 BYTE 49554,2 Y RW Event start time hour 2, profile 2 0 ... 23 12 Ore

tE tE46 50761 BYTE 49554,4 Y RW Event start time minutes 2, profile 2 0 ... 59 0 Minuti

tE tE47 50762 BYTE 49554,6 Y RW Operating mode from event 2, profile 2 0 ... 1 0 Num

tE tE48 17996 WORD Y -1 49555 N RW Cool mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 2, profile 2 tr11 ... tr12 120 °C

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
183/240
 VALUE PAR ADDRESS

VIS PAR ADDRESS

DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
DATA SIZE

DEFAULT
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

M.U.
R/W
EXP
CPL
tE tE49 17998 WORD Y -1 49555,2 N RW Heat mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 2, profile 2 tr21 ... tr22 400 °C

tE tE50 18000 WORD Y -1 49555,4 N RW Sanitary water set point from event 2, profile 2 AS02 ... AS03 450 °C

tE tE52 50772 BYTE 49555,6 Y RW Event start time hour 3, profile 2 0 ... 23 15 Ore

tE tE53 50773 BYTE 49556 Y RW Event start time minutes 3, profile 2 0 ... 59 0 Minuti

tE tE54 50774 BYTE 49556,2 Y RW Operating mode from event 3, profile 2 0 ... 1 0 Num

tE tE55 18008 WORD Y -1 49556,4 N RW Cool mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 3, profile 2 tr11 ... tr12 120 °C

tE tE56 18010 WORD Y -1 49556,6 N RW Heat mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 3, profile 2 tr21 ... tr22 400 °C

tE tE57 18012 WORD Y -1 49557 N RW Sanitary water set point from event 3, profile 2 AS02 ... AS03 450 °C

tE tE59 50784 BYTE 49557,2 Y RW Event start time hour 4, profile 2 0 ... 23 22 Ore

tE tE60 50785 BYTE 49557,4 Y RW Event start time minutes 4, profile 2 0 ... 59 0 Minuti

tE tE61 50786 BYTE 49557,6 Y RW Operating mode from event 4, profile 2 0 ... 1 0 Num

tE tE62 18020 WORD Y -1 49558 N RW Cool mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 4, profile 2 tr11 ... tr12 120 °C

tE tE63 18022 WORD Y -1 49558,2 N RW Heat mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 4, profile 2 tr21 ... tr22 400 °C

tE tE64 18024 WORD Y -1 49558,4 N RW Sanitary water set point from event 4, profile 2 AS02 ... AS03 450 °C

tE tE66 50796 BYTE 49558,6 Y RW Event start time hour 1, profile 3 0 ... 23 7 Ore

tE tE67 50797 BYTE 49559 Y RW Event start time minutes 1, profile 3 0 ... 59 0 Minuti

tE tE68 50798 BYTE 49559,2 Y RW Operating mode from event 1, profile 3 0 ... 1 0 Num

tE tE69 18032 WORD Y -1 49559,4 N RW Cool mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 1, profile 3 tr11 ... tr12 120 °C

tE tE70 18034 WORD Y -1 49559,6 N RW Heat mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 1, profile 3 tr21 ... tr22 400 °C

tE tE71 18036 WORD Y -1 49560 N RW Sanitary water set point from event 1, profile 3 AS02 ... AS03 450 °C

tE tE73 50808 BYTE 49560,2 Y RW Event start time hour 2, profile 3 0 ... 23 12 Ore

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
184/240
 VALUE PAR ADDRESS

VIS PAR ADDRESS

DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
DATA SIZE

DEFAULT
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

M.U.
R/W
EXP
CPL
tE tE74 50809 BYTE 49560,4 Y RW Event start time minutes 2, profile 3 0 ... 59 0 Minuti

tE tE75 50810 BYTE 49560,6 Y RW Operating mode from event 2, profile 3 0 ... 1 0 Num

tE tE76 18044 WORD Y -1 49561 N RW Cool mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 2, profile 3 tr11 ... tr12 120 °C

tE tE77 18046 WORD Y -1 49561,2 N RW Heat mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 2, profile 3 tr21 ... tr22 400 °C

tE tE78 18048 WORD Y -1 49561,4 N RW Sanitary water set point from event 2, profile 3 AS02 ... AS03 450 °C

tE tE80 50820 BYTE 49561,6 Y RW Event start time hour 3, profile 3 0 ... 23 15 Ore

tE tE81 50821 BYTE 49562 Y RW Event start time minutes 3, profile 3 0 ... 59 0 Minuti

tE tE82 50822 BYTE 49562,2 Y RW Operating mode from event 3, profile 3 0 ... 1 0 Num

tE tE83 18056 WORD Y -1 49562,4 N RW Cool mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 3, profile 3 tr11 ... tr12 120 °C

tE tE84 18058 WORD Y -1 49562,6 N RW Heat mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 3, profile 3 tr21 ... tr22 400 °C

tE tE85 18060 WORD Y -1 49563 N RW Sanitary water set point from event 3, profile 3 AS02 ... AS03 450 °C

tE tE87 50832 BYTE 49563,2 Y RW Event start time hour 4, profile 3 0 ... 23 22 Ore

tE tE88 50833 BYTE 49563,4 Y RW Event start time minutes 4, profile 3 0 ... 59 0 Minuti

tE tE89 50834 BYTE 49563,6 Y RW Operating mode from event 4, profile 3 0 ... 1 0 Num

tE tE90 18068 WORD Y -1 49564 N RW Cool mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 4, profile 3 tr11 ... tr12 120 °C

tE tE91 18070 WORD Y -1 49564,2 N RW Heat mode temperature regulator setpoint, from event 4, profile 3 tr21 ... tr22 400 °C

tE tE92 18072 WORD Y -1 49564,4 N RW Sanitary water set point from event 4, profile 3 AS02 ... AS03 450 °C

AL AL00 50572 BYTE 49564,6 Y RW Time interval in which alarm events are counted 1 ... 99 60 Min
AL AL01 50573 BYTE 49565 Y RW Maximum number of historical events per alarm message 0 ... 99 99 num

AL AL10 50580 BYTE 49565,2 Y RW Number of high pressure alarms 1 ... 255 1 num
AL AL11 50581 BYTE 49565,4 Y RW Low pressure alarm bypass time 0 ... 255 120 sec

AL AL12 50582 BYTE 49565,6 Y RW Number of low pressure alarms 1 ... 255 3 num

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
185/240
 VALUE PAR ADDRESS

VIS PAR ADDRESS

DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
DATA SIZE

DEFAULT
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

M.U.
R/W
EXP
CPL
AL AL13 50583 BYTE 49566 Y RW Enable low pressure alarm during defrost 0 ... 1 0 num

AL AL14 50584 BYTE 49566,2 Y RW Flow switch bypass time after primary circuit water pump enabled 0 ... 255 15 sec
AL AL15 50585 BYTE 49566,4 Y RW Flow switch activation/deactivation time on internal circuit automatic alarm 0 ... 255 2 sec
AL AL16 50586 BYTE 49566,6 Y RW Enable flow switch time for primary circuit manual alarm 0 ... 255 2 Sec x 10
AL AL17 50587 BYTE 49567 Y RW Flow switch bypass time after open-circuit pump activated 0 ... 255 15 sec
AL AL18 50588 BYTE 49567,2 Y RW Flow switch activation/deactivation time on external circuit automatic alarm 0 ... 255 2 sec
AL AL19 50589 BYTE 49567,4 Y RW Time flow switch on before open-circuit manual alarm 0 ... 255 2 sec x 10

AL AL20 50590 BYTE 49567,6 Y RW Bypass compressor thermal switch alarm time 0 ... 255 1 sec

AL AL21 50591 BYTE 49568 Y RW Number of compressor thermal switch alarms 1 ... 255 1 num

AL AL22 50592 BYTE 49568,2 Y RW Compressor oil pressure switch alarm bypass time 0 ... 255 1 sec

AL AL23 50593 BYTE 49568,4 Y RW Number of compressor oil pressure switch alarms 1 ... 255 1 num

AL AL24 50594 BYTE 49568,6 Y RW Number of primary intercooler fan thermal switch alarms 1 ... 255 1 num

AL AL25 50595 BYTE 49569 Y RW Number of open-system intercooler fan thermal switch alarms 1 ... 255 1 num

AL AL26 50596 BYTE 49569,2 Y RW Number of primary circuit pump thermal switch alarms 1 ... 255 2 num

AL AL27 50597 BYTE 49569,4 Y RW Number of open-system pump thermal switch alarms 1 ... 255 2 num

AL AL40 17840 WORD Y -1 49569,6 N RW High pressure alarm regulator setpoint from analogue input -500 ... 999 420 Bar

AL AL41 17842 WORD -1 49570 N RW High pressure alarm regulator hysteresis from analogue input 1 ... 255 20 Bar

AL AL42 50612 BYTE 49570,2 Y RW Number of high pressure alarms from analogue input 1 ... 255 1 num

AL AL43 50613 BYTE 49570,4 Y RW Low pressure alarm bypass time from analogue input 0 ... 255 10 sec
AL AL44 17846 WORD Y -1 49570,6 N Low pressure alarm regulator setpoint from analogue input -500 ... 999 20 Bar

AL AL45 17848 WORD -1 49571 N RW Low pressure alarm regulator hysteresis from analogue input 1 ... 255 20 Bar

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
186/240
 VALUE PAR ADDRESS

VIS PAR ADDRESS

DESCRIPTION
RESET (Y/N)
DATA SIZE

DEFAULT
FOLDER

RANGE
LABEL

M.U.
R/W
EXP
CPL
AL AL46 50618 BYTE 49571,2 Y RW Number of low pressure alarms from analogue input 1 ... 255 2 num

AL AL47 17852 WORD Y -1 49571,4 N RW High temperature alarm regulator setpoint from analogue input -500 ... 999 800 °C

AL AL48 17854 WORD -1 49571,6 N RW High temperature alarm regulator hysteresis from analogue input 1 ... 255 20 °C

AL AL49 50624 BYTE 49572 Y RW High temperature time per alarm 0 ... 255 30 sec x 10

AL AL50 50625 BYTE 49572,2 Y RW Primary circuit anti-freeze alarm bypass time 0 ... 255 1 min

AL AL51 17858 WORD Y -1 49572,4 N RW Primary circuit anti-freeze regulator setpoint alarm -500 ... 999 40 °C

AL AL52 17860 WORD -1 49572,6 N RW Primary circuit anti-freeze regulator hysteresis alarm 1 ... 255 20 °C

AL AL53 50630 BYTE 49573 Y RW Number of primary circuit anti-freeze alarms 1 ... 255 1 num

AL AL54 50631 BYTE 49573,2 Y RW Open-system circuit anti-freeze alarm bypass time 0 ... 255 1 min

AL AL55 17864 WORD Y -1 49573,4 N RW Open-system circuit anti-freeze regulator setpoint alarm -500 ... 999 40 °C

AL AL56 17866 WORD -1 49573,6 N RW Open-system circuit anti-freeze regulator hysteresis alarm 1 ... 255 20 °C

AL AL57 50636 BYTE 49574 Y RW Number of open-system anti-freeze alarms 1 ... 255 1 num

AL AL70 50640 BYTE 49574,2 Y RW Enable gas low in plant alarm 0 ... 1 0 num

AL AL71 50641 BYTE 49574,4 Y RW Gas low in plant alarm bypass time 0 ... 255 5 min

AL AL72 17874 WORD -1 49574,6 N RW Gas low in plant alarm differential 0 ... 255 20 °C

AL AL73 50644 BYTE 49575 Y RW Time gas low in plant before alarm 0 ... 255 30 min

AL AL80 50652 BYTE 49575,2 Y RW Compressor start time on maintenance signal 0 ... 255 0 orex100

AL AL81 50653 BYTE 49575,4 Y RW Internal pump start time on maintenance signal 0 ... 255 0 orex100

AL AL82 50654 BYTE 49575,6 Y RW Internal pump start time on maintenance signal 0 ... 255 0 orex100

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
187/240
25.2.2 Folder visibility table

LABEL ADDRESS R/W DESCRIPTION DATA SIZE RANGE DEFAULT U.M.

_VisSt0 49424 RW Folder Ai visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisSt1 49424,2 RW Folder di visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisSt2 49424,4 RW Folder AO visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisSt3 49424,6 RW Folder dO visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisSt4 49425 RW Folder SP visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisSt5 49425,2 RW Folder Sr visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisSt6 49425,4 RW Folder Hr visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPa0 49425,6 RW Folder Par visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPa1 49426 RW Folder FnC visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPa2 49426,2 RW Folder PASS visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPa3 49426,4 RW Folder EU visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisSSp0 49426,6 RW Folder SP\COOL visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisSSp1 49427 RW Folder SP\HEAT visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisSSr0 49427,2 RW Folder Sr\COOL visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisSSr1 49427,4 RW Folder Sr\HEAT visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP0 49427,6 RW Folder Par\CL visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP1 49428 RW Folder Par\Cr visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP3 49428,4 RW Folder Par\CF visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP4 49428,6 RW Folder Par\Ui visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP5 49429 RW Folder Par\tr visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP6 49429,2 RW Folder Par\St visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP7 49429,4 RW Folder Par\CP visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP8 49429,6 RW Folder Par\Pi visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP9 49430 RW Folder Par\Fi visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP10 49430,2 RW Folder Par\FE visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP11 49430,4 RW Folder Par\PE visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP12 49430,6 RW Folder Par\Hi visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP13 49431 RW Folder Par\HE visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP14 49431,2 RW Folder Par\HA visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
188/240
LABEL ADDRESS R/W DESCRIPTION DATA SIZE RANGE DEFAULT U.M.
_VisPP15 49431,4 RW Folder Par\br visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP17 49432 RW Folder Par\dF visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP18 49432,2 RW Folder Par\dS visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP19 49432,4 RW Folder Par\Ad visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP20 49432,6 RW Folder Par\AF visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP21 49433 RW Folder Par\AS visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP22 49433,2 RW Folder Par\HP visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP23 49433,4 RW Folder Par\PL visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP24 49433,6 RW Folder Par\tE visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPP25 49434 RW Folder Par\AL visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPF0 49434,4 RW Folder FnC\dEF visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPF1 49434,6 RW Folder FnC\tA visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPF2 49435 RW Folder FnC\St visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPF3 49435,2 RW Folder FnC\CC visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPF4 49435,4 RW Folder FnC\Eur visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPFCC0 49576 RW Folder FnC\CC\UL visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPFCC1 49576,2 RW Folder FnC\CC\dL visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num
_VisPFCC2 49576,4 RW Folder FnC\CC\Fr visibility 2 bit 0 ... 3 3 num

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
189/240
25.2.3 Client Table

RESOURCE LABEL ADDRESS DATA SIZE CPL EXP R/W DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT M.U.
AI LocalAInput[0] 412 WORD Y -1 R Analogue input AIL1 -500 ... 999 0 °C
AI LocalAInput[1] 414 WORD Y -1 R Analogue input AIL2 -500 ... 999 0 °C
AI LocalAInput[2] 416 WORD Y -1 R Analogue input AIL3 -500 ... 999 0 °C/Bar
AI LocalAInput[3] 418 WORD Y -1 R Analogue input AIL4 -500 ... 999 0 °C/Bar
AI LocalAInput[4] 420 WORD Y -1 R Analogue input AIL5 -500 ... 999 0 °C
DI LocalDigInput DIL1 33158 1 bit R Digital input DIL1 0 ... 1 0 num
DI LocalDigInput DIL2 33158,1 1 bit R Digital input DIL2 0 ... 1 0 num
DI LocalDigInput DIL3 33158,2 1 bit R Digital input DIL3 0 ... 1 0 num
DI LocalDigInput DIL4 33158,3 1 bit R Digital input DIL4 0 ... 1 0 num
DI LocalDigInput DIL5 33158,4 1 bit R Digital input DIL5 0 ... 1 0 num
DI LocalDigInput DIL6 33158,5 1 bit R Digital input DIL6 0 ... 1 0 num
DI LocalDigInput DIL7 33158,6 1 bit R Digital input DIL7 0 ... 1 0 num
DO LocalDigOutput DOL1 33159,2 1 bit R Digital output DOL1 0 ... 1 0 num
DO LocalDigOutput DOL2 33159,3 1 bit R Digital output DOL2 0 ... 1 0 num
DO LocalDigOutput DOL3 33159,4 1 bit R Digital output DOL3 0 ... 1 0 num
DO LocalDigOutput DOL4 33159 1 bit R Digital output DOL4 0 ... 1 0 num
DO LocalDigOutput DOL5 33159,1 1 bit R Digital output DOL5 0 ... 1 0 num
DO LocalDigOutput DOL6 33159,5 1 bit R Digital output DOL6 0 ... 1 0 num
AO LocalDigOutput AOL1 33159,6 1 bit R Digital output AOL1 0 ... 1 0 num
AO LocalDigOutput AOL2 33159,7 1 bit R Digital output AOL2 0 ... 1 0 num
AO Analog.Out TC1 33224 BYTE Y R Analogue output TCL1 0 ... 100 0 num
AO Analog.Out AOL1 33225 BYTE Y R Analogue output AOL1 0 ... 100 0 num
AO Analog.Out AOL2 33226 BYTE Y R Analogue output AOL2 0 ... 100 0 num
AO Analog.Out ALO3 466 WORD Y -1 R Analogue output AOL3 0 ... 999 0 num
AO Analog.Out AOL4 468 WORD Y -1 R Analogue output AOL4 0 ... 999 0 num
AO Analog.Out AOL5 470 WORD Y -1 R Analogue output AOL5 0 ... 999 0 num
AI RemAInput[0] 854 WORD Y -1 R Analogue input AIr1 -500 ... 999 0 °C

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
190/240
 RESOURCE LABEL ADDRESS DATA SIZE CPL EXP R/W DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT M.U.
AI RemAInput[1] 856 WORD Y -1 R Analogue input AIr2 -500 ... 999 0 °C/Bar
setpoint Setpoint Cool reale 975 WORD Y -1 R Cooling mode set point -500 ... 999 0 °C
setpoint Setpoint Heat reale 977 WORD Y -1 R Heating mode set point -500 ... 999 0 °C
setpoint SBSetACSReale 1042 WORD Y -1 R ACS or anti-legionnaire’s disease setpoint -500 ... 999 0 °C
hysteresis Isteresi Cool reale 979 WORD Y -1 R Cooling mode hysteresis -500 ... 999 0 °C
hysteresis Isteresi Heat reale 981 WORD Y -1 R Heating mode hysteresis -500 ... 999 0 °C
time _TimMinOnOnCps 542 WORD R Compressors minimum on/on time timer 0 ... 32768 0 s
time _TimMinOfOfCps 544 WORD R Compressors minimum off/off time timer 0 ... 32768 0 s
time _TimMinOnOnPrz 546 WORD R Capacity steps minimum on/on time timer 0 ... 32768 0 s
time _TimMinOfOfPrz 548 WORD R Capacity steps minimum off/off time timer 0 ... 32768 0 s
time _TimMinOfOnCp0 550 WORD R Compressor 1 minimum off/on time timer 0 ... 32768 0 s
time _TimMinOfOnCp1 552 WORD R Compressor 2 minimum off/on time timer 0 ... 32768 0 s
time _TimMinOfOnCp2 554 WORD R Compressor 3 minimum off/on time timer 0 ... 32768 0 s
time _TimMinOfOnCp3 556 WORD R Compressor 4 minimum off/on time timer 0 ... 32768 0 s
time _TimMinOnOnCp0 558 WORD R Compressor 1 minimum on/on time timer 0 ... 32768 0 s
time _TimMinOnOnCp1 560 WORD R Compressor 2 minimum on/on time timer 0 ... 32768 0 s
time _TimMinOnOnCp2 562 WORD R Compressor 3 minimum on/on time timer 0 ... 32768 0 s
time _TimMinOnOnCp3 564 WORD R Compressor 4 minimum on/on time timer 0 ... 32768 0 s
time _TimMinOnCp0 566 WORD R Compressor 1 minimum on time timer 0 ... 32768 0 s
time _TimMinOnCp1 568 WORD R Compressor 2 minimum on time timer 0 ... 32768 0 s
time _TimMinOnCp2 570 WORD R Compressor 3 minimum on time timer 0 ... 32768 0 s
time _TimMinOnCp3 572 WORD R Compressor 4 minimum on time timer 0 ... 32768 0 s
time _TimEntraSbriC1 582 WORD R Circuit 1 defrost interval/duration time timer 0 ... 32768 0 s
time _TimEntraSbriC2 584 WORD R Circuit 2 defrost interval/duration time timer 0 ... 32768 0 s
time _TimSgoccioC1 586 WORD R Circuit 1 dripping time timer 0 ... 32768 0 s
time _TimSgoccioC2 588 WORD R Circuit 2 dripping time timer 0 ... 32768 0 s
time _TimRitOnCpPomPri 592 WORD R Switch-on delay timer for compressors after primary pump 0 ... 32768 0 s
time _TimRitOfPomPriCp 594 WORD R Switch-off delay timer for primary pump after compressors 0 ... 32768 0 s
time _TimASPMaxAtt 676 WORD R Timer maximum ACS on time 0 ... 32768 0 s
time _TimASPDisAtt 678 WORD R Timer minimum ACS off/on time 0 ... 32768 0 s

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
191/240
 RESOURCE LABEL ADDRESS DATA SIZE CPL EXP R/W DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT M.U.
time _TimALPDisAtt 680 WORD R Timer minimum ACS off/on time for anti-legionnaire’s disease 0 ... 32768 0 s
state _SbrinOnC1 33812,2 1 bit R Defrosting status 0 ... 1 0 num
state _SbrinOnC2 33812,3 1 bit R Defrosting status 0 ... 1 0 num
mode _MemoOff 33028 1 bit R Device in OFF 0 ... 1 0 num
mode _MemoRemotOff 33028,1 1 bit R Device in OFF 0 ... 1 0 num
mode _MemoLocalStBy 33028,2 1 bit R Device in STAND BY 0 ... 1 0 num
mode _MemoRemotStBy 33028,3 1 bit R Device in STAND BY 0 ... 1 0 num
mode _MemoLocalCool 33028,4 1 bit R Device in COOL 0 ... 1 0 num
mode _MemoRemotCool 33028,5 1 bit R Device in COOL 0 ... 1 0 num
mode _MemoLocalHeat 33028,6 1 bit R Device in HEAT 0 ... 1 0 num
mode _MemoRemotHeat 33028,7 1 bit R Device in HEAT 0 ... 1 0 num
counter STCPOreFunz[0] 939 WORD R Operation hours compressor 1 0 ... 65535 0 h
counter STCPOreFunz[1] 941 WORD R Operation hours compressor 2 0 ... 65535 0 h
counter STCPOreFunz[2] 943 WORD R Operation hours compressor 3 0 ... 65535 0 h
counter STCPOreFunz[3] 945 WORD R Operation hours compressor 4 0 ... 65535 0 h
counter STPMOreFunz[0] 947 WORD R Operation hours pump 1 0 ... 65535 0 h
counter STPMOreFunz[1] 949 WORD R Operation hours pump 2 0 ... 65535 0 h
counter STPMOreFunz[2] 951 WORD R Operation hours pump 3 0 ... 65535 0 h
differential SBDiffSetPoint 995 WORD Y -1 R Temperature control set point dynamic differential -500 ... 999 0 °C
offset SBDiffAdaptive 997 WORD Y -1 R Adaptive function offset -500 ... 999 0 °C
differential STDiffResPri 999 WORD Y -1 R Integrated electric heater set point dynamic differential -500 ... 999 0 °C
differential STDiffBoiler 1001 WORD Y -1 R Boiler set point dynamic differential -500 ... 999 0 °C
setpoint SBSetStartSbri 1009 WORD Y -1 R Defrost start set point -500 ... 999 0 °C
state SBCircuiti[0].OutAttive 33791 BYTE R Temperature control steps supplied circuit 1 0 ... 4 0 num
state SBCircuiti[0].OutAttive 33797 BYTE R Temperature control steps supplied circuit 2 0 ... 4 0 num
alarm Er00 33104 1 bit R General alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er01 33104,1 1 bit R Circuit 1 digital high pressure alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er02 33104,2 1 bit R Circuit 2 digital high pressure alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er03 33104,3 1 bit R Circuit 1 analogue high pressure alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er04 33104,4 1 bit R Circuit 2 analogue high pressure alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
192/240
 RESOURCE LABEL ADDRESS DATA SIZE CPL EXP R/W DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT M.U.
alarm Er05 33104,5 1 bit R Circuit 1 digital low pressure alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er06 33104,6 1 bit R Circuit 2 digital low pressure alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er07 33104,7 1 bit R Circuit 1 analogue low pressure alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er08 33105 1 bit R Circuit 2 analogue low pressure alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er09 33105,1 1 bit R Machine low charge alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er10 33105,2 1 bit R Compressor 1 thermal switch alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er11 33105,3 1 bit R Compressor 2 thermal switch alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er12 33105,4 1 bit R Compressor 3 thermal switch alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er13 33105,5 1 bit R Compressor 4 thermal switch alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er15 33105,7 1 bit R Compressor 1 oil pressure switch alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er16 33106 1 bit R Compressor 2 oil pressure switch alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er17 33106,1 1 bit R Compressor 3 oil pressure switch alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er18 33106,2 1 bit R Compressor 4 oil pressure switch alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er20 33106,4 1 bit R Primary circuit flow switch alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er21 33106,5 1 bit R Primary circuit pump1 thermal switch alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er22 33106,6 1 bit R Primary circuit pump2 thermal switch alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er25 33107,1 1 bit R Primary circuit pump thermal switch alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er26 33107,2 1 bit R Disposable circuit pump thermal switch alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er30 33107,6 1 bit R Primary circuit antifreeze alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er31 33107,7 1 bit R Disposable circuit antifreeze alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er35 33108,3 1 bit R High temperature alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er40 33109 1 bit R Primary exchanger fan thermal switch alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er41 33109,1 1 bit R Circuit 1 external heat exchanger fan thermal switch alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er42 33109,2 1 bit R Circuit 2 external heat exchanger fan thermal switch alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er45 33109,5 1 bit R Faulty clock alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er46 33109,6 1 bit R Time lost alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er47 33109,7 1 bit R No communication with keyboard alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er50 33110,2 1 bit R Primary exchanger electric heater 1 thermal switch alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er51 33110,3 1 bit R Primary exchanger electric heater 2 thermal switch alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er56 33111 1 bit R Auxiliary output alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
193/240
 RESOURCE LABEL ADDRESS DATA SIZE CPL EXP R/W DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT M.U.
alarm Er60 33111,4 1 bit R Primary exchanger water or air output temperature probe faulty alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er61 33111,5 1 bit R Primary exchanger water or air input temperature probe faulty alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er62 33111,6 1 bit R Faulty disposable exchanger temperature probe alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er63 33111,7 1 bit R Faulty disposable exchanger water or air input temperature probe alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er64 33112 1 bit R Faulty disposable exchanger water or air output temperature probe alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er67 33112,3 1 bit R Faulty display probe alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er68 33112,4 1 bit R Faulty external temperature probe alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er69 33112,5 1 bit R Faulty circuit 1 o 2 high pressure transducer alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er70 33112,6 1 bit R Faulty circuit 1 o 2 low pressure transducer alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er73 33113,1 1 bit R Faulty dynamic set point input alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er74 33113,2 1 bit R Faulty primary heat exchanger transducer alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er75 33113,3 1 bit R Faulty disposable exchanger transducer 1 o 2 alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er80 33114 1 bit R Configuration error alarm 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er81 33114,1 1 bit R Compressor operating hours exceeded warning 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er85 33114,5 1 bit R Primary circuit pump operating hours exceeded signal 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er86 33114,6 1 bit R External circuit pump operating hours exceeded signal 0 ... 1 0 flag
alarm Er90 33115,2 1 bit R Alarm log full warning 0 ... 1 0 flag
net command Reset allarmi 33532,2 1 bit W Alarm manual reset 0 ... 1 0 num
net command COOL 33532,3 1 bit W Select mode COOL 0 ... 1 0 num
net command HEAT 33532,4 1 bit W Select mode HEAT 0 ... 1 0 num
net command STAND BY 33532,5 1 bit W Select mode STAND BY 0 ... 1 0 num
net command DEF 33532,6 1 bit W Manual defrost activation 0 ... 1 0 num
net command ON/OFF 33532,7 1 bit W Select mode ON/OFF 0 ... 1 0 num

net command RemoteFormatStorAll 33533 1 bit W Reset alarm history 0 ... 1 0 num
net command Remote_AS 33533,1 1 bit W Select mode AS 0 ... 1 0 num
net command Remote_TogFascieOra 33533,2 1 bit W Enable/Disable band operation 0 ... 1 0 num

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
194/240
Energy SB-SD-SCW600
195/240
26 FUNCTIONS (FOLDER FNC)
The Functions menu is used to perform a number of manual functions such as switching the device on/off, acknowledging
alarms, deleting the alarm history, running a manual defrost and using the Multi Function key (MFK).
A number of these operations can be done from the keyboard and main display using the keys - see User Interface
chapter.
Functions associated to keys can be disabled and password-only access allowed to these functions at a "Service" level only
via parameters (see Parameters chapter).
For more details, see the table below:

folder operation Function activated by Notes

[key] if configured
FnC dEF Manual defrost YES [UP]
tA Reset Alarms YES [UP+DOWN]
St Switch device on/off YES [DOWN]
CC Copy Card Use (multi-function key) NO
EUr Reset alarm log NO

To open the Functions menu (folder Fnc) perform steps 1-4 as indicated below:

To view folder
FnC in the main
display, press
1
the Esc and Set
keys at the same
time. [esc+set]

Pressing both
keys will open
the
Programming
menu:
2
-------------------
The first folder
you will see is
the PAr folder.

Scroll with the

“Up” and
“DOWN” keys
until you find
3 the FnC folder.
-----------------
Press the set
key to open the
Functions menu.

The first label

you will see is
dEF.
-------------------
Scroll using the
“up” and
“down” keys to
4 find other
labels/folders. In
this order:
<IMG INFO>

 (dEF)
 tA
 St
 CC
 EUr

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
196/240
26.1 Manual defrost activation (dEF folder)

Press [esc + set] in the main screen.

The label ‘PAr’ will appear. Scroll with ‘UP’ and
See 1-4 ‘DOWN’ to find the ‘FnC’ label.
Press ‘set’. The label ‘dEF’ will appear. Scroll with
‘UP’ and ‘DOWN’ to find the ‘dEF’ label

Press the "set" key to activate defrost manually from

the keyboard

<IMG INFO>

The DEFROST LED will start to blink.

IMG INFO

26.2 Manual Reset (tA folder)

Press [esc + set] in the main screen.

The label ‘PAr’ will appear. Scroll with ‘UP’ and
See 1-4 ‘DOWN’ to find the ‘FnC’ label.
Press ‘set’. The label ‘dEF’ will appear. Scroll with
‘UP’ and ‘DOWN’ to find the ‘TA’ label.

Press the ‘set’ key for manual reset

---------

NOTE: resetting an active alarm will save the alarm

in the alarms log.
26.3 Change On/OFF state (folder St)

Press [esc + set] in the main screen.

The label ‘PAr’ will appear. Scroll with ‘UP’ and
See 1-4 ‘DOWN’ to find the ‘FnC’ label.
Press ‘set’. The label ‘dEF’ will appear. Scroll with
‘UP’ and ‘DOWN’ to find the ‘St’ label.

The label "OFF" will appear in the "St" folder if the

device is ON, or "OFF", if the device is switched OFF
locally or by remote

IMG INFO

Press the set key to change state from OFF to On

------------------------------------------------------

or from On to OFF
 26.4 Multi Function key
When connected to the Energy TTL serial port, the Multi Function Key (MFK) allows you to rapidly program device
parameters (up/download parameter map to or from one or more devices of the same type) and also program the
device’s firmware.

<IMG INFO>
339,85
123,1
0
2
42,55
0
-1

NOTE: The MFK and SBW600 connect with the YELLOW cable.
Connecting the
Multi Function Key For fast parameter programming, the upload (label UL), download (label dL) and copy card formatting (label Fr)
operations are as explained below:

<IMG INFO>
339,8
108,45
0
2
42,55
0
-1

UPLOAD (copy from DEVICE to MULTI FUNCTION KEY)

By doing this, the programming parameters and alarms log will be downloaded from Energy SBW600 to the Multi
Function Key.
DOWNLOAD (copy from MULTI FUNCTION KEY to DEVICE)
By doing this, the programming parameters will be uploaded from the Multi Function Key to the device.
FORMAT*
Formatting the Multi Function Key consists of deleting the contents of the Multi Function Key
* This should be done prior to the Upload when used for the first time
 Upload / Download / Formatting
The download procedure is illustrated in the
figure.
Press [esc + set] in the main screen.
See 1-4 The label ‘PAr’ will appear. Scroll with ‘UP’ and
‘DOWN’ to find the ‘FnC’ label.
Press ‘set’. The label ‘dEF’ will appear. Scroll with
‘UP’ and ‘DOWN’ to find the ‘CC’ label

The commands you need to use the Multi Function

Key are in the "CC" folder. Press the ‘set’ key to
access the functions.

Scroll with the UP and DOWN keys to find the

desired function:
 UL for upload
 dL for download
 Fr for format

Press the ‘set’ key and the upload (or download) will
be performed. (in this example, dL- download)

Wait for a few seconds...

Wait for a few seconds...

If this completes successfully, ‘yes’ is displayed;

otherwise ‘Err’ is displayed (°).

On completion, remove the MFK.

26.4.1 Download from reset
Connect the key with the device OFF.

Download firmware
At start up, if a compatible firmware is loaded into the MFK (the MFK can be prepared fro this with the Device Manager
software), the new firmware is downloaded into the device.
This happens as follows:
 firmware verification/update (MFK led flashes)
 termination with successful programming (MFK on fixed)
 switch off the device
If a compatible firmware is not loaded into the MFK, no download takes place.
If, on termination, the MFK led does not stay on fixed, the operation must be repeated as this means it failed.

Download parameters
On start up, if there is a compatible parameter map in the MFK, the programming parameters are loaded into the device;

lamp test completed…

Example A
…dLY… appears on the display
If the procedure terminates successfully.

IMG INFO

Example B
…dLn… appears on the display.
If the procedure does not complete successfully (°)

In both cases, the device will be switched OFF locally

(OFF appears on the display).
When you press [DOWN] (°°), the device will
operate:
With the new map Example A
With the previous map Example B

Remove the Copy Card on completion

(°°) see
User Interface chapter, (folder Par/UI) local ON/OFF
section
Change On/OFF state (folder St) section

NOTES:
 If the MFK is loaded with both a compatible firmware and a compatible parameter map, the firmware is
downloaded first and then (after the device has been switched off and back on again manually) the parameter
map.
 The formatting function is ONLY REQUIRED FOR UPLOADING (**):
o to use the Multi Function Key the first time (Multi Function Key that has never been used) and
o to use the Multi Function Key with models that are not mutually compatible.
o (**) a pre-programmed key supplied by Eliwell to DOWNLOAD parameters does not need to be
formatted. NOTE. Formatting can NOT be cancelled.
 after the download operation, the instrument will work with the newly loaded parameters map/firmware.
  Remove the key on completion of the operation

(°) If the string Err / dLn (download from reset) appears:

 Check that the key is connected to the device
<IMG INFO>
42,85
29,75
1
2
51
28 35

 Check the Multi Function Key - Energy SBW600 connection (check the TTL cable)
 Check that the key is compatible with the device
 Contact Eliwell technical support

26.5 Reset alarm log (folder EUr)

Press [esc + set] in the main screen.

The label ‘PAr’ will appear. Scroll with ‘UP’ and
‘DOWN’ to find the ‘FnC’ label.
See 1-4
Press ‘set’. The label ‘dEF’ will appear. Scroll with
‘UP’ and ‘DOWN’ to find the ‘EUr’ label.

Press the "set" key for 3 seconds [set]

The ‘YES’ label appears to indicate that the alarm log

has been deleted
 27 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

<IMG INFO>
30,6
43,9
1
2
51
27.1 General warnings
-28,35
-1

IMPORTANT!
Make sure the machine is switched off before working on the electrical connections. The work must be done by
qualified personnel. To ensure proper connections, comply with the following:
Power supplies other than those specified can seriously damage the system.
Use cables of suitable section for the terminals used.
Separate the cables of probes and digital inputs from inductive loads and high voltage connections to prevent any
electromagnetic interference. Do not place the probe cables near other electrical equipment (switches, meters, etc.)
Make connections as short as possible and do not wind them around electrically connected parts.
To avoid causing static discharges, do not touch the electronic components on the boards.
Eliwell supplies the high voltage cables to connect the device to loads - see Accessories chapter
Eliwell supplies the signal cables to connect the power supply, probes, digital inputs, etc. - See the Accessories chapter
The device must be connected to a suitable transformer that complies with the specifications provided in the
Specifications chapter.

27.1.1 Power supply - High voltage inputs (relay)

Do not exceed the maximum permitted current; for higher loads, use a contactor with sufficient power capacity.
<IMG INFO>

Important!
30,35
43,9
1
2
51
-28,35
-1

Make sure that power supply is of the correct voltage for the device.

27.1.2 TRIAC
The TRIAC (TC1, TC2 for 63x models) output, when partialized, suppresses the half-wave at the zero-crossing.

27.1.3 Analogue inputs-Probes

Temperature The temperature probes have no characteristic insertion polarity and can be extended using standard bipolar cable (note
probes that extending cables can affect the performance of the device in terms of electromagnetic compatibility: take great care
<IMG INFO>
30,35
43,9
with the wiring).
1
2
51
-28,35
-1

Important!

Pressure probes Pressure probes have a specific insertion polarity which must be observed.
Signal cables (temperature/pressure probes, digital inputs, TTL serial) must be cabled separately from high voltage cables.
Eliwell supplied cables are recommended. Contact the Eliwell sales department for item availability.

27.1.4 Serial connections TTL connection

TTL (COM 1) Use a 5-wire TTL cable up to 30cm in length.
An Eliwell-supplied TTL cable is recommended. Contact the Eliwell sales department for item availability.

27.2 Wiring diagrams

Circuit diagram key
 SUPPLY SBW ● SDW ● SCW 63x 64x Power supply 12-24Va;
 SUPPLY SBW ● SDW ● SCW 65x Power supply 12-24Va / 24Vc
 5c Auxiliary 5V c 20mA max supply
 12 c Auxiliary 12V c supply
 DO1...DO4, DO6 2A - 230Vac high voltage relay outputs
 DO1...DO3 SDW ● SCW 63x 2A - 230Vac high voltage relay outputs
 N Neutral
 TC1 TRIAC 2A 230Vac high voltage output
 TC1, TC2 SDW ● SCW 63x TRIAC 3A 230Vac high voltage output
 AO1 AO2 Low voltage (SELV (§)) PWM analogue outputs
 AO3 AO4 Low voltage (SELV (§)) 0…10V analogue outputs
 AO5 Low voltage (SELV (§)) 0…20mA / 4…20mA analogue outputs
 DO5 Open Collector low voltage output (SELV (§))
 DO4, DO5 SDW ● SCW 63x Open Collector low voltage output (SELV (§))
 DI1...DI6 No voltage digital inputs (°)
 AI1...AI2, AI5 NTC* / Digital Input configurable analogue inputs***
 AI3...AI4 NTC / voltage, current** / Digital Input configurable analogue inputs***
 GND Ground
 LAN Remote keyboard (KEYBoard) / SE600 (max 100m)
 TTL TTL serial for connection to Multi Function Key / Device Manager
 RS-485 RS-485 Serial for connection to supervision system
--------------------------------------
*SEMITEC 103AT type (10KΩ / 25°C)
**4…20mA current or 0…5V / 0…10V / 0…1V voltage input or no-voltage digital input
***no voltage digital input
(°) closing current for 0.5mA ground
(§) SELV: (SAFETY EXTRA LOW VOLTAGE)
27.2.1 Wiring Diagrams

646/C/S models

5 3 G 4 - + G
Supply GND GND AI5 AI4 AI3 AI2 AI1

Supply AO2 DI6 DI5 DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1 AO RS-485

/S Models
only
SB646/C
SB646/C/S

- + G 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

RS-485

/S Models
only

SD646/C • SD646/C/S
SC646/C • SC646/C/S
SE646

4 G 3 5
DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 AO2 Supply

AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 GND GND Supply

AO
<IMG INFO>

 6 digital inputs [DI1…DI6] ● DI

 4 high voltage digital outputs 2A 230Vac ● DO
 6 analogue outputs ● AO:
o 1 high voltage [TC1] 2A 230Vac analogue output
o 2 PWM analogue outputs [AO1, AO2]
o 3 low voltage (SELV (§)) analogue outputs
 2 outputs [AO3-4] 0-10V
 1 output [AO5] 4…20mA/0…20mA

 5 analogue inputs [AI1…AI5]

 1 low voltage digital output (SELV (§)) [DO5]
o Open Collector

Model /S RS-485 on board

 /C RTC supplied as standard

 TTL (COM 1) supplied as standard
 LAN connection to remote keyboard KEYB / SE600
 (§) SELV: (SAFETY EXTRA LOW VOLTAGE)
 655/C/S models

5 3 G 4 - + G
Supply GND GND AI5 AI4 AI3 AI2 AI1

Supply AO2 DI6 DI5 DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1 AO RS-485

6 DO3 /S Models
only
SB655/C
SB655/C/S

- + G 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

RS-485

DO3 6
/S Models
only

SD655/C • SD655/C/S
SC655/C • SC655/C/S
SE655

4 G 3 5
DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 AO2 Supply

AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 GND GND Supply

AO
<IMG INFO>

 6 digital inputs [DI1…DI6] ● DI

 5 high voltage digital outputs 2A 230Vac ● DO
 5 analogue outputs ● AO:
o 2 PWM analogue outputs [AO1, AO2]
o 3 low voltage (SELV (§)) analogue outputs
 2 outputs [AO3-4] 0-10V
 1 output [AO5] 4…20mA/0…20mA

 5 analogue inputs [AI1…AI5]

 1 low voltage digital output (SELV (§)) [DO5]
o Open Collector
Model /S RS-485 on board

 /C RTC supplied as standard

 TTL (COM 1) supplied as standard
 LAN connection to remote keyboard KEYB / SE600
 (§) SELV: (SAFETY EXTRA LOW VOLTAGE)
 636/C/S models

- + G 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

RS-485

DO3
/S Models
only

SD636/C • SD636/C/S
SC636/C • SC636/C/S

4 G 3 5
DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DO4 Supply

AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 GND GND Supply

AO

 6 digital inputs [DI1…DI6] ● DI

 3 high voltage digital outputs 2A 230Vac ● DO
 6 analogue outputs ● AO:
o 2 high voltage [TC1, TC2] 3A 230Vac analogue output
o 1 PWM analogue outputs [AO1]
o 3 low voltage (SELV (§)) analogue outputs
 2 outputs [AO3-4] 0-10V
 1 output [AO5] 4…20mA/0…20mA

 5 analogue inputs [AI1…AI5]

 2 low voltage digital output (SELV (§)) [DO4, DO5]
o Open Collector

Model /S RS-485 on board

 /C RTC supplied as standard

 TTL (COM 1) supplied as standard
 LAN connection to remote keyboard KEYB / SE600
 (§) SELV: (SAFETY EXTRA LOW VOLTAGE)
 632 model

7 8 9 10

SE632

DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 AO2 Supply

AI1 AI2 NC NC AI5 GND GND NC Supply

<IMG INFO>
339,9
273,4
0
2
72,25
0
-1

 6 digital inputs [DI1…DI6] ● DI

 3 high voltage digital outputs 2A 230Vac ● DO
 2 analogue outputs ● AO:
o 2 PWM analogue outputs [AO1, AO2]

 3 analogue inputs [AI1…AI5]

 1 low voltage digital output (SELV (§)) [DO5]
o Open Collector

 TTL (COM 1) supplied as standard

 LAN connection to remote keyboard KEYB or SB/SC/SD600
 (§) SELV: (SAFETY EXTRA LOW VOLTAGE)
 27.2.2 Example of low voltage input/output connection

SBW600 - Example of low voltage input/output connection

SDW SCW SE 600 Example identical

5 3 G 4
SUPPLY 5VccDO5 GND GND AI5 AI4 AI3 AI2 AI1

SUPPLY 12cc AO1 AO2 DI6 DI5 DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1 AO

SB646/C/S
L
N

Analogue outputs AO see chapter System configuration (folder Par/CF) paragraph

Configuration of analogue outputs
Digital output D05 see Digital Output Configuration
LAN : see connecting remote keyboard /SE600

27.2.2.1 Example of AO1 / AO2 connection

Example of SBW600 (AO1) connection with 1 fan module Example of SBW600 (AO2) connection with 1 fan module
CFS PWM or EXP211 CFS PWM or EXP211
SDW SCW SE 600 Example identical SDW SCW SE 600 Example identical

<IMG INFO> <IMG INFO>

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
208/240
27.2.2.2 Example of AO3 - AO4 connection

Example of SBW600 (AO3-AO4) connection with 1 fan

module CFS 0-10V
SDW SCW SE 600 Example identical

<IMG INFO>
225 7

Analogue output Terminal no. description

AO3 3 0-10V
AO3 G GND
AO4 4 0-10V
AO4 G GND

27.2.2.3 Example of AO5 connection

Example of SB600 (AO5) connection with 1 fan module CFS
0…20mA / 4…20mA
SDW SCW SE 600 Example identical

<IMG INFO>

Analogue output Terminal no. description

AO5 5 0…20mA / 4…20mA
AO5 G GND
 27.2.2.4 Example of DO5 connection
e of SBW600 connection with
W SCW SE 600 Example identi27.2.3 Example of connection of high voltage outputs

Example of model with TRIAC

646 models - Example of connection of high voltage outputs

TC1 TC1 DO1 DO2 DO3 N DO4 DO4

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5

27.3 Examples of network connections

27.3.1 Example of connection SBW600 – SE600

collegamento SBW600 –> SE600

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

SE646

4 G 3 5
DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 AO2 Supply

AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 GND GND Supply

AO

BLACK GND

BLUE SIGNAL

RED 12Vdc

5 3 G 4 - + G
Supply GND GND AI5 AI4 AI3 AI2 AI1

Supply AO2 DI6 DI5 DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1 AO RS-485

/S Models
only
SB646/C
SB646/C/S

27.3.2 Esempio collegamento SDW600/SCW600 – SE600

collegamento SDW600 / SCW600 –> SE600

 - + G 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

RS-485

/S Models
only

SD646/C • SD646/C/S
SC646/C • SC646/C/S SE646

4 G 3 5 4 G 3 5
DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 AO2 Supply DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 AO2 Supply

AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 GND GND Supply AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 GND GND Supply
AO AO

BLACK GND

BLUE SIGNAL

RED 12Vdc

27.4 SKP 10 Remote Terminal 32x74

SKP 10

R B B
E L L
D U A
E C
K

SKP 10

Terminal Terminal SKP 10 description

SBW600
SDW600
SCW600
LAN 1 1 GND / black
2 2 Signal / blue
3 3 12V~ power supply from base module

27.4.1 Example of connection SCW600 – SKP 10

collegamento SCW600 –> SKP 10
- + G 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

RS-485 R B B
E L L
D U A
E C
/S Models K
only
SKP 10

SC646/C • SC646/C/S

4 G 3 5
DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 AO2 Supply

AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 GND GND Supply

AO

RED 12Vdc

BLUE SIGNAL

BLACK GND
<IMG INFO>
27.5 SKW22 - SKW22L remote LCD terminal

<IMG INFO>

Terminal Terminal SKW22 Terminal SKW22L description Notes

SBW600
AIR1 AIR1 NTC on-board analogue input
1 GND / black GND / black GND / black
2 Signal / Blue Signal / Blue Signal / blue
3 +12Vdc /red** DO NOT CONNECT! 12V~ power from SBW600 SKW22
3 - Power Supply Power supply SKW22L 95-240V~ SKW22L
LAN - - Remote KEYBoard

To connect the device, use:

SKW22L
• (a) screw connector for connection to SB600
NOTE: ONLY connect terminals 1 and 2 to LAN

SKW22 only
• (a) screw connector for connection to SB600
• (b) JST 3-way connector for connection with SB600

The connector is inside the front keypad which is accessed by removing the cover (use a screwdriver or similar)
Cables must pass through the hole in the middle of the back plate
Make sure that the power supply is of the correct voltage for the device.
When mounted on a metal panel, the latter must be grounded.

27.5.1 Example of connection SCW600 – SE600 – SKP10 – SK22/22L

Example of connection SCW600 - SE600 - SKP10 – SKW22/22L

- + G 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

RS-485 R B B
E L L
D U A
E C
/S Models K
only
SKP 10

SC646/C • SC646/C/S SE646

4 G 3 5 4 G 3 5
DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 AO2 Supply DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 AO2 Supply

AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 GND GND Supply AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 GND GND Supply
AO AO

BLACK GND BLACK GND BLACK GND

BLUE SIGNAL BLUE SIGNAL BLUE SIGNAL

RED 12Vdc RED 12Vdc RED 12Vdc

SKW22L
ONLY! LAN
DO NOT
CONNECT
+12Vdc to 3 NO!

SKW22/22L

black / GND
blue / signal
red /+12Vdc red /+12Vdc
blue / signal
Probe black / GND

LAN
<IMG INFO>
28 MECHANICAL ASSEMBLY
SBW600 – SKP 10
The instrument is intended for panel mounting (see diagram).
Make a 29x71 mm hole and insert the instrument; secure it with the special brackets provided.
Do not mount the device in damp and/or dirt-laden areas; it is suitable for use in places with ordinary or normal levels of
pollution.
Keep the area around the device cooling slots adequately ventilated.
The TTL serial is on the left side of the device.

Example of panel-mounted SBW600 – SKP 10 Panel-mounted SBW600 – SKP 10

IMG INFO

The images refer to SBW600

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
213/240
 SBW600 – SKP 10 SBW600 – SKP 10
Example of panel mounting - side view Removing the device from the panel - side view

<IMG INFO>

<IMG INFO>

The images refer to SBW600

TTL socket SBW600

IMG INFO

Panel cut-out
29

71

A
(A) PANEL THICKNESS 0.5-1-1.5-2-2.5-3 mm
<IMG INFO>
150,1
105,95
0
2

SDW600 – SCW600 – SE600

The instrument is intended for 4DIN rail mounting
29 TECHNICAL DATA

29.1 General specifications

29.1.1 SB600 General specifications

Standard Min. Max.

Power supply voltage Models 63x 64x 12-24V~
Power supply voltage Models 65x 12-24V~ /24Vc
Power supply frequency 50Hz/60Hz --- ---
Consumption SBW600 SDW600 SCW600 6VA / 4W --- ---
Consumption SE600 5VA /3.5W --- ---
Insulation class 2 --- ---
Working temperature 25°C -10°C 55°C
Ambient operating humidity (non-condensing) 30% 10% 90%
Storage temperature 25°C -20°C 85°C
Ambient storage humidity (non-condensing) 30% 10% 90%

Classification
The product complies with the following European Community Directive 2006/95/EC
Directives Directive 89/108/EC

and complies with the following harmonised regulations: EN 60730-2-6

EN 60730-2-9
Use operating (not safety) device for
incorporation
Mounting panel or on DIN Omega bar
support
Type of action 1.B 1.Y
Pollution class 2
Overvoltage category II
Nominal pulse voltage 2500V
Digital outputs refer to the label on the device.

Fire resistance category D

Software class A

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
215/240
 29.2 I/O features
Type Folder Description Model
DI1 DI2 DI3 6 no-voltage digital inputs
Digital inputs All models
DI4 DI5 DI6 Closing current for ground: 0.5mA
4 relays 2A 250V~;
Digital outputs DO1 DO2
*For 636 models D04 is available as Open Collector All models
High voltage DO3 DO4*
output
DO6 1 relay 2A 250V~; 65x Models
1 output Open Collector
DO4* 63x models
Open Collector low voltage **Max. current 35mA @12Vcc
(SELV) digital output 1 output Open Collector
DO5 All models
**Max. current 35mA @12Vcc
1 - 2A TRIAC, max 250V~
Analogue output Resolution 1%
High voltage TC1 Contactors may NOT be installed downstream 64x Models
from the Triac

2 - 3A TRIAC, max 250V~

Resolution 1%
TC1
Contactors may NOT be installed downstream 63x Models
TC2 = AO2
from the Triac

2 outputs PWM / Open Collector

PWM
AO1 All models
resolution: 1%
Analogue outputs AO2 Except
PWM / Open Collector
PWM/Open Collector Models 63x
Nominal range 0…16.9Vc (12V~ rectified)
low voltage (SELV) Where AO2 = TC2
Closing at 12Vc
(TRIAC)
**Max. current 35mA (min. load 340Ohm @12Vcc)

2 outputs 0-10V
AO3  2% full scale accuracy
AO4  Resolution 1% All models
 output 0…10Vcc, max 28mA*** @10V
Analogue outputs (min. load resistance 360Ohm).
low voltage (SELV) 1 output 4..20mA / 0…20mA
 2% full scale accuracy
AO5
 Resolution 1% All models
 output 0/4…20mA max. load (max load
resistance 350Ohm)***
3 configurable inputs:
a) temperature NTC 103AT 10kΩ,
measurement range -50C  99.9C;
b) no voltage digital input

2 configurable inputs:
a) temperature NTC 103AT 10kO,
measurement range -50C  99.9C;
AI1 AI2
b) current input 4...20 mA /voltage input 0-
10V/0-5V/0-1V
Analogue inputs AI3 AI4 All models
measurement range -50.0  +99.9;
accuracy: 1% full scale (2% full scale for 0-1V voltage
AI5
input)
Resolution: (a) 0.1°C (b) 0.1°C/bar
Input impedance (b):
 0-10V and 0-5V: 21KOhm
 0-1V: 10KOhm
 4…20mA: 100Ohm
c) no voltage digital input

* For 63x models DO4 is an Open collector, TC2 equals to AO2 (TC2=AO2) – see System configuration (folder PAr/CL-
Cr-CF) chapter

** Outputs AO1, AO2 and DO5 (typically connected to the device's auxiliary 12V output) cannot deliver more than 70mA
total). Any other loads connected to the same 12Vc auxiliary output must also be taken into account

If the SKP 10 keypad is connected to the device, the current becomes 55mA
<IMG INFO>

*** outputs AO3, AO4 and AO5 cannot deliver more than 40mA total.
56,75
43,9
1
2
51
-28,35
-1
29.3 Mechanical specifications

1 8-way high voltage male connector All models

For use in combination with the supplied female connector

1 20-way snap-on low voltage connector

All models
To be used with COLV0000E0100

1 JST 3-way remote keyboard connector

Terminals and connectors All models
To be used with COLV000033200

1 JST 4 -way connector

To be used with COLV000042100 All models

1 JST 3-way connector Models /S

To be used with COLV000035100

Housing Housing: PC+ABS plastic resin with V0 flammability rating

29.4 Display and LEDS

 4 digits or 3 digits + sign; All models
Display and LEDS
 18 LEDs except SCW600 SE600
UP DOWN All models
Keys  4 keys
set esc except SCW600 SE600

29.5 Serial
 1 TTL serial for connection to All models
CopyCard (MFK) or Personal
TTL
Serial Computer via interface module

RS-485  RS-485 opto-isolated serial Models /S

29.6 Transformer
The instrument must be connected to a suitable current transformer with the following features:
 Primary voltage: depending on requirements of individual device and/or country of installation
 Secondary voltage: 12V~
 Power supply frequency: 50/60Hz
 Rating: 6VA min. (/S models), 5VA (all other models)
29.7 Mechanical dimensions
Depth (d)
Length (L) mm Height (H) mm Notes
mm
Front keypad 76.4 // 35 (+0.2mm)
Front (cover) SDW600 70 // 45 (+0.2mm)
SC600 SE600
76
Dimensions SB600 86 26
connectors excluded
Dimensions SDW600 70.2 61.6 87 4DIN
SCW600 SE600
56.4 from Din bar to
cover
Hole for panel mounting 71 // 29 (+0.2mm/ -0.1mm)

SBW600
70mm
76mm

29mm
71mm

74mm 76mm
32mm

28mm

SDW600 / SCW600 – SE600

SD SC SE
61.6mm 70.2mm 70.2mm
87mm

43.6mm 5.2mm

56.4mm
 SKP 10

70mm

29mm
71mm

30mm

74mm 30mm
32mm

28mm
<IMG INFO>

29.8 Permitted use

This product is used to control centralised air-conditioning units

For safety reasons the instrument must be installed and used in accordance with the instructions supplied. Users must not
be able to access parts with dangerous voltage levels under normal operating conditions. The device must be suitably
protected from water and dust according to the specific application and only be accessible using special tools (except for
the front keypad). The device can be fitted to refrigeration equipment for household and/or similar use. It has been tested
and in safety terms, conforms to applicable harmonized European standards.

29.8.1 Unintended Use

The use of the unit for applications other than those described above is
forbidden. It should be noted that the relay contacts supplied with the device are functional and therefore may be subject
to fault.
Any protection devices required to comply with product requirements or dictated by common sense due for obvious
safety reasons should be installed externally.

29.9 Responsibility and Residual Risks

Eliwell shall not be held liable for any damage incurred as a result of:
 installation/use other than those intended, and, in particular, failure to comply with the safety instructions specified
by applicable regulations and/or provided in this document;
 use with equipment which does not provide adequate protection against electric shocks, water and dust under the
effective conditions of installation;
 use with equipment which permits access to hazardous parts without the use of tools;
 installation/use with equipment which does not comply with current regulations and legislation.

29.10 Disclaimer
This document is exclusive property of Eliwell Controls srl. and cannot be reproduced and circulated unless expressly
authorized by Eliwell Controls srl
Although all possible measures have been taken by Eliwell Controls srl l. to guarantee the accuracy of this document, it
does not accept any responsibility arising out of its use.
30 DEVICEMANAGER
The Device Manager software uses the TTL serial connection of the SB600 to simplify and aid in installing and managing
the SB600

Main features
 Device parameters management.
 Real-time monitoring and recording of system variables.
 Device alarms records management.
 Firmware updating.

All basic components required for the use of DeviceManager are described below.

30.1.1 Device Manager software component

The software has a graphic user interface, which is described in the DeviceManager manual.
The Device Manager software supports both Eliwell and Modbus protocols.
The functionalities available to the customer depend on which Device Manager hardware interface he/she has purchased.

30.1.2 Device Manager interface component

The USB/TTL hardware interface, used in association with the software package, enables:
 use of the software itself.
 connection to devices for controlling them.
 connection to the Multi Function Key component.

There are three different types of interface, corresponding to three user levels:
 DMI 100-1 END USER.
 DMI 100-2 SERVICE.
 DMI 100-3 MANUFACTURER.
Depending on the type purchased, the client has access to the functions described above.

30.1.3 Multi Function Key Component

This is a memory device, which enables:
 updating the device's parameter values.
 updating the device's firmware.
 downloading parameter values from the device.
 downloading the alarms records from the device.

For more details

--> See manual
 8MA00219 Device Manager ITA
 8MA10219 Device Manager ENG

See the following tables:

Parameter Description Value

0 1

CF01 Select COM1 (TTL) protocol Eliwell Modbus

If CF01=0, the following parameters should be configured:

range
Parameter Description
Eliwell protocol controller address
CF20
0…14
Eliwell protocol controller family
CF21

range
Parameter Description

CF30 Modbus protocol controller address 1…255

Parameter Description values

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
220/240
 range
Parameter Description

 0=1200 baud
 1=2400 baud
 2=4800 baud
 3=9600 baud
CF31 Modbus protocol baudrate  4=19200 baud
 5=38400 baud (maximum speed when
using DeviceManager)
 6=58600 baud
 7=115200 baud

 0= STX
 1= EVEN
CF32 Modbus protocol parity
 2= NONE
 3= ODD
31 SUPERVISION
The TTL serial - referred to also as COM1 - can be used to configure the device, parameters, states, and variables using the
Modbus protocol.

Study the following tables:

Parameter Description value

0 1

CF01 Select COM1 (TTL) protocol Eliwell Modbus

If CF01=0, the following parameters should be configured:

range
Parameter Description

CF20 Eliwell protocol controller address

0…14
CF21 Eliwell protocol controller family

range
Parameter Description

CF30 Modbus protocol controller address 1…255

Parameter Description values

 0=1200 baud
 1=2400 baud
 2=4800 baud
 3=9600 baud
CF31 Modbus protocol Baudrate  4=19200 baud
 5=38400 baud (maximum speed when
using DeviceManager)
 6=58600 baud
 7=115200 baud

31.1 Configuration with Modbus RTU

Modbus is a client/server protocol for communication between network linked devices.
Modbus devices communicate using a master-slave technique in which a single device (the master) can send messages. All
other devices in the network (slaves) respond by returning the data required to the master or executing the action
indicated in the message received. A slave is defined as a device connected to a network that processes information and
sends the results to a master using the Modbus protocol.
The master can send messages to individual slaves or to the entire network (broadcast) whilst slaves can only reply to
messages received individually from the master.
The Modbus standard used by Eliwell uses RTU coding for data transmission.

31.1.1 Data format (RTU)

The data coding model used defines the structure of messages sent to the network and the way in which the information
is decoded. The type of coding selected is generally based on specific parameters (baud rate, parity, etc)*** and some
devices only support specific code models. However, the same model must be used for all devices connected to a Modbus
network.
The protocol used the RTU binary method with the following bytes:
8 bits for data, even parity bit (not configurable), 1 stop bit.

***configured with parameters CF30, CF31 - see table at start of paragraph

NOTE: transmission speed must be set at 9600 baud.

The device is fully configurable via parameter settings
They can be modified with:
 the instrument’s keyboard
 Multi Function key
 by sending data via the Modbus protocol straight to individual instruments, or via broadcast, using the
address 0 (broadcast)

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
222/240
The connection diagram when using Modbus is shown below

ModBus - device connection diagram ModBus - multiple devices connection diagram

Single via TTL Via RS485

<IMG INFO>

PC / Interface connection RS232 cable

Device / Bus Adapter connection TTL cable with 5 way connector (30cm) (available
with other sizes/lengths)
Bus adapter BA150
Bus Adapter / Interface connection RS485 cable
shielded and twisted (example: Belden model 8762
cable)

31.1.2 Modbus commands available and data areas

The commands implemented are:

Modbus command Description of command

3 Read multiple registers on Client side
16 Write multiple registers on Client side
43 Read device ID
DESCRIPTION
Manufacturer ID
Model ID
Version ID

Length restrictions

maximum length in bytes of messages sent to device 30 BYTES

maximum length in bytes of messages received by device 30 BYTES

Multiple read of 2 real setpoints

Field Decimal Hex Dimension

Device address (slave): 1 0x01 byte
Read command code: 3 0x03 byte
Start address: 975 0x03CF Word
Number of registers (words) to read: 3 0x0003 Word

Configuration of COOL operating mode

Write value 8 to word for remote commands at address h2FC

Field Decimal Hex Dimension

Device address (slave): 1 0x01 byte
Write command code: 10 0x0A byte
Write address: 764 0x02FC Word
Number of words to write: 1 0x0001 Word
Number of bytes (No. words x 2): 2 0x02 Word
Value (word) to write: 8 0x0008 Word

At the end of this operation, the device will switch to COOL mode (if enabled).

Configuration of ON/OFF operating mode

Write value 128 to word for remote commands at address h2FC

At the end of this operation, the device will toggle the On/Off state (if enabled).
The Ram variables that can be monitored and commands available are listed below.

Commands available:
 Manual alarm reset
 Change operating mode (Heat, Cool and St-By)
 Switch device on/off
 Enable defrost

Additional operations can be performed by following specific procedures:

 read alarm log
 change/set time
 reset running time of compressor and pump outputs

Details for read alarm log

The alarm log is saved in the EEPROM in a circular buffer composed of 7-byte records formatted as follows

Byte bit index Data Values

0 Bit 0 Alarm record flag free Must always be 0
1 Bit 1 Alarm state 0 = alarm reset; 1 = alarm current
2 Bit 2 Automatic reset alarm 0 = automatic reset; 1 = manual reset
3 -
0
4 -
5 - Not used
6 -
7 -
0 Bit 0
1 Bit 1
2 Bit 2 0÷59 = minutes
Start of alarm minute
3 Bit 3 >59 = undetermined value
1
4 Bit 4
5 Bit 5
6 Bit 0
7 Bit 1
0 Bit 2 0÷59 = minutes
End of alarm minute
1 Bit 3 >59 = undetermined value
2 Bit 4
3 Bit 5
2
4 Bit 0
5 Bit 1
0÷23 = hours
6 Bit 2 Start of alarm hour
>23 = undetermined value
7 Bit 3
0 Bit 4
1 Bit 0
2 Bit 1
0÷23 = hours
3 Bit 2 End of alarm hour
3 >23 = undetermined value
4 Bit 3
5 Bit 4
6 Bit 0
7 Bit 1
1÷31 = day
0 Bit 2 Start of alarm day
0 or >31 = undefined value
1 Bit 3
2 Bit 4
3 Bit 0
4
4 Bit 1
1÷31 = day
5 Bit 2 End of alarm day
0 or >31 = undefined value
6 Bit 3
7 Bit 4
0 Bit 0
1 Bit 1 0÷23 = hours
Start of alarm month
2 Bit 2 >23 = undetermined value
3 Bit 3
5
4 Bit 0
5 Bit 1 0÷23 = hours
End of alarm month
6 Bit 2 >23 = undetermined value
7 Bit 3
0 Bit 0
1 Bit 1
2 Bit 2
3 Bit 3 0÷99 = alarm code
6 Alarm code
4 Bit 4 >99 Not allowed
5 Bit 5
6 Bit 6
7 Bit 7

To identify the index of the first record, read variable PntStorAll at address h83A8
To identify the number of records present, read variable NumStorAll at address h83A9

Address 0x83A8 => data: 0x0027 = Index of first record (most recent);
Address 0x83A9 => data: 0x0027 = number of records (39);

To calculate the address of the most recent record:

Address EU00 = 51712 + (N-1)x7 = 51712 + 17x7 = 51832 (0xCA77)

Read EU00
TX: 01, 03, CA, 77, 00, 07, 8B, CA.
RX: 01, 03, 0E, 00, 82, 00, DD, 00, CF, 00, FE, 00, 04, 00, 06, 00, 3C, 9B, 13.

Address 0xCA77 => data: 0x0082 = Byte 0 of alarms log;

Address 0xCA78 => data: 0x00DD = Byte 1 of alarms log;
Address 0xCA79 => data: 0x00CF = Byte 2 of alarms log;
Address 0xCA7A => data: 0x00FE = Byte 3 of alarms log;
Address 0xCA7B => data: 0x0004 = Byte 4 of alarms log;
Address 0xCA7C => data: 0x0006 = Byte 5 of alarms log;
Address 0xCA7D => data: 0x003C = Byte 6 of alarms log;

Alarm record flag free =b0 =0

Alarm state =b1 =1
Automatic reset alarm =b0 =0
Not used = b 10000 = free
Start of alarm minute = b 011101 = 29
End of alarm minute = b 111111 = 63 (undefined)
Start of alarm hour = b 01100 = 12
End of alarm hour = b 11111 = 31 (undefined)
Start of alarm day = b 10011 = 19
End of alarm day = b 00000 = 0 (undefined)
Start of alarm month = b 0110 =6
End of alarm month = b 0000 = 0 (undefined)
Alarm code = b 00111100 = 60

The result shows that on EU00 there is an Er60 that started on 19/06 at 12.19 and which is still active.

To read EU01, the address is determined as follows

Address EU01 = Address EU00 - 7 = 51832 - 7 = 51825

To read EU02 continue by subtracting 7 fromaddress EU01 and so on…

NOTE: The minimum limit is address 51712 (hCA00) after which, if there are still alarms to be read, you must start again
from address 52404 (hCCB5) (the buffer is circular and after the 99th record it writes over the old ones).

Details for reading, modifying, setting the time

To write the hour, address the structure DataWrite at address h82F4

Write the seconds byte last!

Example: Set time h11:33 on 28/03/2007

Field Address Decimal Hex Dimension

0: seconds H82F4 0 0x0000 bytes
1: minutes H82F5 33 0x0021 bytes
2: hours H82F6 11 0x000B bytes
3: dayweek H82F7 - - bytes
4: daymonth H82F8 28 0x001C bytes
5: month H82F9 3 0x0003 bytes
6: year H82FA 7 0x0007 bytes

NOTE: Write the seconds byte last!

Write sequence:
Write 6 words of 46, 12, 0, 19, 6, 8 at the address H82AF5.

Write a word of 00 at the address H82AF4

Details for resetting the running time

To read and/or clear running time, address the counters in the device's EEPROM and RAM

STCPOreFunz[0] to the address h3AB Running time CP1 (in Ram)

STCPOreFunz[1] to the address h3AC Running time CP2 (in Ram)
STPMOreFunz[0] to the address h3B3 Running time P1 (in Ram)
STPMOreFunz[1] to the address h3B4 Running time P2 (in Ram)

EE_OreFunzCP0 to the address h4F20 Running time CP1 (in EEPROM)

EE_OreFunzCP1 to the address h4F22 Running time CP2 (in EEPROM)
EE_OreFunzP0 to the address h4F38 Running time P1 (in EEPROM)
EE_OreFunzP1 to the address h4F38 Running time P2 (in EEPROM)
Multiple reading of running time CP to the RAM address h3AB
The full command to be sent to the device will therefore be:

Address 0x03AB => data: 0x0065 = 101 hours running time CP1;
Address 0x03AC => data: 0x0000 = not used
Address 0x03AD => data: 0x0001 = 1 hours running time CP2;

Clear time CP1 (in RAM and EEPROM)

Write 0 for running time CP at RAM address h3AB

Write 0 for running time CP at EEPROM address h4F20

Variables:
See Parameters chapter (PAr), Client table

31.2 Configuration of device address

The Device Number in a ModBus message is defined by the parameter CF63 - see table at beginning of this section
The address 0 is used for broadcast messages that all slaves recognize. Slaves do not reply to broadcast messages.

31.2.1 Configuration of parameter addresses

The list of addresses is given in the Parameters chapter under the section headed "Parameters Table / visibility, ADDRESS
column (parameter addresses) and VIS PAR ADDRESS (parameter visibility addresses)

31.2.2 Configuration of variable / state addresses

The list of addresses is given in the Parameters chapter, under the section headed Client Table ADDRESS column
32 ANNEXE A – MODELS AND ACCESSORIES

32.1 Models

32.1.1 Models SBW SDW SCW600 SE600

PWM Safe voltage

Analogue outputs

Analogue outputs
Analogue output

Analogue inputs

Open Collector
Digital outputs

Digital output
digital inputs
item number

High voltage

High voltage

RS-485 serial
Voltage-free

Safe voltage

Safe voltage
(SELV)

(SELV)

(SELV)
model

(DO1…DO4)
(DI1…DI6) (TC1) (AO1-AO2) (AO3-AO5) (AI) (DO5) /S
(+ DO6)

SBW646/C/S SB641235W2400 6 4 1 2 3 5 1 YES

SBW646/C
SB641235W1400 6 4 1 2 3 5 1 NO

SDW646/C/S SD641235W2400 6 4 1 2 3 5 1 YES

SDW646/C
SD641235W1400 6 4 1 2 3 5 1 NO

SCW646/C/S SC641235W2400 6 4 1 2 3 5 1 YES

SCW646/C
SC641235W1400 6 4 1 2 3 5 1 NO

SDW655/C/S SD650235W2400 6 5 // 2 3 5 1 YES

SDW655/C
SD650235W1400 6 5 // 2 3 5 1 NO

SCW655/C/S SC650235W2400 6 5 // 2 3 5 1 YES

SCW655/C
SC650235W1400 6 5 // 2 3 5 1 NO

SE632 SE64123510400 6 3 // 2 // 3 1 NO

SE646 SE64123510400 6 4 1 2 3 5 1 NO
SE655
SE65023510400 6 5 // 2 3 5 1 NO

NOTE:
 SBW646 Power supply 12…24Va
 SBW655 Power supply 12…24Va / 24Va
TTL supplied as standard
/C indicates the presence of real-time clock (RTC)
/S indicates the presence of on-board RS485
SELV: SAFETY EXTRA LOW VOLTAGE
32.1.2 SBW ● SDW636 models 2 TRIAC

PWM Safe voltage

Analogue outputs

Analogue outputs
Analogue output

Analogue inputs

Open Collector
Digital outputs

Digital output
digital inputs
item number

High voltage

High voltage

RS-485 serial
Voltage-free

Safe voltage

Safe voltage
(SELV)

(SELV)

(SELV)
model

(DO1
(DI1…DI6) DO2 (TC1, TC2) (A01) (AO3-AO5) (AI) (DO4, DO5) /S
DO3)
SDW636/C/S SD632135W2400 6 3 2 1 3 5 2 YES
SDW636/C
SD632135W1400 6 3 2 1 3 5 2 NO

SCW36/C/S SC632135W2400 6 3 2 1 3 5 2 YES

SCW636/C SC632135W1400 6 3 2 1 3 5 2 NO

NOTE:
TC2 equals to AO2 (TC2=AO2) – see System configuration (folder PAr/CL-Cr-CF) chapter
TTL supplied as standard
/C indicates the presence of the RTC - Real Time Clock
/S indicates the presence of on-board RS485
SELV: SAFETY EXTRA LOW VOLTAGE

32.1.3 Remote terminals

Analogue Inputs

Power supply
Safe voltage
Dimensions
Mounting

Display

(SELV)
Model

Code

SKP10 SKP1000000000 panel 74x32x30mm LED / 4 digit - From base

1 onboard
NTC
SKW22 12V~
SKW2200000000 wall 137x96.5x31.3mm LCD 1 V/I
from base
configurable
input
1 onboard
NTC
LCD 95-240V~
SKW22L SKW22L0000H00 wall 137x96.5x31.3mm 1
backlit from base
configurable
V/I input
32.2 Accessories
Note: The photos are intended to show the accessories and are for indication purposes only. The dimensions of the figures are not to scale

Remote LCD terminals

Name Code Description Documentation

Instruction sheet
SKP10 SKP1000000000 32x74 terminal
8FI20016 Energy Flex GB-I

IMG INFO

Instruction sheet
9IS24102 remote terminal / terminale
remoto LCD GB-I
Remote LCD terminal (SKW22L: backlit)
manual
with internal ambient temperature control
SKW 22 SKW2000000000 8MA10218 remote terminal LCD GB
---
SKW22L SKW22L0000H00 8MA00218 terminale remoto LCD IT
Compatible with all models
8MA20218 terminal à distance LCD FR
8MA30218 terminal remoto LCD ES
8MA50218 LCD ferbedienung DE
8MAA0218 remote terminal LCD RUS

3-way wiring for remote LCD / 32x74 remote

terminal
WIRING C0LV000033200 NA
---
Supplied in package (SKW22 only)

Transformer
Transformer 230V~/12V 6VA (protected)
TF411215 NA

TRANSFORMER
Transformer 230V~/12V 11VA (protected)
<IMG INFO>
105,5
63,85
0
TF411210 NA
2
18,75
-55,35
-1

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
229/240
 Multi Function key

Smart key to up/download parameters

Multi-Function key MFK100T000000 NA
Alarms and applications log

Expansion
Name Code Description

230V 10A expansion module with base

EXP211 MW320100
fitted to DIN rail

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
230/240
 Cables
Name Code Description

Wiring (connector + 1m cables) to connect

WIRING COLV0000E0100
safe voltage inputs and outputs (SELV).

RS-485 serial port wiring COLV0000035100

WIRING SB600 - A03 AO4

WIRING SB600 - AO3-4-5 COLV000042100
(connector + 1m cables).

EMC filter
LC filter, network filter,
FILTER FT111201 recommended for applications with fan speed
modulation.

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
231/240
 Temperature probes
Name Code Description Documentation
Instruction sheet
SN691150 Probe NTC 103AT, 1.5m (plastic cap, 2-wire cable);
SN691150 GB-I
Instruction sheet
SN8T6H1502 NTC temperature probe 5X20 1.5m TPE IP68
SN8T6H1502 GB-I
Instruction sheet
SN8T6A1502 NTC temperature probe 6X40 TPE STEEL IP68
SN8T6A1502 GB-I
TEMPERATURE PROBES (1) (2)

Instruction sheet
SN8T6N1502 NTC temperature probe 6X50 TPE STEEL IP68
SN8T6N1502 GB-I

Ratiometric transducers
TD400030 Ratiometric transducer
EWPA 030 R 0/5V 0/30BAR Female connector
TD400050 Ratiometric transducer
EWPA 050 R 0/5V 0/50BAR Female connector
RATIOMETRIC TRANSDUCERS (1)

Pressure transducers
Pressure transducer
TD200130 EWPA 030 4...20mA 0/30bar
Male connector Instruction sheet
Pressure transducer 9IS41070
TD200030 EWPA 030 4...20mA 0/30bar EWPA 007-030 GB-
PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS (1) Female connector I-E-D-F-RUS
Pressure transducer ---
TD200107 EWPA 007 4...20mA -5/8bar Power EWPA 007-
Male connector 30 GB-I-E-D-F
Pressure transducer
TD300008 EWPA 007 4...20mA -5/8bar
Female connector

Pressure switches
Name Code Description
HR range (automatic reset) - minimum 100,000 ON/OFF cycles available
(1)
(1) HL range (manual reset) - minimum 6,000 ON/OFF cycles
PRESSURE SWITCHES (1)

HC range (automatic reset) - minimum 250,000 ON/OFF cycles

(1)

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
232/240
 Fan modules
Name Code Description Documentation

Instruction sheet
For item numbers 8FI40014
Single-phase speed regulators for
CFS FAN MODULES (1) See instruction sheet CFS -Fan Speed
currents from 2A to 9A
Modules GB-I-E-D-F

Instruction sheet
8FI40014
CF-REL FAN MODULE MW991300 6A 230V relay CFS -Fan Speed
Modules GB-I-E-D-F

Instruction sheet
8FI40016
5+5A 230V TRIAC CFS05 - TANDEM -
CFS05 TANDEM FAN MODULE MW991012
Fan Speed Module
GB-I-E-D-F

THREE-PHASE FAN REGULATOR (DRV 300) (1)

Specifications: Contact Eliwell Sales
3 phases 12…20A/420V~ LD312420T1S00  power supply 20A, 420V~; Department
(IP22 or IP55)  box: IP22.

Specifications: Contact Eliwell Sales

LD320420T1S00  power supply 20A, 420V~; Department
 box: IP55.
Specifications: Contact Eliwell Sales
<IMG INFO>

LD312420T1G00  power supply 12A, 420V~; Department

 box: IP22.
Specifications: Contact Eliwell Sales
LD320420T1G00  power supply 20A, 420V~; Department
 box: IP22.

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
233/240
 Interface modules
Name Code Description Documentation
DM1001002000
DM100-1 End User
DM1002002000
DM100-2 Service
Instruction sheet
9IS44014 Device
Device Manager interface Manager Interface
GB-I
DM1003002000
DM100-3 Manufacturer

Connections
TTL/RS-485 communication interface
130 TTL RS485 bus adapter BA11250N3700 12V aux. output for power supply to device.
TTL cable, L = 1 m (2)
Instruction sheet
9IS43084
BusAdapter 130-
TTL/RS-485 communication interface 150-350 GB-I-E-D-F
150 TTL RS485 bus adapter BA10000R3700
TTL cable, L = 1 m (2)

Instruction sheet
8FI40023
RadioAdapter
GB-I-E-D-F
RadioAdapter TTL/WIRELESS
BARF0TS00NH00 (1)
802.15.4
manual
9MAX0010
RadioAdapter
IMG INFO
GB-I-E-D-F

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
234/240
 Software Tools
Name Code Description Documentation

Manual
8MA00219
DeviceManager ITA
8MA00219
DeviceManager GB
8MA30219
DeviceManager
Contact Eliwell Sales SPA
Device Manager Department 8MA50219
DeviceManager
GER
8MA20219
DeviceManager
FRE
8MAA0219
DeviceManager
RUS

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
235/240
 Name Code Description Documentation
WebAdapter WA0ET00X700

Instruction sheet
9IS44065
WebAdapter GB-I-E-D-F-RUS

manual
 8MA00202 WebAdapter ITA
WebAdapter  8MA10202 WebAdapter GB
WA0WF00X700
Wi-Fi  8MA20202 WebAdapter FRE
 8MA30202 WebAdapter SPA
 8MA50202 WebAdapter GER
 8MAA0202 WebAdapter RUS

IMG INFO

Demo Case
Name Code Description

Demo Case SB600/ST700 VAL00031K Demo case for SB600/ST700

<IMG INFO>
99,45
101,3
0
2
18,7
-92 95

(1) various item numbers available. Contact Eliwell Sales Department

(2) Various lengths can be requested

GENERAL NOTES:
COLV cabling are not required if they are made by the manufacturer.
Connection of remote keyboard via 3-way cables with no optional modules.
Eliwell can also supply a variety of different NTC probes depending on the cable type (PVC or silicon) and length.

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
236/240
Energy SB-SD-SCW600
237/240
Energy SB-SD-SCW600
238/240
33 ANALITIC INDEX
A C
Access to folders - menu structure............................. 16 Change On/OFF state (folder St).........................198
Accessories..................................................................... 229 Client Table................................................................. 190
ACS Heater for Anti-Legionnaire's Disease ............110 Compressor configuration............................................55
ADAPTIVE (FOLDER PAR/AD)...................................... 96 Compressor on/off sequence .......................................59
Adaptive function .......................................................... 97 Compressor Parameters (CP) - Compressor.... 150
Adaptive function with hysteresis modification Compressor timing.........................................................56
....................................................................................... 98 COMPRESSORS (FOLDER PAR/CP) .............................54
Adaptive function with setpoint and hysteresis Configuration of analogue inputs ..............................32
modification................................................................ 98 Configuration of analogue outputs ...........................38
Adaptive function with setpoint modification. 96 Configuration of device address................................226
Adaptive parameters (Ad) - Adaptive .....................157 Configuration of digital inputs....................................35
Alarm Display (AL)......................................................... 22 Configuration of digital outputs.................................37
Alarm events (Par/EU folder) ...................................... 29 Configuration of integration heaters ..................79
Alarm parameters (AL) - ALarm...............................164 Configuration of internal circuit water pump .62
Alarm table key..........................................................127 Configuration of parameter addresses................... 226
Alarms ............................................................................122 Configuration of SE600 expansion analogue inputs
ALARMS AND DIAGNOSTICS (FOLDER PAR/AL) .. 122 ........................................................................................32
Analogue alarms..........................................................126 Configuration of variable / state addresses .......... 226
Analogue inputs: Configuration table ...................... 32 Configuration parameters (CF) - Configuration .. 144
Analogue inputs-Probes .............................................203 Configuration with Modbus RTU..............................222
Analogue output TC1 - AO1 AO2 : Configuring SKW remote terminal analogue inputs
Configuration table ............................................... 39 ........................................................................................32
Analogue outputs .......................................................... 38 Connecting the Multi Function Key ........................ 199
ANNEXE A – MODELS AND ACCESSORIES............. 227 Continuous operation .....................................63; 68; 71
Antifreeze operation with pump................................. 67 Control of the second pump ........................................63
Antifreeze parameters with heat pump (AF) - Cross references................................................................. 7
AntiFreeze..................................................................157 D
ANTIFREEZE PARAMETERS WITH HEAT PUMP Data format (RTU) ...................................................... 222
(FOLDER PAR/AF) - ANTIFREEZE.......................... 100 Defrost...............................................................................90
Anti-Legionnaire's Disease......................................... 108 DEFROST (FOLDER PAR/DF).........................................89
Automatic changeover ................................................. 50 Defrost parameters (dF) - deFrost ........................... 156
Automatic reset .........................................................122 Defrosting cycle...............................................................91
AUXILIARY OUTPUT (FOLDER PAR/HA).................... 85 Description of keys - combined action................12
Auxiliary output parameters (HA) - Auxiliary Output Description of keys and associated functions .... 9
.....................................................................................155 Device ‘On’ --> ‘Standby’ ..............................................11
Availability of resources................................................ 59 Device ‘Standby’ --> ‘On’ ..............................................11
B Device Manager interface component ................... 220
BLOCK HEAT PUMP (FOLDER PAR/HP)................... 111 Device Manager software component ................... 220
Block heat pump 1 - setpoint....................................113 DEVICEMANAGER.........................................................220
Block heat pump based on external Differential temperature control ................................47
temperature ............................................................111 Differential temperature control in Cool / Heat
Block heat pump based on regulation mode .............................................................................47
temperature ............................................................112 Digital alarms............................................................... 123
Block heat pump from digital input........................113 Digital inputs...................................................................35
BOILER (FOLDER PAR/BR) ............................................ 86 Digital inputs: Configuration table ......................35
Boiler configuration....................................................... 86 Digital outputs ................................................................37
Boiler differential............................................................ 87 Digital temperature control.........................................48
Boiler parameters (br) -boiler ...................................155 Disclaimer.......................................................................219
Boiler regulation ............................................................ 88 Display ..............................................................................13
Display and LEDS..........................................................217

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
239/240
Display and reset compressor/pump hours ............. 26 Fixed modification (decalibration) of the setpoint
Display Inputs/Outputs (AiL, diL, tCL1/AOL, dOL).. 18 (dS00=2).......................................................................95
Download from reset...................................................201 Flow switch alarm ....................................................... 124
Dynamic ACS setpoint ................................................107 Folder visibility table................................................... 188
DYNAMIC SETPOINT (FOLDER PAR/DS)................... 93 FUNCTIONS (FOLDER FNC)........................................196
Dynamic setpoint parameters (dS) - dynamic Functions (Par/FnC folder)...........................................28
Setpoint......................................................................156 G
E General Description ......................................................... 8
Electric heater parameters (HI) - Electric Heaters 154 General specifications..................................................215
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS...................................... 203 General warnings.......................................................203
End defrost and coil drainage..................................... 91 H
Entering a password (Par/PASS folder)..................... 28 Heat pump block parameters (HP) - Heat Pump. 159
Esempio collegamento SDW600/SCW600 – SE600 Heaters in defrost mode................................................82
.....................................................................................210 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ......................................... 7
ET(MT example............................................................. 98 I
ET<MT example............................................................ 96 I/O configuration parameters expanded on
Example of AO1 / AO2 connection..........................208 expansion (CE) - Configuration Expansion ....... 138
Example of AO3 - AO4 connection ..........................209 I/O features ..................................................................216
Example of AO5 connection..................................209 Icons for emphasis............................................................ 7
Example of automatic changeover based on Integration heater differential.....................................79
external air temperature.......................................... 50 Integration heater regulation......................................81
Example of automatic changeover based on water Internal antifreeze heater ........................................77
temperature ................................................................ 50 Internal circuit antifreeze heater control..................78
Example of connection of high voltage outputs...210 INTERNAL CIRCUIT PUMP (FOLDER PAR/PI) ...........62
Example of connection SBW600 – SE600 ...............210 Internal circuit pump analogue control in Cool /
Example of connection SCW600 – SE600 – SKP10 – Heat........................................................................63; 65
SK22/22L....................................................................212 Internal circuit pump digital control in Cool / Heat
Example of connection SCW600 – SKP 10..............211 .................................................................................63; 64
Example of DO5 connection..................................210 Internal circuit pump parameters (PI) - Internal
Example of how to set the setpoint (SP)................... 23 pump.......................................................................... 151
Example of low voltage input/output connection208 INTERNAL EXCHANGER ELECTRIC HEATERS (FOLDER
Examples of network connections............................ 210 PAR/HI).........................................................................77
EXP...................................................................................167 INTRODUCTION................................................................ 8
K
EXTERNAL CIRCUIT PUMP (FOLDER PAR/PE).......... 76
Keys...................................................................................... 9
External circuit pump parameters (PE) - External
L
Pump ..........................................................................153 LEDs and Display ............................................................13
EXTERNAL EXCHANGER ELECTRIC HEATER LEDs: decimal point........................................................13
PARAMETERS (FOLDER PAR/HE) – ELECTRIC LEDs: States and Operating Modes ............................14
HEATERS ...................................................................... 83 LEDs: utilities....................................................................15
External exchanger electric heater parameters (HE) - LEDs: Values and Units of Measure ............................14
Electric Heaters.........................................................155 Local I/O configuration parameters (CL) -
EXTERNAL EXCHANGER FAN (FOLDER PAR/FE) ..... 70 Configuration Local................................................ 135
External exchanger fan analogue control in Cool . 74 Low voltage (SELV) analogue output AO3-4-5:
External exchanger fan analogue control in Configuration table................................................40
Cool / Heat ................................................................ 72 M
External exchanger fan analogue control in Heat. 74 Main Display Menu........................................................16
External exchanger fan digital control in Cool / Heat Main functions: ................................................................. 8
................................................................................ 71; 73 Management of defrost alarms ..................................92
F Managing resources ......................................................59
Fan control in defrost.................................................... 75 Manual alarm acknowledgment and reset..............12
Fan control with single condensation....................... 75 Manual defrost................................................................92
First switch on................................................................. 15 Manual defrost activation (dEF folder) ...................197
Manual reset .............................................................. 122
Manual Reset (tA folder)............................................ 197 Multi Function key .......................................................199
MECHANICAL ASSEMBLY........................................ 213 Multi Function Key Component ............................... 220
Mechanical dimensions........................................... 218 N
Mechanical specifications.......................................... 217 No. interventions ......................................................... 122
Minimum compressor on time.................................... 56 Non-power stage compressors (CP00 = 0) ...............54
Minimum compressor on time for power stage O
increase ........................................................................ 57 Operating Mode Menu..................................................17
Minimum compressor switch on time for decrease in Operating modes.................................................. 49; 114
power stages ............................................................... 57 OPERATING MODES – TEMPERATURE CONTROL
Minimum time ................................................................ 96 (FOLDER PAR/TR).......................................................42
Minimum time between switching off/on for a given Operating states .............................................................49
compressor .................................................................. 56 OPERATING STATES (FOLDER PAR/ST) .....................49
Minimum time between switching on/off in defrost Operating states table...................................................51
mode............................................................................. 58 Operation on call .............................................64; 68; 72
Minimum time between switching on/on for a given Operation on call: periodic pump activation...........65
compressor .................................................................. 56 Other timings ..................................................................58
P
Minimum time between the switching off of more
Parameters (folder PAr)............................................27
than one compressor ................................................ 57
PARAMETERS (PAR) .....................................................134
Minimum time between the switching on of more
Parameters / visibility table ...................................... 167
than one compressor ................................................ 57
Parameters / visibility table, folder visibility table
Modbus commands available and data areas .....223
and client table ........................................................166
Mode Change.................................................................. 52
Permitted use.................................................................219
Mode selection parameters (St) - Operating
Post-ventilation...............................................................69
modes ........................................................................149
Power failure during defrost ........................................92
Models ............................................................................ 227
Power limitation - by external temperature (Cool
Models and Features ........................................................8
and Heat)...................................................................115
Models SBW SDW SCW600 SE600 ...........................227
Power limitation - by high pressure probe (Cool
Modification (decalibration) of the setpoint as a
and Heat) .................................................................117
function of the dynamic setpoint input................ 93
Power limitation - by low pressure probe (Cool
Modification (decalibration) of the setpoint as
and Heat) .................................................................118
a function of the dynamic setpoint input with
Power limitation - by temperature (Cool and Heat)
negative offset. ........................................................ 94
......................................................................................116
Modification (decalibration) of the setpoint as a
POWER LIMITATION (FOLDER PAR/PL)...................114
function of the dynamic setpoint input with
Power limitation parameters (PL) - Power
positive offset.............................................................. 93
Limitation ................................................................ 160
Modification (decalibration) of the setpoint based
Power limitation to 50%..............................................119
on the external temperature................................... 94
Power stage compressors (CP00 = 1,2) .....................55
Modification (decalibration) of the setpoint based
Power supply - High voltage inputs (relay) ........... 203
on the external temperature (dS00=1)................. 94
Pressure probes ............................................................ 203
Modification (decalibration) of the setpoint
Probe errors table..................................................... 131
based on the external temperature
Programming menu.......................................................27
(dS00=1):Modification based on the external
Proportional power step temperature control in
temperature with negative offset..................... 94
Cool/Heat mode.........................................................45
Modification (decalibration) of the setpoint
Proportional temperature control..............................45
based on the external temperature
Protection.........................................................................99
(dS00=1):Modification based on the external
Pump antilock mode .....................................................66
temperature with positive offset ...................... 94
R
Modification based on the dynamic setpoint input Real setpoint and hysteresis.........................................42
with negative offset................................................... 94 Real time ET .....................................................................96
Modification based on the dynamic setpoint input RECIRCULATION FAN (FOLDER PAR/FI)....................68
with positive offset..................................................... 93 Recirculation fan in Heating / Cooling .....................69
Modification of setpoint in heating..................... 97 Recirculation fan parameters (FI) - Internal Fan . 152
MT...................................................................................... 96
References ...........................................................................7 SKP 10 32x74 terminal ..................................................41
Remote I/O configuration parameters (Cr) - SKP 10 Remote Terminal 32x74 ................................211
Configuration remote .............................................143 SKW Analogue inputs....................................................32
Remote terminals ......................................................228 SKW22 - SKW22L remote LCD terminal ...........41; 212
Reset alarm log (folder EUr)...................................... 202 Stand-by ...........................................................................11
Resource selection criterion ......................................... 60 Start defrost .....................................................................90
Responsibility and Residual Risks ....................... 219 Start defrost setpoint.....................................................92
Reversal valve management........................................ 52 States Menu.....................................................................18
S SUPERVISION.................................................................222
SANITARY WATER AND ANTI-LEGIONNAIRE'S SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (FOLDER PAR/CF) ...32
DISEASE (FOLDER PAR/AS).................................... 102 T
Sanitary Water Antifreeze.......................................... 111 Table of Alarms............................................................ 127
Sanitary water heater in Heat/Cool mode *..........105 TECHNICAL DATA.........................................................215
Sanitary Water in HEAT mode ............................. 103 Technical data: ............................................................... 8
Sanitary Water Parameters (AS) ..............................157 Temperature control at INVERTER in Cool / Heat
Sanitary water regulation, AS mode ....................... 108 mode .............................................................................46
Sanitary Water, Cool mode ....................................... 105 Temperature control parameters (tr) -
SB600 General specifications.....................................215 temperature controller....................................... 148
SBW ● SDW636 models 2 TRIAC..............................228 Temperature control probes ........................................44
SBW SDW SCW 600 Analogue inputs ....................... 32 Temperature controller.................................................44
SE600 analogue inputs ................................................. 32 Temperature controller setpoint and hysteresis......42
Secondary (external) exchanger fan parameters (FE) Temperature probes.................................................... 203
- External Fan ...........................................................152 Time Band Parameters (tE) ....................................... 160
Selecting the circuit/evaporator................................. 60 TIME BANDS (FOLDER PAR/TE) ................................120
Selecting the compressor or power stage................. 61 Transformer ...................................................................217
Serial ............................................................................... 217 TRIAC.............................................................................. 203
Serial configurations - Protocol parameters ........... 40 TTL (COM 1) ................................................................. 203
Serial connections TTL connection ..........................203 Types of compressor.......................................................54
Setpoint and hysteresis differentials Adaptive Typical applications:........................................................ 8
function........................................................................ 43 U
Setpoint and hysteresis differentials Remote Unintended Use............................................................ 219
differentials (from serial) ......................................... 43 USER INTERFACE (FOLDER PAR/UI) ............................. 9
Setpoint and hysteresis from parameter value ....... 42 User interface parameters (UI) - User Interface
Setpoint differential: dynamic differential ............... 42 ..................................................................................... 145
Setpoint differential: Economy differential....... 43 W
Setpoint modification in cooling .......................... 97 Wiring diagrams ........................................................203
Setpoint regression ........................................................ 98 Wiring Diagrams ......................................................... 204
Setting the clock (CL).................................................... 19
Eliwell Controls S.r.l.
Via dell’ Industria, 15 Zona Industriale Paludi
32010 Pieve d’ Alpago (BL) Italy
Telephone +39 0437 986 111
Facsimile +39 0437 989 066

Sales:
+39 0437 986 100 (Italy)
+39 0437 986 200 (other countries)
[email protected]

Technical helpline:
+39 0437 986 300
E-mail [email protected]

www.eliwell.it

Energy SB-SD-SCW600
2009/12/
Cod: 8MA10222
© Eliwell Controls s.r.l. 2008-09 All rights
reserved.